manualshive.com logo in svg

Cambium Networks PTP 820 Series, User Manual, Page: 432 / 1149

Share
Download
Cambium Networks PTP 820 Series User Manual Download Page 432

Chapter 7:  Quality of Service (QoS) 

Configuring Marking 

 

phn-3965_006v002 

Page 7-21 

Configuring Marking 

This section includes: 

•

 

Marking Overview

 

•

 

Enabling Marking

 

•

 

Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table

 

•

 

Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table

 

Marking Overview 

When enabled, PTP 820G and PTP 820F 

's marking mechanism modifies each frame’s 802.1p UP bit and CFI/DEI 

bits according to the classifier decision. The CFI/DEI (color) field is modified according to the classifier and policer 
decision. The color is first determined by a classifier and may be later overwritten by a policer. Green color is 
represented by a CFI/DEI value of 0, and Yellow color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 1. Marking is performed 
on egress frames that are VLAN-tagged.  

The marking is performed according to global mapping tables that describe the 802.1p UP bits and the CFI bits (for 
C-VLAN tags) or DEI bits (for S VLAN tags). The marking bit in the service point egress attributes determines 
whether the frame is marked as green or according to the calculated color.  

 

 

Note 

The calculated color is sent to the queue manager regardless of whether the marking bit is set.

 

 

Regular marking is only performed when: 

•

 

The outer frame is S-VLAN, and S-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled, or 

•

 

The outer frame is C-VLAN, and C-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled. 

If marking and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN are both disabled, special marking is applied. Special 
marking means that marking is performed, but only according to the values defined for Green frames in the 
802.1Q and 802.1AD marking tables. 

When marking is performed, the C-VLAN or S-VLAN 802.1p UP bits are re-marked according to the calculated CoS 
and color, and the mapping table for C-VLAN or S-VLAN.  

Enabling Marking 

Marking is enabled and disabled on the service point level. See 

Ethernet Service Points 

–

 Egress Attributes

. 

Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table 

The 802.1Q Marking table enables you to modify the CoS to UP and CFI bit mapping that is implemented when 
marking is enabled. 

Summary of Contents for PTP 820 Series

Page 1: ...User Guide ...

Page 2: ...gly any copyrighted material of Cambium its licensors or the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the Cambium products described in this document may not be copied reproduced reverse engineered distributed merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Cambium Furthermore the purchase of Cambium products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by im...

Page 3: ... In non EU countries 7 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Configuration Tips 1 2 System Overview 1 4 PTP 820F 1 4 PTP 820G 1 4 Assured Platform 1 5 PTP 820F IDU Hardware Architecture 1 6 Front Panel Description 1 7 Ethernet Traffic interfaces 1 8 Ethernet Management interfaces 1 8 E1 DS1 Interface 1 9 Radio Interfaces 1 9 Power Interface 1 9 Synchronization Interface 1 10 Terminal Interface 1 10 External ...

Page 4: ...ayout 1 20 The Unit Summary Page 1 24 The Radio Summary Page 1 25 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure 1 27 Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 1 Assigning IP Addresses in the Network 2 2 Establishing a Connection 2 3 Connecting to the Unit with a Serial Connection 2 3 Connecting to the Unit with a LAN Connection 2 4 Logging On 2 6 Changing Your Password 2 7 Performing Quick Platform Setup 2 8 Config...

Page 5: ...3 2 Radio Configurations 3 2 TDM Configurations 3 3 Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard 3 5 Configuring a 1 0 Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard 3 5 Configuring a 1 0 Repeater Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard 3 10 Configuring a 1 1 HSB Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard 3 14 Configuring a 1 1 HSB SD Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard 3 18 Configuri...

Page 6: ...t 4 1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications 4 2 Configuring the Remote Unit s IP Address 4 3 Configuration SNMP 4 6 Configuring Trap Managers 4 9 Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP 4 11 Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server 4 12 Upgrading the Software 4 15 Viewing Current Software Versions 4 15 Software Upgrade Overview 4 16 Downloading and Installin...

Page 7: ...uring Signal Level PM Thresholds 5 31 Displaying PMs for the Combined IF Combining Signal 5 35 Displaying Modem BER Aggregate PMs 5 36 Displaying MSE PMs and Configuring MSE PM Thresholds 5 39 Displaying XPI PMs and Configuring XPI PM Thresholds 5 40 Displaying Traffic PMs 5 42 Chapter 6 Ethernet Services and Interfaces 6 1 Configuring Ethernet Service s 6 2 Ethernet Services Overview 6 2 General ...

Page 8: ...rview 7 21 Enabling Marking 7 21 Modifying the 802 1Q Marking Table 7 21 Modifying the 802 1AD Marking Table 7 23 Configuring WRED 7 24 WRED Overview 7 24 Configuring WRED Profiles 7 24 Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues 7 27 Configuring Egress Shaping 7 28 Egress Shaping Overview 7 28 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles 7 28 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles 7 31 Assigning a Queue Shaper Pr...

Page 9: ...isplaying the Local Unit s Parameters 8 45 Displaying LLDP Statistics 8 50 Chapter 9 TDM Services and Interfaces 9 1 TDM Overview 9 2 Configuring the E1 DS1 Interface 9 3 Configuring Native TDM Trails 9 7 Native TDM Trail Configuration Overview 9 7 General Guidelines for Provisioning TDM Services 9 9 Viewing TDM Trails 9 9 Configuring the Revertive Timer 9 10 Adding TDM Trails 9 10 Editing TDM Tra...

Page 10: ...efault Parameters 10 15 Displaying the Boundary Clock Advanced Parameters 10 16 Displaying the Boundary Clock Port Parameters 10 18 Displaying the Boundary Clock Port Statistics 10 19 Disabling 1588 PTP 10 20 Chapter 11 Access Management and Security 11 1 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters 11 2 Configuring the Password Security Parameters 11 4 Configuring the Session Timeout 11 5 Co...

Page 11: ...ment FM 12 24 Chapter 13 Web EMS Utilities 13 1 Restarting the HTTP Server 13 2 Calculating an ifIndex 13 3 Displaying Searching and Saving a list of MIB Entities 13 4 Chapter 14 Getting Started CLI 14 1 Establishing a Connection CLI 14 2 Logging On CLI 14 3 General CLI Commands 14 4 Changing Your Password CLI 14 5 Configuring In Band Management CLI 14 6 Changing the Management IP Address CLI 14 7...

Page 12: ...Requirements for FIPS Compliance CLI 14 35 Enabling FIPS Mode CLI 14 35 Chapter 15 Configuration Guide CLI 15 1 System Configurations CLI 15 2 Radio Configurations CLI 15 2 TDM Configurations 15 3 Configuring a 1 0 Link CLI 15 4 Configuring Multi Carrier ABC CLI 15 5 Multi Carrier ABC Overview CLI 15 5 Configuring a Multi Carrier ABC Group CLI 15 5 Removing Members from a Multi Carrier ABC Group C...

Page 13: ...ameters CLI 16 6 Displaying the SNMP Settings CLI 16 8 Configuring Trap Managers CLI 16 8 Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP CLI 16 9 Upgrading the Software CLI 16 10 Software Upgrade Overview CLI 16 10 Displaying Current Software Versions CLI 16 11 Configuring a Software Download CLI 16 12 Downloading a Software Package CLI 16 14 Installing and Upgrading Software CLI 16 15 Installing ...

Page 14: ...ing the Signal Level Threshold CLI 17 24 Configuring the MSE Thresholds and Displaying the MSE PMs CLI 17 25 Displaying ACM PMs CLI 17 27 Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs CLI 17 28 Chapter 18 Ethernet Services and Interfaces CLI 18 1 Configuring Ethernet Services CLI 18 2 Ethernet Services Overview CLI 18 2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services CLI 18 2 Def...

Page 15: ...tion on a Service Point CLI 19 13 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service CLI 19 13 Configuring Policers Rate Metering CLI 19 14 Overview of Rate Metering Policing CLI 19 14 Configuring Rate Meter Policer Profiles CLI 19 14 Displaying Rate Meter Profiles CLI 19 16 Deleting a Rate Meter Profile CLI 19 16 Attaching a Rate Meter Policer to an Interface CLI 19 16 Configuring the Line Comp...

Page 16: ...he MSTP Port Parameters CLI 20 22 Configuring LLDP CLI 20 27 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters CLI 20 28 Displaying the General LLDP Parameters CLI 20 29 Configuring LLDP Port Parameters CLI 20 30 Displaying the LLDP Local System Parameters CLI 20 31 Displaying the LLDP Remote System Parameters CLI 20 34 Displaying LLDP Statistics CLI 20 37 Chapter 21 TDM Services and Interfaces CLI 21 1 TDM...

Page 17: ...uring the Inactivity Timeout Period CLI 23 2 Configuring Blocking Upon Login Failure CLI 23 2 Configuring Blocking of Unused Accounts CLI 23 3 Configuring the Password Security Parameters CLI 23 5 Configuring Password Aging CLI 23 5 Configuring Password Strength Enforcement CLI 23 5 Forcing Password Change Upon First Login CLI 23 6 Displaying the System Password Settings CLI 23 6 Configuring Users...

Page 18: ...g an IDU or SM Card on an PTP 820F IDU 26 1 Replacing an IDU or SM Card on an PTP 820G IDU 26 3 Chapter 27 Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820G 27 1 Ethernet Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820G 27 2 Ethernet Traffic Interface Pin Outs 27 2 Ethernet Traffic Interface LEDs 27 2 Ethernet Management Interface Pin Outs 27 4 Ethernet Management Interface LEDs 27 4 E1 DS1 Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820G 27 6 E1 DS1 Interface Pi...

Page 19: ...rface LEDs and Pin Outs PTP 820F 28 24 Radio RJ 45 Interface Pin Outs 28 24 Radio Interface LEDs 28 24 Power Interface LEDs PTP 820 F 28 26 Synchronization Interface LEDs and Pin Outs PTP 820F 28 27 Synchronization Interface Pin Outs 28 27 Synchronization Interface LEDs 28 27 Terminal Interface Pin Outs PTP 820F 28 29 External Alarm Pin Outs PTP 820F 28 30 Unit ACT LED PTP 820F 28 31 Chapter 29 Al...

Page 20: ...igure 19 Management Interface on Front Panel PTP 820F 2 4 Figure 20 Management Interface on Front Panel PTP 820G 2 4 Figure 21 Login Page 2 6 Figure 22 Change User Password Page 2 7 Figure 23 Quick Configuration Platform Setup Page 2 9 Figure 24 Quick Configuration Platform Setup Summary Page 2 11 Figure 25 Local Networking Configuration Page 2 13 Figure 26 PTP 820G with Unit Redundancy Protection...

Page 21: ... 1 0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard Page 6 Summary Page 3 13 Figure 64 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 1 3 14 Figure 65 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 2 3 15 Figure 66 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 3 3 15 Figure 67 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 4 3 16 Figure 68 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 5 3 17 Figu...

Page 22: ...820F 3 30 Figure 93 Multi Carrier ABC Group Page Empty 3 33 Figure 94 Create ABC Group Wizard First Page 3 33 Figure 95 Create ABC Group Wizard Second Page 3 34 Figure 96 Create ABC Group Wizard Finish Page 3 34 Figure 97 Multi Carrier ABC Group Add Remove Members Page 3 35 Figure 98 LAG Page Empty 3 37 Figure 99 Create LAG Group Page 3 38 Figure 100 Create LAG Group Finish Page 3 38 Figure 101 LA...

Page 23: ...ons Page 4 15 Figure 138 Download Install Page HTTP HTTPS Download No File Selected 4 17 Figure 139 Download Install Page HTTP HTTPS Download File Selected 4 18 Figure 140 Download Install Page 4 20 Figure 141 FTP Parameters Page 4 20 Figure 142 Install Parameters Page 4 21 Figure 143 Install Parameters page 4 24 Figure 144 Timer Parameters Software Installation Page 4 24 Figure 145 Backup Files P...

Page 24: ...E PM Report Page 5 39 Figure 181 Modem MSE Thresholds Configuration Edit Page 5 40 Figure 182 XPI PM Report Page 5 40 Figure 183 XPI Thresholds Configuration Edit Page 5 42 Figure 184 Capacity PM Report Page 5 43 Figure 185 Ethernet Radio Capacity and Throughput Threshold Page 5 43 Figure 186 Utilization PM Report Page 5 44 Figure 187 Ethernet Radio Utilization Threshold Page 5 45 Figure 188 Frame...

Page 25: ...er Profile Page 7 15 Figure 225 Policer Profile Add Page 7 15 Figure 226 Logical Interfaces Policers Page Unicast Policer Default 7 17 Figure 227 Logical Interfaces Policers Page Multicast Policer 7 18 Figure 228 Logical Interfaces Policers Page Broadcast Policer 7 19 Figure 229 Logical Interfaces Policers Page Ethertype Policer 7 19 Figure 230 802 1Q Marking Page 7 22 Figure 231 802 1Q Marking Ed...

Page 26: ... MSTP Bridge General Attributes Page 8 17 Figure 264 MSTP Bridge Configuration ID Page 8 19 Figure 265 MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Page 8 20 Figure 266 MSTP Bridge CIST Page 8 23 Figure 267 MSTP Bridge MSTI Page 8 24 Figure 268 MSTP Bridge MSTI Edit Page 8 25 Figure 269 MSTP Bridge VLAN Page 8 26 Figure 270 MSTP Port Spanning Tree Page 8 27 Figure 271 MSTP Port Spanning Tree Edit Page 8 28 Figure 27...

Page 27: ...TDM PseudoWire Services Page 9 23 Figure 309 TDM Service Revertive Timer Configuration Page 9 26 Figure 310 Pseudowire Service Creation Interface 1 E1 DS1 9 27 Figure 311 Pseudowire Service Creation Interface 1 Radio Ethernet Cascading 9 28 Figure 312 Pseudowire Service Creation EC ID Selection Page Radio Ethernet Cascading TDM 9 30 Figure 313 Pseudowire Service Creation Protecting Interface Selec...

Page 28: ...350 1588 Boundary Clock Port Parameters Page 10 13 Figure 351 1588 Boundary Clock Port Parameters Edit Page 10 14 Figure 352 1588 Boundary Clock Clock Default Parameters Page 10 15 Figure 353 1588 Boundary Clock Clock Advanced Parameters Page 10 17 Figure 354 1588 Boundary Clock Port Statistics Page 10 19 Figure 355 Access Control General Configuration Page 11 2 Figure 356 Access Control User Acco...

Page 29: ...37 Figure 386 Security Certification Download and Install Page 11 38 Figure 387 FTP Parameters Page Security Certificate Download Install 11 38 Figure 388 Protocols Control Page 11 40 Figure 389 Security Log Upload Page 11 42 Figure 390 FTP Parameters Page Security Upload Page 11 42 Figure 391 Configuration Log Upload Page 11 45 Figure 392 FTP Parameters Page Configuration Log Upload 11 45 Figure ...

Page 30: ...88 Boundary Clock Time Parameters Sample Display CLI 22 22 Figure 432 1588 Boundary Clock Port Parameters CLI 22 24 Figure 433 1588 Boundary Clock Statistics CLI 22 25 Figure 434 Removing the SM Card Cover of a PTP 820F 26 1 Figure 435 Checking the Sockets for Foreign Matter 26 2 Figure 436 Removing the PTP 820G SM Card Cover 26 3 Figure 437 Checking the Sockets for Foreign Matter 26 4 Figure 438 ...

Page 31: ...ble for Protection and Management 2 18 Table 18 Activation Key Status Parameters 2 28 Table 19 Activation Key Status Parameters 2 30 Table 20 Time Services Parameters 2 32 Table 21 PTP 820G Radio Profiles for Fixed Interfces and RMC B 2 51 Table 22 PTP 820F Radio Profiles for Microwave RFU s 2 51 Table 23 PTP 820F Radio Profiles for RFU E 2 52 Table 24 MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page Parameters 2 52...

Page 32: ...s Parameters 6 25 Table 63 Ethernet TX Port PMs 6 35 Table 64 Ethernet RX Port PMs 6 37 Table 65 Logical Interface Classification Parameters 7 6 Table 66 Policer Profile Parameters 7 16 Table 67 Attached Interface Types 8 9 Table 68 ERPI Configuration Parameters 8 10 Table 69 ERPI State Parameters 8 11 Table 70 ERPI Statistics 8 13 Table 71 MSTP Bridge Configuration ID Parameters 8 19 Table 72 MST...

Page 33: ...1 Table 102 Pseudowire Tunnel Group Parameters 9 53 Table 103 Pseudowire Profile Parameters 9 56 Table 104 Pseudowire TDM Service Parameters 9 61 Table 105 Pseudowire TDM Service Status Parameters 9 64 Table 106 E1 DS1 PMs 9 66 Table 107 Native TDM Service PMs 9 68 Table 108 Pseudowire TDM Service PMs 9 69 Table 109 Sync Source Parameters 10 3 Table 110 Boundary Clock Default Parameters 10 16 Tabl...

Page 34: ...Parameters 16 4 Table 144 SNMPv3 CLI Parameters 16 7 Table 145 Software Download CLI Parameters 16 14 Table 146 RFU Software Upgrade CLI Parameters 16 15 Table 147 Configuration Management CLI Parameters 16 19 Table 148 Configuration Management CLI Parameters 16 22 Table 149 Configuration Import and Restore CLI Parameters 16 24 Table 150 Unit Parameters CLI Parameters 16 29 Table 151 NTP CLI Param...

Page 35: ...able 186 C VLAN CoS Preservation Mode CLI Parameters 18 22 Table 187 C VLAN Preservation CLI Parameters 18 23 Table 188 S VLAN CoS Preservation CLI Parameters 18 24 Table 189 Service Bundle CLI Parameters 18 25 Table 190 VLAN Bundle to Service Point CLI Parameters 18 25 Table 191 Display Service Point Attributes CLI Parameters 18 26 Table 192 MAC Address Forwarding Table Maximum Size CLI Parameter...

Page 36: ...rs 19 21 Table 228 Displaying Rate Meter Statistics CLI Parameters 19 22 Table 229 Marking Mode on Service Point CLI Parameters 19 24 Table 230 Marking Table for C VLAN UP Bits 19 25 Table 231 802 1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI Bit Mapping Table CLI Parameters 19 26 Table 232 802 1ad UP Marking Table S VLAN 19 27 Table 233 802 1ad UP Marking Table S VLAN CLI Parameters 19 28 Table 234 WRED Profile...

Page 37: ...0 General LLDP CLI Parameters 20 29 Table 271 LLDP Port CLI Parameters 20 30 Table 272 LLDP Local System CLI Parameters 20 36 Table 273 TDM Slot Configuration CLI Parameters 21 4 Table 274 E1 DS1 Configuration CLI Parameters 21 5 Table 275 Pseudowire Tunnel CLI Parameters 21 10 Table 276 Pseudowire Profile CLI Parameters 21 13 Table 277 Pseudowire OEM MD CLI Parameters 21 15 Table 278 Pseudowire O...

Page 38: ...Parameters 23 22 Table 313 Editing Alarm Text and Severity CLI Parameters 24 4 Table 314 Restoring Alarms to Default CLI Parameters 24 5 Table 315 Uploading Unit Info CLI Parameters 24 9 Table 316 Radio Loopback CLI Parameters 24 12 Table 317 Ethernet Loopback CLI Parameters 24 13 Table 318 E1 DS1 Loopback CLI Parameters 24 14 Table 319 Maintenance Domain CLI Parameters 24 16 Table 320 SOAM MEG CL...

Page 39: ...xxvii Table 336 Radio Interface Pin Out Diagram RFU1 RFU2 RFU3 28 24 Table 337 Synchronization Interface Pin Out Diagram 28 27 Table 338 Terminal Interface Pin Out Diagram 28 29 Table 339 External Alarm Interface Pin Out Diagram 28 30 ...

Page 40: ... QoS o Chapter 8 Ethernet Protocols o Chapter 9 TDM Services and Interfaces o Chapter 10 Synchronization o Chapter 11 Access Management and Security o Chapter 12 Alarm Management and Troubleshooting o Chapter 13 Web EMS Utilities CLI Configuration o Chapter 14 Getting Started CLI o Chapter 15 Configuration Guide CLI o Chapter 16 Unit Management CLI o Chapter 17 Radio Configuration CLI o Chapter 18...

Page 41: ...m support Main website http www cambiumnetworks com Sales enquiries solutions cambiumnetworks com Support enquiries support cambiumnetworks com Repair enquiries rma cambiumnetworks com Telephone number list http www cambiumnetworks com support contact support Address Cambium Networks Limited Global Headquarters 3800 Golf Road Suite 360 Rolling Meadows IL 60008 USA ...

Page 42: ...re of the customer or anyone acting on the customer s behalf to abide by the instructions system parameters or recommendations made in this document Cross references References to external publications are shown in italics Other cross references emphasized in blue text in electronic versions are active links to the references This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into se...

Page 43: ...for one 1 year from date of shipment from Cambium Networks or a Cambium distributor Cambium Networks warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service Cambium shall within this time at its own option either repair or replace the defective product within thirty 30 days of recei...

Page 44: ...zed security practices Security aspects to be considered are protecting the confidentiality integrity and availability of information and assets Assets include the ability to communicate information about the nature of the communications and information about the parties involved In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices however the implementation of ...

Page 45: ...he following format Warning Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning Cautions Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems software or individual items of equipment within a system However this damage presents no danger to personnel A caution has the following format Caution Caution text and consequence for not fo...

Page 46: ...m equipment in EU countries Disposal of Cambium equipment European Union EU Directive 2002 96 EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Do not dispose of Cambium equipment in landfill sites For disposal instructions refer to http www cambiumnetworks com support Disposal of surplus packaging Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites In the EU it is the individual recipient s res...

Page 47: ...on This section includes Configuration Tips System Overview PTP 820F IDU Hardware Architecture PTP 820G IDU Hardware Architecture Front Panel Description RFU Overview The Web Based Element Management System Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure ...

Page 48: ...nterface must be RJ 45 or SFP not Auto Type See Synchronization In Band Management In order to use in band management with an external switch it must be supported on the external switch When configuring in band management be sure to tag the management traffic to avoid overflow of the CPU For instructions on configuring in band management on the PTP 820 see Configuring In Band Management Link Aggre...

Page 49: ...Chapter 1 Introduction Configuration Tips phn 3965_006v002 Page 1 3 ...

Page 50: ...20F consists of an indoor unit IDU and one or two radio frequency units RFUs PTP 820F can be used with MultiCore RFU D and single carrier RFU S PTP 820G PTP 820G is a compact split mount hauling solution for ring nodes Its fixed configuration and low power consumption make it simple to install and maintain Hosting the common capabilities of the PTP 820 platform it provides a cost effective reliabl...

Page 51: ...identiality and integrity of their users data The PTP 820 Assured platform is compliant with FIPS 140 2 including Compliance with FIPS 140 2 specifications for cryptography module FIPS 140 2 Level 2 physical security AES 256 encryption FIPS 197 over radio links The PTP 820 Assured platform also provides Secured communication and protocols for management interface Centralized user authentication ma...

Page 52: ...es RFU1 and RFU 2 1 x radio or 2 5 1 GbE combo interface RFU3 SFP5 RFU3 2 5GE5 Note In System Release 10 0 only one radio interface RFU1 can be used per PTP 820F unit When used with a MultiCore RFU RFU D or RFU D HP this interface can support two radio carriers However the second carrier must part of a Multi Carrier ABC group in order to be utilized Also in System Release 10 0 only four Ethernet i...

Page 53: ...Alarms DB9 External Alarms Terminal Interface RJ 45 Terminal Interface 2 x FE Management Interfaces RJ 45 Ethernet Management Interfaces Sync Interface In Out RJ 45 Synchronization Interface 4 x 1 GbE Combo Interfaces GbE 1 4 SFP 1 4 Ethernet Traffic Interfaces 1 x 2 5 1 GbE Combo Interface 2 5GE6 SFP6 1 Ethernet Traffic Interfaces 2 x Electrical Optical RFU Interfaces RFU1 RFU2 Radio Interfaces 1...

Page 54: ...0 units in a node for multi directional applications based on hybrid Ethernet and Native or pseudowire TDM services In addition two pairs of electrical and optical interfaces towards the right of the front panel can be used to provide either two Ethernet interfaces or one Ethernet interface and one radio interface RFU3 SFP5 and RFU3 2 5GE5 A combo interface that can be used as either an SFP or RJ ...

Page 55: ...des an MDR69 connector in which 16 E1 DS1 interfaces are available ports 1 through 16 Radio Interfaces PTP 820F includes two combo radio interfaces electrical or optical RFU1 and RFU2 A third interface can also be used as a combo radio interface electrical or optical RFU3 See Ethernet Traffic Interfaces Note Only RFU1 is available for use in System Release 10 0 For some RFUs PoE power can be suppl...

Page 56: ...nal interface for local CLI management of the unit External Alarms PTP 820F includes a DB9 dry contact external alarms interface The external alarms interface supports five input alarms and a single output alarm The input alarms are configurable according to 1 Intermediate 2 Critical 3 Major 4 Minor 5 Warning The output alarm is configured according to predefined categories Storage Memory Card Eac...

Page 57: ...Chapter 1 Introduction Front Panel Description phn 3965_006v002 Page 1 11 Figure 5 SM Card and Cover ...

Page 58: ...DU and the RFU and provides 48V DC power to the RFU A PTP 820G IDU contains six Ethernet interfaces one or two radio interfaces depending on the hardware configuration and optionally a 16 x E1 DS1 interface The IDU includes two FE management interfaces a DB9 dry contact external alarms interface an RJ 45 synchronization interface and an RJ 45 terminal console interface for connection to a local cr...

Page 59: ...ptional E1 DS1 Interface Optional External Alarms DB9 External Alarms TDM Sync Interface In Out RJ 45 Synchronization Interface 2 x FE Management Interfaces RJ 45 Ethernet Management Interfaces Terminal Interface RJ 45 Terminal Interface 2 x GbE Dual Mode GbE Electrical or Cascading Interfaces RJ 45 Ethernet Traffic Interfaces 2 x GbE Electrical Interfaces RJ 45 Ethernet Traffic Interfaces 2 x GbE...

Page 60: ...g multiple PTP 820G units in a node for multi carrier and multi directional applications based on hybrid Ethernet and TDM Native or pseudowire services Ethernet Management Interfaces PTP 820G contains two FE management interfaces which connect to a single RJ 45 physical connector on the front panel MGMT Figure 7 Management Interface Pin Connections Management Switch TX TX RX RX TX TX RX RX Port 1 ...

Page 61: ...adio interface Radio 2 Power Interface PTP 820G receives an external supply of 48V current via a power interface The PTP 820G monitors the power supply for under voltage and includes reverse polarity protection so that if the positive and negative inputs are mixed up the system remains shut down The allowed power input range for the PTP 820G is 40V to 60V An under voltage alarm is triggered if the...

Page 62: ...includes a DB9 dry contact external alarms interface The external alarms interface supports five input alarms and a single output alarm The input alarms are configurable according to 1 Intermediate 2 Critical 3 Major 4 Minor 5 Warning The output alarm is configured according to predefined categories ...

Page 63: ...PTP 820F The following RFUs can be used with PTP 820G RFU C A state of the art RFU designed for a broad range of interfaces and capacities from 10 Mbps up to 500 Mbps RFU C operates in a wide range of spectrum bands from 6 to 42 GHz The premium version RFU Ce provides a range of modulations from QPSK to 2048 QAM RFU C and RFU Ce require RFU SW version 2 17 1500HP RFU HP 1500HP and RFU HP are high ...

Page 64: ...n instructions see Configuring the IDU RFU Connection PTP 820F only For an RFU D RFU E or RFU S connecting to an optical RFU interface and for an RFU D HP connecting to either an electrical or an optical RFU interface an external DC power cable is required to supply power to the RFU Table 5 IDU RFU Cable connection for PTP 820F RFU Interface Cable Type Maximum Length 6 11 GHz 13 42 GHz RFU D Optic...

Page 65: ...er Supply for PTP 820G RFU C RFU HP 1500HP and RFU A RFUs are connected to the IDU by a coaxial cable RG 223 up to 100 m 300 ft Belden 9914 RG 8 up to 300 m 1000 ft or equivalent with an N type connector male on the RFU and a TNC connector on thePTP 820 These RFUs are powered via this cable ...

Page 66: ...les you to configure security features User Management Enables you to define users and user groups The Web EMS opens to a page that summarizes the key unit parameters The next page when scrolling down the Web EMS main menu summarizes the key radio parameters See The Unit Summary page and The Radio Summary page A Web Based EMS connection to the PTP 820G can be opened using a web browser Internet Ex...

Page 67: ...age provides the page s basic functionality Figure 8 Main Web EMS Page Front Panel Representation Optionally you can display a representation of the PTP 820G front panel by clicking either the arrow in the center or the arrow at the right of the bottom toolbar Figure 9 Displaying a Representation of the Front Panel ...

Page 68: ...ation of the Front Panel PTP 820F Figure 11 Main Web EMS Page with Representation of the Front Panel PTP 820G Related Pages Drop Down List Certain pages include a Related Pages drop down list on the upper right of the main section of the page You can navigate to a page related to the current page by selecting the page from this list ...

Page 69: ...Chapter 1 Introduction The Web Based Element Management System phn 3965_006v002 Page 1 23 Figure 12 Related Pages Drop Down List ...

Page 70: ...uding the part number and serial number of each component For additional information see Displaying Unit Inventory ODU Inventory The RFU used by each radio carrier including the part number and serial number of each RFU and the software version running on each RFU For additional information see Configuring the Radio Parameters The Unit Summary page can be customized to include only specific column...

Page 71: ...ps to which the link is assigned such as LAG XPIC protection and or Multi Carrier ABC and the IP address both IPv4 and IPv6 of the remote carrier For additional information see Configuring the Radio Parameters Radio Information The TX and RX frequencies frequency separation and channel bandwidth on which the link is operating For additional information see Configuring the Radio Parameters Remote R...

Page 72: ...you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radi...

Page 73: ...s configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set admin on Th...

Page 74: ...rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max tx level Table Transmit TX Level CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted ...

Page 75: ...apter 1 Introduction The Web Based Element Management System phn 3965_006v002 Page 1 29 Note When one or more columns are hidden the icon turns white Figure 16 Unit Radio Summary Page Customizing Columns ...

Page 76: ... Web EMS Menu Structure The following table shows the Web EMS menu hierarchy with links to the sections in this document that provide instructions for the relevant menu item Note Some menu items are only available if the relevant activation key or feature is enabled Table 6 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy Platform Menu ...

Page 77: ...iating Communications Management Networking Remote Configuring the Remote Unit s IP Address Management SNMP SNMP Parameters Configuration SNMP Management SNMP Trap Managers Configuring Trap Managers Management SNMP V3 Users Configuration SNMP Software Timer Parameters Configuring a Timed Installation Software Versions Viewing Current Software Versions Software Download Install Downloading and Inst...

Page 78: ...files Security Access Control User Accounts Configuring Users Accounts Security Access Control Password Management Configuring the Password Security Parameters Security Access Control Change Password Changing Your Password Security Access Control Radius Radius Configuration Activating RADIUS Authentication Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes Security Access Control Radius Radius Users Viewing...

Page 79: ...owire Card Parameters TDM PseudoWire Advanced DS0 Bundles Reserved for future use TDM PseudoWire Advanced Service OAM Maintenance Domain Configuring Pseudowire Maintenance Domains MDs TDM PseudoWire Advanced Service OAM Maintenance Association Configuring Pseudowire Maintenance Associations MAs TDM PseudoWire Advanced Service OAM Loopback Reserved for future use TDM PseudoWire Advanced Service OAM...

Page 80: ...20F only Remote Radio Parameters Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters Radio BER Thresholds Configuring BER Thresholds and Displaying current BER ATPC Configuring ATPC and Override TimerConfiguring ATPC Payload Encryption PTP 820G only Configuring AES 256 Payload Encryption Ethernet Interface Configuration Configuring Frame Cut Through Configuring Header De Duplication Ethernet Interface Counter...

Page 81: ...echanism for maintenance operations that eliminates the possibility of accidently leaving the radio muted after the maintenance has been completed By default the timer is 10 minutes Note In contrast to an ordinary mute a timed mute is not persistent This means that if the unit is reset the radio is not muted when the unit comes back online even if the timer had not expired Also in unit and radio p...

Page 82: ...ote Note If the carrier belongs to an XPIC group you must disable the group before changing the TX or RX frequency Table 22 Transmit TX Frequency CLI Parameters Parame ter Inpu t Typ e Permitt ed Values Description tx frequen cy Nu mbe r Depend s on the MRMC script and RFU type The desired TX frequency in KHz and if local remote is set to enable the desired RX frequency of the remote unit local re...

Page 83: ...n dBm The following command sets the TX level of fixed radio interface 1 to 10 dBm radio 1 1 rf set tx level 10 Configuring the Radio MRMC Script s MRMC Symmetrical Scripts FCC Entering Radio View CLI To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following comm...

Page 84: ...he unit comes back online even if the timer had not expired Also in unit and radio protection configurations a timed mute is not copied to the mate unit or radio and no mismatch alarm is raised if a timed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmut...

Page 85: ...s set to enable the desired RX frequency of the remote unit local remote Vari able enable disable Optional Determines whether to apply the configured TX frequency value to the RX frequency of the remote unit By default the configured TX frequency value is applied to the RX frequency of the remote unit The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 1 to 12900000 KHz and sets t...

Page 86: ...tatistics Counters Displaying Defective Block Counters PM Statistics Signal Level Displaying Signal Level PMs and Configuring Signal Level PM Thresholds PM Statistics Combined Displaying PMs for the Combined IF Combining Signal PM Statistics Aggregate Displaying Modem BER Aggregate PMs PM Statistics MSE Displaying MSE PMs and Configuring MSE PM Thresholds PM Statistics XPI Displaying XPI PMs and c...

Page 87: ...ion on a Logical Interface Assigning Policers to Interfaces Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface Performing Ethernet Loopback Interfaces ASP LLF Configuring Au...

Page 88: ...2 1Q Marking Table QoS Marking 802 1AD Modifying the 802 1AD Marking Table QoS WRED WRED Profile Configuring WRED QoS Shaper Queue Profiles Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles QoS Shaper Service Bundle Profiles Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles QoS Scheduler Priority Profiles Configuring Priority Profiles QoS Scheduler WFQ Profiles Configuring WFQ Profiles Protocols G 8032 General Attribute...

Page 89: ...s Displaying the Unit s Management Parameters Protocols LLDP Advanced Configuration Management TLV Displaying the Unit s Management Parameters Protocols LLDP Advanced Remote System Management Displaying Peer Unit s Management Parameters Protocols LLDP Advanced Remote System Remote Table Displaying Peer Unit s Management Parameters Protocols LLDP Advanced Local System Parameters Displaying the Loca...

Page 90: ...on Protocols LACP Aggregation Displaying LACP Aggregation Status Parameters Protocols LACP Port Status Displaying LACP Port Status Parameters Protocols LACP Port Statistics Displaying LACP Port Statistics Protocols LACP Port Debug Displaying LACP Port Debug Statistics Table 11 PTP 820G Web EMS Menu Hierarchy Cascading Menu ...

Page 91: ...Chapter 1 Introduction Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure phn 3965_006v002 Page 1 45 Sub Menus For Further Information ...

Page 92: ... Down in the Interface Manager If the port is currently configured as an RFU port it is listed as Radio Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager If the port is currently configured as an Ethernet port it is listed as Ethernet Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager 2 In the Radio Unit page set the Admin status of Radio Unit Slot 1 Port 3 to Down 3 If ther...

Page 93: ... 47 Figure RFU Ethernet Interface Configuration Page 7 Select Radio Unit Slot 1 Port 3 and click Edit The RFU Ethernet Interface Configuration Edit page opens Figure RFU Ethernet Interface Configuration Edit Page 8 In the Interface Type field select RFU or Ethernet 9 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 94: ...e Both Eth5 and Eth6 can be configured to either 1 GE or 2 5 GE The other PTP 820F Ethernet ports support 1 GE only If you configured the port as an RFU interface make sure to set the Radio Unit parameters as necessary Configuring Cascading Interfaces Optional Table 12 PTP 820G Web EMS Menu Hierarchy Sync Menu Sub Menus For Further Information Sync Source Configuring the Sync Source Outgoing Clock...

Page 95: ...Repeater Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard PIPE Single Carrier 1 1 HSB Configuring a 1 1 HSB Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard PIPE Multi Carrier ABC 1 1 HSB SD Configuring a 1 1 HSB SD Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard PIPE Multi Carrier ABC N 0 Configuring an N 0 Multi Carrier ABC Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard Table 14 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy Utilities Menu Sub...

Page 96: ...rd Performing Quick Platform Setup Configuring In Band Management Changing the Management IP Address Configuring Unit Redundancy for the PTP 820G Determining ETSI or ANSI FCC TDM Mode Configuring the Activation Key Setting the Time and Date Optional Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager Configuring RFU3 SFP5 RFU3 2 5GE5 as an Ethernet or RFU Interface PTP 820F only ...

Page 97: ... currently configured as an RFU port it is listed as Radio Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager If the port is currently configured as an Ethernet port it is listed as Ethernet Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager 2 In the Radio Unit page set the Admin status of Radio Unit Slot 1 Port 3 to Down 3 If there are any service points attached to the port...

Page 98: ...thernet Interface Configuration Edit Page 8 In the Interface Type field select RFU or Ethernet 9 Click Apply then Close 10 If you configured the port as an Ethernet interface you must set the port s admin state to Up in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager If you configured the port as an RFU interface its admin state is Up automatically If you configured the port as...

Page 99: ...guring Cascading Interfaces Optional Configuring the Radio Parameters Entering Radio View CLI To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears rad...

Page 100: ... is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set admin on ...

Page 101: ...ame value radio 1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx le...

Page 102: ...each network element a dedicated IP address according to an IP plan for the total network See Changing the Management IP Address By default all elements have the same IP settings IP address 192 168 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Caution If the connection over the link is established with identical IP addresses an IP address conflict will occur and remote connection to the element on the other side ...

Page 103: ...Connect a serial RS 232 cable with an RJ 45 interface from the laptop or PC you are using to configure the unit to the Terminal Interface on the front panel Figure 17 Terminal Interface on Front Panel PTP 820F Figure 18 Terminal Interface on Front Panel PTP 820G 2 Configure the following settings for the COM port you are using on your PC or laptop o Bits per Second 115 200 o Data Bits 8 o Parity N...

Page 104: ...nt Interface on Front Panel PTP 820F Figure 20 Management Interface on Front Panel PTP 820G To establish a connection with the PTP 820G or PTP 820F unit it is necessary to configure an IP address on the PC or laptop within the same subnet as the PTP 820G or PTP 820F unit The default chassis IP address is 192 168 1 1 For example you can set the PC or laptop address to 192 168 1 10 and the subnet ma...

Page 105: ...tion phn 3965_006v002 Page 2 10 5 Select Local Area Connection Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IP and set the following parameters o IP address 192 168 1 10 o Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 o No default gateway 6 Click OK to apply the settings ...

Page 106: ...gging On 1 Open an Internet browser Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox or Google Chrome 2 Enter the default IP address 192 168 1 1 in the Address Bar The Login page opens Figure 21 Login Page 3 Enter the following values o User Name admin o Password admin 4 Click Apply ...

Page 107: ...hange User Password page opens Figure 22 Change User Password Page 2 In the Old password field enter the current password For example upon initial login enter the default password admin 3 In the New password field enter a new password If Enforce Password Strength is activated see Configuring the Password Security Parameters the password must meet the following criteria o Password length must be at...

Page 108: ... Demo Activation Key Enable Disable SNMP Parameters These items enable you to configure the basic platform parameters quickly in a single Web EMS page Combined with the quick link configuration wizards this enables you to configure a new link in the field quickly and efficiently to the point where the link is up and functioning and any necessary advanced configurations can be performed remotely wi...

Page 109: ...ess subnet mask and optionally a default gateway If you want to use an IPv6 address see Changing the Management IP Address 4 In the Date Time section you can enable Network Time Protocol NTP NTP distributes Coordinated Universal Time UTC throughout the system using a jitter buffer to neutralize the effects of variable latency If you select Enable the NTP version and NTP server IP address fields ar...

Page 110: ...indicating that demo mode is about to expire If you set Demo admin to Disable the Activation Key field is displayed Enter a valid activation key in this field For a full explanation of activation keys see Configuring the Activation Key In the SNMP Parameters section you can set whether to enable or disable SNMP monitoring in the Admin field and set the SNMP Read Community and SNMP Write Community ...

Page 111: ...Chapter 2 Getting Started Performing Quick Platform Setup phn 3965_006v002 Page 2 16 Figure 24 Quick Configuration Platform Setup Summary Page ...

Page 112: ...ce ID 1025 The management service is a multipoint service that connects the two local management ports and the network element host CPU in a single service In order to enable in band management you must add at least one service point to the management service in the direction of the remote site or sites from which you want to access the unit for management For instructions on adding service points...

Page 113: ...ter the address in IPv4 format in this field and or in IPv6 format in the IPv6 Address field The unit will receive communications whether they are sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6 address 5 If you enter an IPv4 address In the IPv4 Subnet mask field enter the subnet mask 6 Optionally in the IPv4 Default gateway field enter the default gateway address 7 Optionally in the IPv6 Address field enter...

Page 114: ...Chapter 2 Getting Started Changing the Management IP Address phn 3965_006v002 Page 2 19 10 Click Apply ...

Page 115: ... redundancy utilizes two PTP 820G units with a single antenna to provide hardware protection for the PTP 820G IDU and RFU including protection for Ethernet radio and TDM interfaces One PTP 820G operates in active mode and the other operates in standby mode If a protection switchover occurs the roles are switched The standby unit is managed by the active unit The standby unit s transmitter is muted...

Page 116: ...e PTP 820G unit redundancy can be used with the following radio configurations 2 x 1 0 PTP 820G unit with a 1 0 configuration protecting another PTP 820G unit with a 1 0 configuration 2 x 2 0 PTP 820G unit with a 2 0 configuration protecting another PTP 820G unit with a 2 0 configuration To configure 2 x 2 0 protection simply configure the two radios according to your network requirements then con...

Page 117: ...able unit redundancy on the unit that will be the active unit See Enabling Unit Redundancy o Verify that the proper cables for unit redundancy are connected to the units See Cabling Requirements for Unit Redundancy Note that the first unit you configured should automatically be assigned by the system to be the active unit because it will have no alarms In contrast the second unit will have at leas...

Page 118: ... E1 DS1 Protection Part Number Description C000082L154A PTP 820G TDM Protecftion Y cable 0 6m 120 ohm Cabling for T3 Synchronization If T3 synchronization input is being used a Y cable is used to connect to the active and standby Sync interfaces Inter IDU Protection Connectivity and Management PTP 820G units in a redundancy configuration must have their CPUs interconnected in order to synchronize ...

Page 119: ...ght of the MGMT port is Green when the interface is enabled and the link between the IDUs is operational See Ethernet Management Interface LEDs Configuring Ethernet Interface Protection No special software configuration is required for Optical Splitter and Electrical Splitter modes For Line Protection mode you must perform the following steps 1 Configure the GbE ports on the external switch in LAC...

Page 120: ...a Hard Cold Reset CLI Note Because a unit reset is required when changing the Interface Mode to or from LACP it is recommended to perform copy to mate immediately after changing the Interface Mode to or from LACP then to reset the active unit only after the standby unit is back up after the copy to mate operation Enabling Unit Redundancy To enable unit redundancy 1 Select Platform Management Unit ...

Page 121: ...which is now the Standby unit is no longer valid and the management port of the Standby unit becomes non operational Note however that if switchover takes place before you perform copy to mate Step 5 v the original IP of the Standby unit now the Active unit becomes the working IP for management of both units Management of the Standby unit is performed via the Active unit via the protection cable P...

Page 122: ...figuring Unit Parameters Disabling enabling Radio TX mute See Configuring the Radio Parameters Clearing the Radio and RMON counters See Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics and Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics Configuring the activation key See Configuring the Activation Key When configuring MRMC scripts after enabling unit redundancy it should be done in the following order It is i...

Page 123: ...redundancy is functional Radio protection is not functional if the management connection to the mate is down Protection Activity The activity state of the device Active or Standby Protection Link to Mate Indicates whether the two units the Active and the Standby are physically connected Copy to mate status Indicates the status of the last copy to mate operation Protection Admin Indicates whether u...

Page 124: ...t You can also perform a force switch to the standby unit even if the protection fault level is higher in the standby unit Force switch also implements lockout To perform a manual switch or force switch 1 Select Platform Management Unit Redundancy The Unit Redundancy page opens 2 Click Manual Switch or Force Switch 3 Confirm the action in the confirmation window that appears Performing Lockout At ...

Page 125: ...es place 5 Change the IP address of the active local unit 6 Disable all active traffic interfaces on the active local unit This should be performed in a single action by selecting all of the relevant interfaces in the Interface Manager page and selecting Down Apply in the Multiple Selection Operation box See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager This causes switchover on the local pair 7 Disab...

Page 126: ...e set to operate according to the ETSI standard in E1 mode For instructions on configuring the system to operate according to the ANSI FCC standard DS1 see Configuring the Unit to Operate in ANSI Mode CLI If you must change the system to ANSI mode you should do so before performing any other configuration because changing to ANSI mode resets the system and restores the default configuration ...

Page 127: ...y a valid activation key In the event that the activation key enabled capacity and feature set is exceeded an Activation Key Violation alarm occurs and the Web EMS displays a yellow background and an activation key violation warning After a 48 hour grace period all other alarms are hidden until the capacity and features in use are brought within the activation key s capacity and feature set In ord...

Page 128: ...he event of an Activation Key Violation alarm this field displays the number of hours remaining in the 48 hour activation key violation grace period Sanction state If an Activation Key Violation alarm has occurred and the 48 hour activation key violation grace period has expired without the system having been brought into conformance with the activation key enabled capacity and feature set Yes app...

Page 129: ...ded Successfully event is sent to the Event Log Activating a Demo Activation Key To activate a demo activation key 1 Select Platform Activation Key Activation Key Configuration The Activation Key Configuration page opens Figure 30 2 In the Demo admin field select Enable 3 Click Apply The Demo timer field displays the number of hours that remain before the demo activation key expires Displaying a L...

Page 130: ...ntifies the feature Feature name The name of the feature Feature Description A description of the feature Activation key enabled feature usage Indicates whether the activation key enabled feature is actually being used Activation key enabled feature credit Indicates whether the feature is allowed under the activation key that is currently installed in the unit Activation key violation status Indic...

Page 131: ...t holds the UTC offset and daylight savings time information for the location of the unit Each management unit presenting the information uses its own UTC offset to present the information with the correct time Note If the unit is powered down the time and date are saved for 96 hours four days If the unit remains powered down for longer the time and date may need to be reconfigured To display and ...

Page 132: ...relative to GMT This is used to offset the clock relative to GMT according to the global meridian location UTC offset minutes The required minutes offset positive or negative relative to GMT This is used to offset the clock relative to GMT according to the global meridian location Daylight Saving Start Time Month The month when Daylight Savings Time begins Day The date in the month when Daylight S...

Page 133: ...o Slot 1 Port 1 If the PTP 820F is connected to a MultiCore RFU the radio interfaces are displayed in the Web EMS as Radio Slot 1 Port 1 and Radio Slot 1 Port 2 where Port 1 represents the first radio carrier on the MultiCore RFU and Port 2 represents the second radio carrier on the MultiCore RFU The MAC address of the MultiCore RFU is presented in the Port 1 row Note Radio Slot 1 Port 2 always ap...

Page 134: ...r Edit page opens Figure 35 Interface Manager Edit Page 3 In the Admin status field select Up to enable the interface or Down to disable the interface 4 Click Apply then Close To enable or disable multiple interfaces 1 Select the interfaces in the Interface Manager table or select all the interfaces by selecting the check box in the top row 2 In the Multiple Selection Operation section underneath ...

Page 135: ... the second management interface you must use the CLI Enter the following command in root view to enable the interface root platform management local mngt admin state set enable port mng2 To disable the second management interface enter the following command in root view root platform management local mngt admin state set disable port mng2 To display the status of both management interfaces enter ...

Page 136: ...nager If the port is currently configured as an RFU port it is listed as Radio Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager If the port is currently configured as an Ethernet port it is listed as Ethernet Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager 2 In the Radio Unit page set the Admin status of Radio Unit Slot 1 Port 3 to Down 3 If there are any service points ...

Page 137: ...e opens Figure RFU Ethernet Interface Configuration Edit Page 8 In the Interface Type field select RFU or Ethernet 9 Click Apply then Close 10 If you configured the port as an Ethernet interface you must set the port s admin state to Up in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager If you configured the port as an RFU interface its admin state is Up automatically If you co...

Page 138: ...al GE traffic interfaces or as cascading interfaces In PTP 820G GbE1 CS1 and GbE2 CS2 can be configured as normal GE traffic interfaces or as cascading interfaces When operating in cascading mode these interfaces can handle hybrid Ethernet and Native TDM traffic enabling operators to create links among multiple Product Series units in a node for multi directional applications based on hybrid Ether...

Page 139: ... 3 In the Interface Type field select Cascading 4 Click Apply then Close Note You cannot change the status of an interface Cascading or Ethernet if a service point is configured on the interface You cannot change the status of an interface Cascading or Ethernet if the interface belongs to a LAG ...

Page 140: ...adio frequencies Configure the TX level You can do these tasks perform other radio configuration tasks and display the radio parameters in the Radio Parameters page To configure the radio parameters 1 Select Radio Radio Parameters The Radio Parameters page opens Figure 39 Radio Parameters Page 2 In the Radio table select the radio you want to configure and click Edit A separate configuration page ...

Page 141: ...atically calculates and displays the frequency separation in the TX to RX frequency separation MHz field based on the configured TX and RX frequencies iv Optionally select Set also remote unit to apply the frequency settings to the remote unit as well as the local unit 4 Set the other radio parameters in the Configuration parameters section i In the TX Level dBm field enter the desired TX signal l...

Page 142: ... for future use For a description of the read only parameters in the Status parameters section see Viewing the Radio Status and Settings Enabling Link ID Mismatch Security You can configure the unit to block all Ethernet and TDM traffic over the radio link in the event of a Link ID mismatch by enabling Link ID Mismatch Security When Link ID Mismatch Security is enabled and a Link ID mismatch occur...

Page 143: ... view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 The following command enters radio view for an RMC in expansion slot 3 root radio slot 3 port...

Page 144: ...gured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set admin on The follo...

Page 145: ...e 1 to 12900000 KHz and sets the RX frequency of the remote unit to the same value radio 1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio ...

Page 146: ...ental impact on radio operation Note The list of available scripts reflects activation key enabled features Only scripts within your activation key enabled capacity will be displayed To display the MRMC scripts and their basic parameters and select a script 1 Select one of the following depending on the regulatory framework in which you are operating o To display ETSI scripts select Radio MRMC Sym...

Page 147: ...RMC Symmetrical Scripts Page ANSI 2 In the Select Radio Interface field select the slot for which you want to configure the script 3 Select the script you want to assign to the radio The currently assigned script is marked by a check mark Script ID s 4505 and 1004 in the images above 4 Click Configure Script A separate MRMC Symmetrical Scripts page opens ...

Page 148: ... MRMC Script s phn 3965_006v002 Page 2 53 Figure 44 MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page Configuration PTP 820F Figure 45 MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page Configuration PTP 820G 5 In the MRMC Script operational mode field select the ACM mode Fixed or Adaptive ...

Page 149: ...fy a maximum profile to inhibit inefficient transmission levels o In Adaptive ACM mode TX and RX rates are dynamic An ACM enabled radio system automatically chooses which profile to use according to the channel fading conditions If you select Adaptive two fields are displayed enabling you to select minimum and maximum ACM profiles Figure 46 MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page Configuration Adaptive Mode...

Page 150: ...or PT 820G it also depends on whether you are configuring the MRMC script for a fixed interface For PTP 820F it depends on whether you are using a Microwave RFU RFU D and RFU S or an E Band RFU RFU E o PTP 820G For fixed interfaces and RMC B up to 11 profiles 0 10 are available o PTP 820F For Microwave RFUs up to 13 profiles 0 12 are available o PTP 820F For RFU E up to 10 profiles 0 9 are availab...

Page 151: ...Profile 5 128 QAM Profile 6 256 QAM Profile 7 512 QAM Profile 8 1024 QAM Strong FEC Profile 9 1024 QAM Light FEC Profile 10 2048 QAM Table 24 PTP 820F Radio Profiles for Microwave RFU s Profile Modulation Profile 0 BPSK Profile 1 QPSK Profile 2 8 PSK Profile 3 16 QAM Profile 4 32 QAM Profile 5 64 QAM Profile 6 128 QAM Profile 7 256 QAM Profile 8 512 QAM Profile 9 1024 QAM Strong FEC Profile 10 102...

Page 152: ... ID A unique ID assigned to the script in the system Channel bandwidth MHz The script s channel bandwidth channel spacing Occupied bandwidth MHz The script s occupied bandwidth Script Name The script s name ACM Support Indicates whether the script supports Adaptive Coding Modulation ACM In ACM mode a range of profiles determines Tx and Rx rates This allows the radio to modify its transmit and rece...

Page 153: ... to use according to the channel fading conditions MRMC Script profile Fixed ACM mode only The profile in which the system will operate MRMC Script maximum profile Adaptive ACM mode only The maximum profile for the script For example if you select a maximum profile of 5 the system will not climb above profile 5 even if channel fading conditions allow it MRMC Script minimum profile Adaptive ACM mod...

Page 154: ...ncrease transmit power to compensate for the signal degradation resulting in a deeper reduction in capacity The PTP 820G is capable of adjusting power on the fly and optimizing the available capacity at every modulation point To enable ACM with adaptive transmit power 1 Select Radio Radio Parameters The Radio Parameters page opens Figure 39 2 Select the carrier in the Radio table and click Edit A ...

Page 155: ...compliant Note To display the part numbers of the hardware components of PTP 820 unit see Displaying Unit Inventory Special labels must be affixed to a FIPS compliant PTP 820G unit These labels are tamper evident and must be applied in such a way that it is not possible to open the chassis These labels must be replaced whenever components are added to or removed from the unit Replacement labels ca...

Page 156: ...e 2 In the FIPS admin configuration field select Enable 3 Click Apply Note Changing the FIPS configuration causes a unit reset After enabling FIPS The MD5 option for SNMPv3 is blocked After any system reset the length of time before users can log back into the system is longer than usual due to FIPS related self testing ...

Page 157: ...ring Grouping Optional At this point in the configuration process you should configure any interface groups that need to be set up according to your network plan For details on available grouping and other configuration options as well as configuration instructions see System Configurations ...

Page 158: ... 63 Creating Service s for Traffic In order to pass traffic through the PTP 820G and PTP 820F you must configure Ethernet and or TDM traffic services For configuration instructions see Configuring Ethernet Service s Configuring Native TDM Trails Configuring TDM Pseudowire Services ...

Page 159: ...Page 3 1 Chapter 3 Configuration Guide This section includes System Configurations Configuring a 1 0 Link Configuring Multi Carrier ABC Configuring Link Aggregation LAG Configuring XPIC Configuring HSB Radio Protection ...

Page 160: ...ations Note One Multi Carrier ABC group can be configured per unit PTP 820F Radio Configurations Table 27 PTP 820F Radio Configurations Configuration Supported Products Link to Configuration Instructions 1 0 Configuring a 1 0 Link Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard 2 0 Single Polarization Requires Multi Carrier ABC or LAG Configuring Multi Carrier ABC Configuring Link Aggregat...

Page 161: ...transportation of TDM E1 DS1 services with integrated E1 DS1 interfaces Two types of TDM services are supported using the same hardware Native TDM trails TDM Pseudowire services enabling interoperability with third party packet PW equipment PTP 820G and PTP 820F also offer hybrid Ethernet and TDM services Hybrid services can utilize either Native TDM or pseudowire PTP 820G and PTP 820F offer a var...

Page 162: ...Chapter 3 Configuration Guide System Configurations phn 3965_006v002 Page 3 4 ...

Page 163: ...on Wizard For a detailed explanation of 1 1 HSB and its requirements see Configuring HSB Radio Protection 1 1 HSB SD PTP 820G only Configures a 1 1 HSB radio link with Space Diversity consisting of a user selected Ethernet interface or LAG and two radio interfaces in a 1 1 HSB configuration one primary active and one diversity standby This link passes traffic between the radio interfaces and the E...

Page 164: ...erface is surrounded by a blue square as shown in Figure 49 and Figure 50 Note To create a LAG click Create LAG The Create LAG Group page opens For instructions on creating LAG groups see Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP 3 In the Radio Interface field select a radio interface for the link Alternatively click the interface in the graphical representation of the unit The selected interface ...

Page 165: ...s 5 Click Next Page 2 of the 1 0 Quick Configuration wizard opens Figure 51 1 0 Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 2 Figure 52 1 0 Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820F Page 2 6 In the TX Frequency MHz field set the transmission radio frequency in MHz 7 In the RX Frequency MHz field set the received radio frequency in MHz 8 In the TX Level dBm field enter the desired TX signal level TSL The ra...

Page 166: ... explanation of choosing an MRMC script see Entering Radio View CLI To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following comma...

Page 167: ...Chapter 3 Configuration Guide Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard phn 3965_006v002 Page 3 9 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 168: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 169: ...cy 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max tx level Table Transmit TX Level CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Descriptio...

Page 170: ...u must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio ...

Page 171: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 172: ...2900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max tx l...

Page 173: ..._006v002 Page 3 15 radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 The following command enters radio view for an RMC in expansion slot 3 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 174: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 175: ...X frequency of the remote unit to the same value radio 1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in rad...

Page 176: ... If you selected Yes in the In Band Management field select the management VLAN in the Management VLAN field 17 If you want to use the Ethernet interface as well as the radio interface for in band management select In Band includes Ethernet interface 18 Click Finish Page 5 of the 1 0 Quick Configuration wizard opens This page displays the parameters you have selected for the link Figure 57 1 0 Qui...

Page 177: ... the link Alternatively click the interface in the graphical representation of the unit The selected interface is surrounded by a green circle as shown in Figure 58 3 Click Next Page 2 of the 1 0 Repeater Quick Configuration wizard opens Figure 59 1 0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 2 4 In the Radio 2 Interface field select the second radio interface for the link Alternatively cl...

Page 178: ... configure the following radio parameters The red arrow points to the interface you are configuring For example in Figure 60 the user is configuring Radio 1 1 In the TX Frequency MHz field set the transmission radio frequency for the first radio in MHz 2 In the RX Frequency MHz field set the received radio frequency for the first radio in MHz 3 In the TX Level dBm field enter the desired TX signal...

Page 179: ... full explanation of choosing an MRMC script see Entering Radio View CLI 11 To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The followi...

Page 180: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 181: ... local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max tx level Table Transmit TX Level CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description tx level ...

Page 182: ...st first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 ...

Page 183: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 184: ...f fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio v...

Page 185: ...io slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 The following command enters radio view for an RMC in expansion slot 3 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 186: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 187: ...requency of the remote unit to the same value radio 1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio ...

Page 188: ...pears 17 If you selected Yes in the In Band Management field select the management VLAN in the Management VLAN field Management will be available through both radio interfaces 18 Click Finish Page 6 of the 1 0 Repeater Quick Configuration wizard opens This page displays the parameters you have selected for the link Figure 63 1 0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard Page 6 Summary Page 19 To complet...

Page 189: ...elected interface is surrounded by a blue square as shown in Figure 64 Note To create a LAG click Create LAG The Create LAG Group page opens For instructions on creating LAG groups see Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP 3 In the Radio 1 Interface field select a radio interface for the link Alternatively click the interface in the graphical representation of the unit The selected interface i...

Page 190: ...circle as shown in Figure 65 This interface will be the Standby radio in the protection group 7 In the Revertive Mode field select Yes or No to determine whether or not the HSB radio protection group will operate in revertive mode When revertive mode is enabled following a switchover the system initiates a revertive protection switchover back to the original receiver ten minutes after proper link ...

Page 191: ...g the Radio Parameters 13 Click Next Page 4 of the 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration wizard opens Figure 67 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 4 14 In the Script ID field select the MRMC script you want to assign to the radios For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script see Entering Radio View CLI To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in t...

Page 192: ...Chapter 3 Configuration Guide Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard phn 3965_006v002 Page 3 34 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 193: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 194: ...12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max tx level Table Transmit TX Level CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description t...

Page 195: ...t first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 T...

Page 196: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 197: ...o 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max t...

Page 198: ..._006v002 Page 3 40 radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 The following command enters radio view for an RMC in expansion slot 3 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 199: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 200: ... frequency of the remote unit to the same value radio 1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radi...

Page 201: ... Band Management field select the management VLAN in the Management VLAN field 20 If you want to use the Ethernet interface as well as the radio interface for in band management select In Band includes Ethernet interface 21 Click Next Page 6 of the 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration wizard opens This page displays the parameters you have selected for the link Figure 69 1 1 HSB Quick Configuration Wizard ...

Page 202: ...in the graphical representation of the unit The selected interface is surrounded by a blue square as shown in Figure 70 Note To create a LAG click Create LAG The Create LAG Group page opens For instructions on creating LAG groups see Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP 3 In the Radio 1 Interface field select a radio interface for the link Alternatively click the interface in the graphical re...

Page 203: ...circle as shown in Figure 71 This interface will be the Standby radio in the protection group 7 In the Revertive Mode field select Yes or No to determine whether or not the HSB radio protection group will operate in revertive mode When revertive mode is enabled following a switchover the system initiates a revertive protection switchover back to the original receiver ten minutes after proper link ...

Page 204: ...meters 13 Click Next Page 4 of the 1 1 Multi Carrier ABC HSB SD Quick Configuration wizard opens Figure 73 1 1 Multi Carrier ABC HSB SD Quick Configuration Wizard Page 4 14 In the Script ID field select the MRMC script you want to assign to the radios For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script see Entering Radio View CLI To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio ...

Page 205: ...Chapter 3 Configuration Guide Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard phn 3965_006v002 Page 3 47 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 206: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 207: ...12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max tx level Table Transmit TX Level CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description t...

Page 208: ...ust first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2...

Page 209: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 210: ...o 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max t...

Page 211: ..._006v002 Page 3 53 radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 The following command enters radio view for an RMC in expansion slot 3 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 212: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 213: ... of the remote unit to the same value radio 1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view rad...

Page 214: ... field select the management VLAN in the Management VLAN field 20 If you want to use the Ethernet interface as well as the radio interface for in band management select In Band includes Ethernet interface 21 Click Finish Page 6 of the 1 1 Multi Carrier ABC HSB SD Quick Configuration wizard opens This page displays the parameters you have selected for the link Figure 75 1 1 Multi Carrier ABC HSB SD...

Page 215: ...ltiCore RFU D and can only be configured between the two radio carriers of the same RFU To configure an N 0 Multi Carrier ABC link using the Quick Configuration wizard 1 Select Quick Configuration PIPE Multi Carrier ABC N 0 Page 1 of the N 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration wizard opens Figure 76 N 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard PTP 820G Page 1 Figure 77 N 0 Multi Carrier ABC ...

Page 216: ...ce for the group Alternatively click the interface in the graphical representation of the unit The selected interface is surrounded by a blue circle as shown in Figure 76 Note The Number of Radio Interfaces field is read only 4 In the Pipe Type field select the Attached Interface type for the service that will connect the radio and Ethernet interfaces Options are o s tag All S VLANs and untagged f...

Page 217: ...U D or RFU D HP For PTP 820G you can click the interface in the graphical representation of the unit The selected interface is surrounded by a blue circle and the previously selected interface is surrounded by a green circle as shown in Figure 78 7 Click Next The Radio XPIC Configuration page opens If you want to set up an XPIC configuration select the radio pair For full instructions on configuri...

Page 218: ...guration Page PTP 820F 8 Click Next The Radio Parameters Configuration page opens You can configure the basic radio parameters for each radio carrier If you selected XPIC in the Radio XPIC Configuration page you configure the parameters for the group rather than the individual carriers Figure 82 N 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard Radio Parameters Configuration Page PTP 820G ...

Page 219: ...ure 83 N 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard Radio Parameters Configuration Page PTP 820F Figure 84 N 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard Radio Parameters Configuration Page XPIC PTP 820G Figure 85 N 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard Radio Parameters Configuration Page XPIC PTP 820F ...

Page 220: ...nge of values depends on the frequency and RFU type iv To mute the TX output of the radio carrier select On in the TX mute field To unmute the TX output of the radio carrier select Off 10 Click Next The Radio MRMC Script Configuration page opens You can configure the MRMC script parameters for each interface For an XPIC group you configure the parameters for the group rather than the individual in...

Page 221: ...osing an MRMC script see Entering Radio View CLI 13 To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio ...

Page 222: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 223: ...2900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max tx level Table Transmit TX Level CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description tx...

Page 224: ...ust first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2...

Page 225: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 226: ...o 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf show max t...

Page 227: ..._006v002 Page 3 69 radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 The following command enters radio view for an RMC in expansion slot 3 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 228: ...imed mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set ...

Page 229: ...s the RX frequency of the remote unit to the same value radio 1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command...

Page 230: ...In Band Management field select Yes to configure in band management or No if you do not need in band management If you select Yes the Management VLAN field appears 19 If you selected Yes in the In Band Management field select the management VLAN in the Management VLAN field 20 If you want to use the Ethernet interface as well as the radio interface for in band management select In Band includes Et...

Page 231: ...Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard Summary Page PTP 820G Figure 92 N 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard Summary Page PTP 820F 22 To complete configuration of the Multi Carrier ABC group click Submit If you want to go back and change any of the parameters click Back After you click Submit the unit is reset ...

Page 232: ...ameters 5 Configure the radio s MRMC script See Entering Radio View CLI 6 To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following...

Page 233: ...figured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set admin on The fol...

Page 234: ...1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display t...

Page 235: ...s or the number of traffic flows During fading events which cause ACM modulation changes each carrier fluctuates independently with hitless switchovers between modulations increasing capacity over a given bandwidth and maximizing spectrum utilization The result is 100 utilization of radio resources in which traffic load is balanced based on instantaneous radio capacity per carrier Note If the modu...

Page 236: ...e 93 Multi Carrier ABC Group Page Empty 2 Click Create Group The first page of the Create ABC Group wizard opens Figure 94 Create ABC Group Wizard First Page 3 Optionally enter a descriptive name for the group in the Group Name field 4 Click Next The next page of the Create Group wizard opens ...

Page 237: ...ust click Submit before clicking Close or the selections you made will be discarded and the process cancelled Adding and Removing Group Members You can add and removeradio carriers from the group after creating the group This is relevant for example if you are configuring 1 1 HSB SD where you must first create an empty Multi Carrier ABC group then later add the 1 1 HSB SD group to the empty Multi ...

Page 238: ...er ABC Group Note For instructions on deleting a Multi Carrier ABC HSB SD group see Deleting an HSB Radio Protection Group with Space Diversity To delete a Multi Carrier ABC group 1 Select Radio Groups Multi Carrier ABC The Multi Carrier ABC page opens Figure 93 2 Select the group in the Multi Carrier ABC table and click Add Remove Members The Multi Carrier ABC Add Remove Members page opens Figure...

Page 239: ...to configure LAG and includes the following topics LAG Overview Configuring a LAG Group Enabling and Disabling LAG Group Shutdown in case of Degradation Event Configuring Enhanced LAG Distribution Deleting a LAG Group Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics LAG Overview LAG can be used to provide interface redundancy LAG can also be used to aggregate several interfaces in order to create a wider...

Page 240: ... is currently configured as an RFU port it is listed as Radio Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager If the port is currently configured as an Ethernet port it is listed as Ethernet Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager 2 In the Radio Unit page set the Admin status of Radio Unit Slot 1 Port 3 to Down 3 If there are any service points attached to the p...

Page 241: ...U Ethernet Interface Configuration Edit Page 8 In the Interface Type field select RFU or Ethernet 9 Click Apply then Close 10 If you configured the port as an Ethernet interface you must set the port s admin state to Up in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager If you configured the port as an RFU interface its admin state is Up automatically If you configured the port...

Page 242: ...interface to a LAG group the interface must be in an administrative state of down This restriction does not apply to radio interfaces For instructions on setting the administrative state of an interface see Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager PTP 820 supports LACP which expands the capabilities of static LAG and provides interoperability with third party equipment that uses LACP LACP improve...

Page 243: ...gned to a LAG group appear in the dropdown list 4 In the LACP field select Enable to enable LACP on the LAG or Disable to disable LACP on the LAG The default value is Disable 5 In the LAG Member 1 field select an interface to assign to the LAG group Only interfaces not already assigned to a LAG group appear in the dropdown list 6 Click Next A new Create LAG Group page opens 7 In the Member 2 field...

Page 244: ...ish A new LAG page opens displaying all the interfaces you have selected to include in the LAG group Figure 100 Create LAG Group Finish Page 10 Click Submit If all the interfaces meet the criteria listed above a message appears that the LAG group has been successfully created If not a message appears indicating that the LAG group was not created and giving the reason ...

Page 245: ...G group you want to edit in the Link Aggregation table of the LAG page Figure 101 LAG Page Populated 2 Click Edit underneath the Link Aggregation table The Link Aggregation Edit page opens Figure 102 Link Aggregation Edit Page 3 Do one or both of the following o To enable or disable LACP select Enable or Disable in the LACP field See LAG Overview for restrictions ...

Page 246: ...G Group Shutdown in Case of Degradation Event cannot be used with LACP A LAG group can be configured to be automatically closed in the event of LAG degradation This option is used if you want traffic from the switch to be re routed during such time as the link is providing less than a certain capacity By default the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option is disabled When enabled th...

Page 247: ...e LAG page opens Figure 101 2 Click LAG DF underneath the Link Aggregation table The LAG Distribution Function DF page opens Figure 103 LAG Distribution Function DF Page 3 In the Distribution Function field select a pre set distribution scheme from 1 to 10 It is recommended to experiment with the various schemes monitoring the TX byte count fields for each interface to determine the efficiency of ...

Page 248: ...group is deleted To delete multiple LAG groups 1 Select the LAG groups in the Link Aggregation table or select all the LAG groups by selecting the check box in the top row 2 Click Delete underneath the Link Aggregation table Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics You can display the following LACP parameters and statistics LACP Aggregation per LAG LACP Port Status LACP Port Statistics LACP Port...

Page 249: ...oseconds Actor System ID The MAC address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this Aggregator Actor System Priority The priority value associated with the Actor s System ID Actor Operational Key The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator Partner System ID The MAC address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this Ag...

Page 250: ...CP phn 3965_006v002 Page 3 92 Figure 105 LACP Port Status Page 2 The LACP Port Status page displays the major port status parameters per port To display all the available LACP port status parameters select a port and click View The LACP Port Status View page is displayed ...

Page 251: ...r that this Aggregation port has currently selected Attached Aggregator ID The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation port is currently attached to Aggregate or Individual Indicates whether the Aggregation Port is able to aggregate or is only able to operate as an individual link Actor System ID The MAC Address value that defines the value of the System ID for the system that con...

Page 252: ...ing the current value of the Aggregation Port s protocol Partner s System ID Partner Operational System Priority The operational value of priority associated with the Partner s System ID Partner Operational Port The operational port number assigned to this Aggregation port by the Aggregation port s port Partner Partner Operational Port Priority The Priority value assigned to this Aggregation port ...

Page 253: ...cted Aggregator ID The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation port has currently selected LACPDUs TX The number of LACPDUs that this port has transmitted LACPDUs RX The number of LACPDUs that this port has received Unknown RX The number of unknown protocol frames that this port has received Illegal RX The number of illegal protocol frames that this port has received Displaying LA...

Page 254: ...sible values are Current An LACPDU was received before expiration of the most recent timeout period Expired No LACPDU was received before expiration of the most recent timeout period Defaulted No LACPDU was received during the two most recent timeout periods Debug Last RX Time The value of a TimeSinceSystemReset F 2 1 when the last LACPDU was received by this Aggregation port Debug Mux State The s...

Page 255: ...ites for XPIC Configuring the Carriers Creating an XPIC Group Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC Deleting an XPIC Group Related topics Displaying XPI PMs Prerequisites for XPIC For PTP 820F XPIC requires a Multicore RFU D For PTP 820G Each radio interface must be connected to the same type of RFU For PTP 820G XPIC requires a hardware model with two radio interfaces Each radio carrier must be as...

Page 256: ...g Radio View CLI 3 To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 2 ...

Page 257: ...ured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set admin on The follow...

Page 258: ...wing command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio en...

Page 259: ... Create XPIC Group Page 3 In the Group ID field select an ID to identify the XPIC group 4 In the Member 1 field select the first radio in the XPIC group 5 Click Next A new Create XPIC Group page opens 6 In the Member 2 field select the second radio in the XPIC pair 7 Click Next A new Create XPIC Group page opens displaying the radios you have selected to include in the XPIC group ...

Page 260: ...ameters displayed click Submit To go back and change any of the parameters click Back If the XPIC group is successfully created a confirmation page opens After you create an XPIC group you must enable the group To enable an XPIC group 1 Select the XPIC group in the XPIC table Figure 112 XPIC Page Populated 2 Click Edit The XPIC Groups Edit page opens ...

Page 261: ...alculate the XPI subtract the RSLunwanted from the RSLwanted o Read the XPI from the Modem XPI field of the Radio Parameters page in the Web EMS See Viewing the Radio Status and Settings 5 The XPI should be between 25dB and 30dB If it is not you should adjust the OMT assembly on the back of the antenna at one side of the link until you achieve the highest XPI which should be no less than 25dB Adju...

Page 262: ... of the link as this may cause the XPI at the local side of the link to deteriorate Note In some cases the XPI might not exceed the required 25dB minimum due to adverse atmospheric conditions If you believe this to be the case you can leave the configuration at the lower values but be sure to monitor the XPI to make sure it subsequently exceeds 25dB A normal XPI level in clear sky conditions is be...

Page 263: ...igure a 1 1 HSB Pipe link See Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard In dual carrier systems PTP 820G offers 1 1 HSB radio protection With Multi Carrier ABC you can also configure 1 1 HSB radio protection with BBS Space Diversity You can configure the two fix radio interfaces as a protection group which protects against hardware failure in the RFU The CPU monitors the radio interf...

Page 264: ...ion Guide Configuring HSB Radio Protection phn 3965_006v002 Page 3 106 Figure 114 Radio Protection Page Empty 2 Click Create Group The Create Radio Protection Group page opens Figure 115 Create Radio Protection Group Page ...

Page 265: ... select the second radio carrier in the protection pair 8 Click Next A new Create Radio Protection Group page opens displaying the RMCs you have selected to include in the group Figure 117 Create Radio Protection Group Finish Page 9 To create the group with the parameters displayed click Submit To go back and change any of the parameters click Back If the protection group is successfully created a...

Page 266: ...with Space Diversity 1 Create a Multi Carrier ABC group with no members For instructions see Configuring a Multi Carrier ABC Group 2 Enable protection for the Multi Carrier ABC group i Select Radio Groups Multi Carrier ABC The Multi Carrier ABC page opens Figure 93 ii Select the group in the Multi Carrier ABC table and click Edit Group The Multi Carrier ABC Edit page opens Figure 118 Multi Carrier...

Page 267: ...dio Protection Group Page Member 1 Space Diversity Group Selected iv In the Group ID field select an ID to identify the protection group v In the Member 1 field select one of the radio interfaces vi Click Next The next page of the Create Radio Protection Group wizard opens vii In the Member 2 field select the other radio interface viii Click Next The Create Radio Protection Group wizard displays t...

Page 268: ...se Copying Configuration to Mate In a 1 1 HSB configuration it is necessary for both radio carriers to have the same configuration PTP 820G includes a mismatch mechanism that detects if there is a mismatch between the radio configurations of the local and mate carriers This mechanism is activated by the system periodically and independently of other protection mechanisms at fixed intervals It is a...

Page 269: ...ed 2 Select the protection group 3 Click Edit The Radio Protection Groups Edit page opens Figure 123 Radio Protection Groups Edit Page 4 In the Copy to mate source radio location field select the radio you want to use as the source 5 Click Apply The Edit page is refreshed and a Copy to Mate option appears on the bottom of the page ...

Page 270: ...ible For HSB SD groups an additional revertive mode option enables you to configure revertive mode for diversity If a diversity switchover takes place and revertive mode is enabled for diversity the system initiates a revertive diversity switchover back to the original receiver ten minutes after a proper signal is restored on the primary receiver To configure revertive mode 1 Select Radio Groups R...

Page 271: ... Groups Edit page opens Figure 123 10 In the Radio protection command field select one of the following options o Clear Clears an existing lockout condition o Manual switch Initiates a switchover provided that the standby carrier is working correctly Following a manual switch the protection group operates normally and a subsequent switchover will occur if any switchover trigger occurs o Force swit...

Page 272: ...rameters To delete an HSB SD radio protection group 1 Remove the HSB SD group from the Multi Carrier ABC group i Select Radio Groups Multi Carrier ABC The Multi Carrier ABC page opens Figure 93 ii Select the group in the Multi Carrier ABC table and click Add Remove Members The Multi Carrier ABC Add Remove Members page opens Figure 97 iii Select the HSB SD group and click Apply then Close 2 Disable...

Page 273: ... requires the use of a 1500HP dual receiver RFU Note 1500HP does not support IF Combining with 56 MHz channels For 56 MHz channels BBS can be used for space diversity applications See Configuring 1 1 HSB with Space Diversity To configure IF Combining 1 Radio IF Combining The IF Combining page opens Figure 125 IF Combining Page Note The IF Combining option only appears if the system includes at lea...

Page 274: ...or for purposes of testing RSL output during setup or maintenance Options are Main RSL is taken from the Main radio interface Diversity RSL is taken from the Diversity radio interface Note PHY1 and PHY2 are not relevant for this version Diversity RX Level dBm Read only Displays the RX signal level RSL of the Diversity radio interface in dBm Note The RX signal level RSL of the Main radio interface ...

Page 275: ...omatic Delay Calibration feature Possible values status values are Success Indicates that the system has successfully calibrated the signal delay Failure Indicates that the system cannot automatically calibrate the signal delay No Action Indicates that the system has not performed an automatic delay calibration Note Automatic delay calibration can only be performed when the system is error free an...

Page 276: ...onfiguring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server Upgrading the Software Backing Up and Restoring Configurations Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration Performing a Hard Cold Reset Configuring Unit Parameters Configuring NTP Displaying Unit Inventory Related topics Setting the Time and Date Optional Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manag...

Page 277: ...tions You can specify which IP protocol the unit will use when initiating communications such as downloading software sending traps pinging or exporting configurations 1 Select Platform Management Networking Local The Local Networking Configuration page opens Figure 25 2 From the IP Address Family drop down list select IPv4 or IPv6 The default value is IPv4 3 Click Apply ...

Page 278: ...orm Management Networking Remote The Remote Networking Configuration page opens Figure 127 Remote Networking Configuration Page 2 Select the radio on the local side of the link in which you want to configure the remote radio Note To access the Web EMS of the remote unit click the unit s IP address in the Remote IP Address column 3 Click Edit The Remote Networking Configuration Edit page opens ...

Page 279: ...t Gateway to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 and click Apply then set the Remote IPv6 Address as desired and the Remote IPv6 Default Gateway as desired Table 35 Remote Networking Configuration Parameters Parameter Definition Radio location Read only Identifies the radio on the local side of the link Remote radio location Read only Identifies the radio on the remote side of the link Remote IPv4 Address Enter an IP...

Page 280: ...he address in IPv6 format in this field and or in IPv4 format in the Remote IP Address field The unit will receive communications whether they are sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6 address Remote IPv6 Prefix Length Enter the IPv6 prefix length for the remote radio if you entered an IPv6 address Remote IPv6 Default Gateway Enter a default IPv6 gateway address for the remote radio optional ...

Page 281: ...rameters The SNMP Parameters page opens Figure 129 SNMP Parameters Page 2 In the Admin field select Enable to enable SNMP monitoring or Disable to disable SNMP monitoring Note The Operational Status field indicates whether SNMP monitoring is currently active Up or inactive Down 3 In the SNMP Read Community field enter the community string for the SNMP read community 4 In the SNMP Write Community f...

Page 282: ...d select Yes if you want to block SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 access so that only SNMPv3 access will be enabled 7 Click Apply If you are using SNMPv3 you must also configure SNMPv3 users SNMPv3 security parameters are configured per SNMPv3 user To add an SNMP user 1 Select Platform Management SNMP V3 Users The V3 Users page opens Figure 130 V3 Users Page 2 Click Add The V3 Users Add page opens ...

Page 283: ... Definition User Name Enter the SNMPv3 user name Password Enter a password for SNMPv3 authentication The password must be at least eight characters Authentication Algorithm Select an authentication algorithm for the user Options are None SHA MD5 Encryption Privacy Mode Select an encryption privacy protocol for the user Options are None DES AES Access Mode Select an access permission level for the ...

Page 284: ...rameters by editing the Trap Managers table Each line in the Trap Managers table displays the setup for a manager defined in the system To configure trap managers 1 Select Platform Management SNMP Trap Managers The Trap Managers page opens Figure 132 Trap Managers Page 2 Select a trap manager and click Edit The Trap Managers Edit page opens ...

Page 285: ...ng the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications Description Enter a description of the trap manager optional Admin Select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the selected trap manager Community Enter the community string for the SNMP read community Port Enter the number of the port through which traps will be sent Heartbeat Period Enter the interval in minutes between each heartbeat tr...

Page 286: ...re operations FTP 21 SFTP 22 You can change either or both of these ports from the following pages Platform Software Download Intall Platform Configuration Configuration Management Platform Security General Security Log Upload Platform Security General Configuration Log Upload Platform Security X 509 Certificate CSR Platform Security X 509 Certificate Download Install From any of these pages click...

Page 287: ... web freeware For SFTP it is recommended to use SolarWinds SFTP SFCP server freeware If you are using IPv6 to perform the operation make sure to use FileZilla version 0 9 38 or higher to ensure IPv6 support If you are using another type of FTP or SFTP server make sure the application version supports IPv6 To install and configure FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop 1 Create a user and ...

Page 288: ...the FTP SFTP server set up the permissions for the shared FTP SFTP folder For example in FileZilla Server I From the Edit menu select Users II In the Users window select Shared folders III Underneath the Shared folders section click Add and browse for your shared FTP folder IV Select the folder and click OK V In the Shared folders section select your shared FTP folder VI In the Files and Directori...

Page 289: ...Chapter 4 Unit Management Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server phn 3965_006v002 Page 4 14 Figure 136 FileZilla Server Shared Folder Setup ...

Page 290: ...nd Installing Software Configuring a Timed Installation Viewing Current Software Versions To display a list of software packages currently installed and running on the system modules 1 Select Platform Software Versions The Versions page opens For a description of the information provided in the Versions page see Table 38 Versions Page Columns Figure 137 Versions Page Table 38 Versions Page Columns...

Page 291: ... software and firmware for all components and card types supported by the system including RFUs When you download a software bundle the system verifies the validity of the bundle The system also compares the files in the bundle to the files currently installed in the PTP 820G F and its components so that only files that need to be updated are actually downloaded A message is displayed for each fil...

Page 292: ...PC or laptop you are using to perform the software upgrade For details see Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP Downloading software Via HTTP and HTTPS To download and install a new software version using HTTP or HTTPS 1 Before performing a software upgrade it is important to verify that the system date and time are correct See Setting the Time and Date Optional 2 In the PTP 820G or PTPT...

Page 293: ...n the Versions page See Viewing Current Software Versions Downloading Software Via FTP or SFTP Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server To download and install a new software version 1 Before performing a software upgrade it is important to verify that the system date and time are correct See Setting the Time and Date Optional 2 Install and configure FTP or SFTP server software on the PC o...

Page 294: ...Chapter 4 Unit Management Upgrading the Software phn 3965_006v002 Page 4 19 5 Select FTP ...

Page 295: ...gure 141 FTP Parameters Page 7 In the File Transfer Protocol field select the file transfer protocol you want to use FTP or SFTP 8 In the Username field enter the user name you configured in the FTP server 9 In the Password field enter the password you configured in the FTP server If you did not configure a password for your FTP SFTP user simply leave this field blank ...

Page 296: ... be left empty If the location is a sub folder under the home directory specify the folder name If the shared folder is C this parameter can be left empty or populated with 13 Click Apply to save your settings then Close to close the FTP Parameters page Figure 142 Install Parameters Page 14 Click Download The download begins You can view the status of the download in the Download Status field See ...

Page 297: ...loading and Installing Software 2 Select Platform Software Download Install The Download Install page opens 3 Click Install The installation begins You can view the status of the installation in the Installation Status field See Table 39 Download Install Status Parameters Note RFU software must be installed separately See Installing RFU Software Upon completion of the installation the system perfo...

Page 298: ... system When the system is reset the Download Status returns to Ready Download Percentage Displays the progress of the current software download Install Status The status of any pending software installation Possible values are Ready The default value which appears when no installation is in progress Verifying installation files The system is verifying the files to be installed Installation in pro...

Page 299: ...re Timer Parameters The Timer Parameters Software Installation page opens 3 Click Install Parameters The Install Parameters page opens Figure 143 Install Parameters page 4 Select Yes in the Timed installation field 5 Click Apply The Software management timer field appears Figure 144 Timer Parameters Software Installation Page 6 In the Software management timer field enter the amount of time in hou...

Page 300: ...version is not automatically updated in the RFU when an installation is performed To upgrade the software in an RFU you must perform the upgrade manually per slot This enables you to manage IDU and RFU RFU software versions separately In this version you must use the Command Line Interface CLI to upgrade RFU software For instructions refer to Installing and Upgrading Software in the RFU CLI ...

Page 301: ... to write CLI scripts in order to make desired changes in the backed up configuration This file is executed by the system after restoring the configuration The system provides three restore points to manage different configuration files Each restore point contains a single configuration file Files can be added to the restore points by creating backups of the current system state or by importing th...

Page 302: ...reation The time and date on which the configuration file was created Original IP address The IP address of the unit from which the configuration file was created System ID The System ID if any of the unit from which the configuration file was created This is taken from the Name field in the Unit Parameters page See Configuring Unit Parameters Valid Reserved for future use Setting the Configuratio...

Page 303: ...nal 2 Install and configure an FTP server on the PC or laptop you are using to perform the import or export See Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP 3 In the PTP 820G s Web EMS select Platform Configuration Configuration Management The Configuration Management page opens Figure 146 Configuration Management Page 4 Click FTP Parameters to display the FTP Parameters page ...

Page 304: ...ng If the location is the root shared folder it should be left empty If the location is a sub folder under the root shared folder specify the folder name If the shared folder is C this parameter can be left empty or populated with 11 Click Apply then Close to save the FTP parameters and return to the Configuration Management page 12 In the File name field enter the name of the file you are importi...

Page 305: ...are o Ready The default value which appears when no import or export is in progress o File in Transfer The file export is in progress o If an error occurs during the import or export an appropriate error message is displayed in this field When the import or export is complete one of the following status indications appears o Succeeded o Failure The next time the system is reset the File Transfer s...

Page 306: ...ou can back up the current configuration file to one of the system s three restore points To back up a configuration file 1 Select Platform Configuration Configuration Management The Configuration Management page opens Figure 146 2 In the File Number field select the restore point to which you want to back up the file If another configuration file is already saved to that restore point it will be ...

Page 307: ... 2 In the File Number field select the restore point that holds the configuration you want to restore 3 Click Restore The configuration restoration begins You can view the status of the restoration in the Configuration restore status field Note While a configuration restoration is taking place no user can make any changes to the configuration All system configuration parameters are read only durin...

Page 308: ...the Factory Default Configuration To restore the factory default settings 1 Select Platform Management Set to Factory Default The Set to Factory Default page opens Figure 148 Set to Factory Default Page 2 Click Set to Factory Default The unit is restored to its factory default settings This does not change the unit s IP address ...

Page 309: ...orming a Hard Cold Reset phn 3965_006v002 Page 4 34 Performing a Hard Cold Reset To initiate a hard cold reset on the unit 1 Select Platform Management Reset The Reset page opens 2 Click Reset The unit is reset Figure 149 Reset Page ...

Page 310: ...ers Parameter Definition Name A name for the unit optional This name appears at the top of every Web EMS page Description Descriptive information about the unit This information is used for debugging and should include information such as the chassis type System up time The time since the system was last reinitialized Contact person The name of the person to be contacted if and when a problem with...

Page 311: ... Language Enables you to select the language in which the Web EMS is displayed In release 10 0 the following languages are available English default Russian Measurement format The type of measurement you want the system to use Metric or Imperial Unit Temperature The current temperature of the unit Voltage input Volt The voltage input of the unit ...

Page 312: ...iguration page opens Figure 151 NTP Configuration Page 2 In the Admin field select Enable 3 In the NTP version field select the NTP version you want to use Options are NTPv3 and NTPv4 NTPv4 provides interoperability with NTPv3 and with SNTP 4 In the NTP server IP address field enter the IP address of the NTP server 5 Click Apply Table 42 describes the status parameters that appear in the NTP Confi...

Page 313: ...s of the remote NTP server on which the NTP client is currently locked Client lock status Indicates if the NTP client is locked on a remote NTP server Possible values are LOCK The NTP client is locked on the remote server LOCAL The NTP client is locked on the local system clock free running clock N A The NTP client is not locked on any clock ...

Page 314: ...entory phn 3965_006v002 Page 4 39 Displaying Unit Inventory To view the unit s part number and serial number 1 Select Platform Management Inventory The Inventory page opens showing the unit s part number and serial number Figure 152 Inventory Page ...

Page 315: ...ics Related topics RFU Overview Configuring the Radio Parameters Entering Radio View CLI To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 ...

Page 316: ...nfigured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set admin on The fo...

Page 317: ...lue radio 1 1 rf set tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To...

Page 318: ...io Parameters To display the radio parameters 1 Select Radio Radio Parameters The Radio Parameters page opens Figure 153 Radio Parameters Page Note For PTP 820G the fixed radio interfaces are identified as Slot 1 Port 1 and Slot 1 Port 2 For PTP 820F Port 2 represents the second radio carrier in a Multi Carrier RFU 2 To display detailed status parameters of a specific radio select the radio in the...

Page 319: ...on of the Radio Parameters configuration page Table 43 Radio Status Parameters Parameter Definition Radio location Identifies the radio interface Slot 1 port 1 or Slot 1 port 2 Type The type of RFU connected to the radio interface TX Frequency The configured TX radio frequency The TX radio frequency is configured in the Frequency control Local section of the Radio Parameters page See Configuring t...

Page 320: ...zation Interference Canceller XPIC For instructions on configuring XPIC see Configuring XPIC Radio interface operational status Indicates whether the radio is operational Up or not operational Down Operational TX Level dBm The actual TX signal level TSL of the RFU in dBm RX Level dBm The actual measured RX signal level RSL of the RFU in dBm Modem MSE dB The MSE Mean Square Error of the RX signal m...

Page 321: ...ept If power is being supplied to the RFU from an external power source the Power Admin field should be set to Disable to avoid unnecessary alarms Media Type In System Release 10 0 you can use only one PTP 820F combo radio interface RFU1 but you can choose between the electrical RJ 45 RFU1 interface or the optical SFP RFU1 interface The Media Type parameter must match the interface type actually b...

Page 322: ...s field 4 By default the Power Admin field is set to Enable If PoE power is not being used for the RFU connected to this PTP 820F select Disable in the Power Admin field 5 By default the Media Type field is set to RJ45 If the RFU is connected to the PTP 820F via the PTP 820F optical SFP port select SFP in the Media Type field 6 Click Apply For a full description of the parameters on the page see t...

Page 323: ...asts for more than about one second it indicates that there is no power consumption usually because the RFU is not properly connected to the IDU Fault PoE power to the RFU is disabled due to a hardware failure usually a short circuit Disable The Power Admin field is set to Disable Admin Status The configured status of the RFU connected to the PTP 820F By default the status is Enabled Power Admin D...

Page 324: ...e carrier or carriers at the remote side of the link To display the remote radio parameters 1 Select Radio Remote Radio Parameters The Remote Radio Parameters page opens Figure 157 Remote Radio Parameters Page 2 Select the radio the remote radio of which you want to configure and click Edit The Remote Radio Parameters Edit page opens Figure 158 Remote Radio Parameters Edit Page ...

Page 325: ... Remote Radio Parameters Edit page To reset the remote radio click Reset remote Slot To reset the entire remote unit click Reset Remote Unit Table 45 Remote Radio Parameters Parameter Definition Radio Location Identifies the radio interface Slot 1 port 1 or Slot 1 port 2 Remote Radio Location Read only Identifies the location of the remote radio Local Remote Channel Operational Status Read only Th...

Page 326: ...cation status show Displaying Remote Radio s Link ID and Location CLI To display the remote radio s Link ID enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit show link id To display the remote radio s slot ID location in the chassis enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit show slot id Muting and Unmuting the Remote Radio CLI To mute or unmute the remote radio ...

Page 327: ... Remote Radio TX Level CLI Parameters Paramet er Input Type Permitted Values Description tx level Numb er Depends on the frequency and RFU type The desired TX signal level TSL in dBm The following command sets the TX level of the remote radio connected to fixed radio interface 1 to 10 dBm radio 1 1 remote unit set tx level 10 Configuring Remote ATPC CLI To set the RX reference level for ATPC on th...

Page 328: ...imum When the timer expires the radio enters ATPC override state In ATPC override state the radio transmits no higher than the pre determined ATPC override TX level and an ATPC override alarm is raised The radio remains in ATPC override state until the ATPC override state is manually cancelled by the user or until the unit is reset The radio then returns to normal ATPC operation In a configuration...

Page 329: ...bled Note Make sure to set an appropriate value in the Override Timeout field before enabling ATPC override Failure to do so can lead to unexpected reduction of the TX power with corresponding loss of capacity if TX override is enabled with the timer set to a lower than desired value 7 Click Apply If you selected ATPC Override Admin Enable the ATPC Override State Override TX Level and ATPC Overrid...

Page 330: ...d Remote ATPC Admin Enable the Remote Reference RX Level dBm field is now displayed 12 In the Remote Reference RX Level dBm field enter a number between 70 and 30 as the reference value for the ATPC mechanism on the remote radio carrier 13 Click Apply To cancel an ATPC override state on the local unit click Cancel Override ...

Page 331: ...tion can be configured to operate on various layers of the protocol stack saving bandwidth by reducing unnecessary header overhead Header De duplication is also sometimes known as header compression Note The Header De Duplication configuration must be identical on both sides of the link To configure Header De Duplication 1 Select Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration The Radio Ethernet Interface ...

Page 332: ...es on the Ethernet and MPLS levels o Layer3 Header De Duplication operates on the Ethernet and IP levels o Layer4 Header De Duplication operates on all supported layers up to Layer 4 o Tunnel Header De Duplication operates on Layer 2 Layer 3 and on the Tunnel layer for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames o Tunnel Layer3 Header De Duplication operates on Layer 2 Layer 3 and on the Tunnel and T 3 lay...

Page 333: ... Frame Cut Through configuration must be identical on both sides of the link If Frame Cut Through is used together with 1588 Transparent Clock the 1588 packets must be given a CoS that is not assigned to the fourth priority queue To configure Frame Cut Through 1 Select Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration The Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration page opens Figure 164 Radio Ethernet Interface C...

Page 334: ...n the Cut through mode field select Yes to enable Frame Cut Through or No to disable Frame Cut Through 5 Click Apply then Close Note The other fields in the Ethernet Interface Configuration Edit page relate to Header De Duplication a feature which is planned for future release The Radio Ethernet Interface Counters page is also reserved for future use ...

Page 335: ... Frame Cut Through Counters You can view PMs on the usage of Header De Duplication To view Header De Duplication counters 1 Select Radio Ethernet Interface Counters The Radio Ethernet Interface Counters page opens Figure 166 Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page 2 Select the carrier and click View The Radio Ethernet Interface Counters View page opens ...

Page 336: ...compressed bytes Bytes on the TX side that were compressed by Header De Duplication TX frames before header deduplication Frames on the TX side before Header De Duplication TX frames compressed by header deduplication Frames on the TX side that were compressed by Header De Duplication TX learning frames The number of frames that have been used to learn unique data flows Once a particular flow type...

Page 337: ...he last time the Radio Ethernet Interface counters were cleared Port RX good frames The number of good frames received on the port since the last time the Radio Ethernet Interface counters were cleared Port TX total bytes The number of bytes transmitted since the last time the Radio Ethernet Interface counters were cleared Port TX frames The number of frames transmitted since the last time the Rad...

Page 338: ...configured on both ends of the encrypted link The session key is a 32 byte symmetric encryption key used to encrypt the actual data Each link uses two session keys one for each direction For each direction the session key is generated by the transmit side unit and propagated automatically via a Key Exchange Protocol to the other side of the link The Key Exchange Protocol exchanges session keys by ...

Page 339: ...t the carrier you want to configure and click Edit The Payload Encryption Edit page opens Figure 169 Payload Encryption Edit Page 6 Configure the master key by doing one of the following o Enter a master key in the Master Key field You must enter between 8 and 32 ASCII characters o Click Generate key to generate a master key automatically ...

Page 340: ...gure 170 Payload Encryption Edit Page with Master Key Displayed 7 Record and save the master key generated in Step 6 8 On the local unit follow Steps Error Reference source not found through 6 to configure the same master k ey configured on the remote unit also on the local unit 9 Enable payload encryption on the remote unit i In the Admin Mode field select AES 256 to enable payload encryption ii ...

Page 341: ... to re boot and verify that there are no alarms Note The standby unit may have a payload encryption failure alarm for up to about one minute after the unit is up and running 12 3 In a protected link remove the protection lockout first on the remote and then on the local unit See Switchovers and Lockout 13 4 Verify that there are no alarms on the link Note Any time payload encryption fails the Oper...

Page 342: ...tion This enables you to define the levels at which certain PMs are counted such as the number of seconds in which the configured threshold RX and TX levels are exceeded This also enables you to define the levels at which certain alarms are triggered Signal level PM thresholds such as RX and TX level thresholds are configured from the Signal Level PM Report page See Displaying Signal Level PMs and...

Page 343: ...r not excessive BER is propagated as a fault and considered a system event For example if excessive BER administration is enabled excessive BER can trigger a protection switchover and can cause a synchronization source to go into a failure status Excessive BER administration is enabled or disabled for the entire unit rather than for specific radios 3 In the Thresholds table select the radio for wh...

Page 344: ...ick Apply then Close Displaying MRMC Status Related Topics Entering Radio View CLI To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The ...

Page 345: ...Chapter 5 Radio Configuration Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics phn 3965_006v002 Page 5 31 root radio slot 3 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 3 1 ...

Page 346: ...d mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set adm...

Page 347: ... tx frequency 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum...

Page 348: ...phn 3965_006v002 Page 5 34 Note To display the same parameters for an individual radio in a separate page select the radio in the MRMC script status table and clickEdit You can configure Adaptive TX Power from the MRMC Status Edit page See Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power ...

Page 349: ...e current RX bit rate Displaying MRMC PMs Related Topics Entering Radio View CLI To view and configure radio parameters you must first enter the radio s view level in the CLI Use the following command to enter a radio s view level root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for fixed radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The fo...

Page 350: ...d mute is configured on only one radio in the protection pair To display the mute status of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf mute show status Table 21 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parame ter Input Type Permitt ed Values Description admin Varia ble on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes fixed radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set adm...

Page 351: ...y 12900000 The following command sets the TX frequency of fixed radio interface 2 to 12900000 KHz but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit radio 1 2 rf set rx frequency 12900000 local remote disable Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI To set the transmit TX level of a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX...

Page 352: ...e interval in the MRMC PM table and click View Table 51 MRMC PMs Parameter Definition PM Interval The length of the interval for which the PMs were measured 15 Minutes or 24 Hours Interval For 24 hour intervals displays the date of the interval For 15 minute intervals displays the date and ending time of the interval Min profile Displays the minimum ACM profile that was measured during the interva...

Page 353: ... x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time Displaying Defective Block Counters The Counters page displays the number of blocks in which errors were detected The larger the amount the poorer the radio link quality To display the number of blocks in which errors were detected per radio 1 Select Radio PM Statis...

Page 354: ...lay the same parameters for an individual radio in a separate page select the radio in the Radio table and click View To clear the PMs click Clear Counters Displaying Signal Level PMs and Configuring Signal Level PM Thresholds To display signal level PMs per radio 1 Select Radio PM Statistics Signal Level The Signal Level PM report page opens ...

Page 355: ...parameters for a specific interval in a separate page select the interval in the RF PM table and click View Table 52 Signal Level PMs Parameter Definition Interval For 24 hour intervals displays the date of the interval For 15 minute intervals displays the date and ending time of the interval Max TSL dBm The maximum TSL Transmit Signal Level that was measured during the interval Min TSL dBm The mi...

Page 356: ...he Radio Thresholds page See Configuring BER Thresholdsand Displaying Current BER Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of the measured interval are reliable An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time To set the Signal Level PM thresholds click Thresholds The Signal Level Thr...

Page 357: ...Chapter 5 Radio Configuration Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics phn 3965_006v002 Page 5 43 ...

Page 358: ...l PMs for the combined signal as well as for the Diversity interface Note RSL PMs for the Main interface are displayed in the standard RSL fields of the Signal Level PM report page See Displaying Signal Level PMs and Configuring Signal Level PM Thresholds To display combined RSL PMs per radio 1 Select Radio PM Statistics Combined The Combined PM graph page opens Figure 178 Combined PM Graph Page 2...

Page 359: ...1 seconds The number of seconds the combined RSL exceeded RSL threshold 1 during the interval RSL thresholds are configured in the Radio Thresholds page See Configuring BER Thresholds and Displaying Current BER Combined RSL exceed threshold2 seconds The number of seconds the combined RSL exceeded RSL threshold 2 during the interval RSL thresholds are configured in the Radio Thresholds page See Con...

Page 360: ...ports in daily intervals select 24 hours Table 55 describes the Modem BER Aggregate PMs Note To display the same parameters for a specific interval in a separate page select the interval in the Modem BER PM table and click View Table 55 Modem BER Aggregate PMs Parameter Definition Interval For 24 hour intervals displays the date of the interval For 15 minute intervals displays the date and ending ...

Page 361: ... interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes BBE Displays the number of background block errors during the measured interval Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of the measured interval are reliable An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time ...

Page 362: ...ype field o To display reports in 15 minute intervals select 15 minutes o To display reports in daily intervals select 24 hours Table 56 describes the Modem MSE PMs Note To display the same parameters for a specific interval in a separate page select the interval in the Modem MSE PM table and click View Table 56 Modem MSE PMs Parameter Definition Interval For 24 hour intervals displays the date of...

Page 363: ...at the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time To set the Modem MSE PM thresholds click Thresholds The Modem MSE Thresholds Configuration Edit Page opens For each radio specify the modem MSE Mean Square Error threshold for calculating MSE Exceed Threshold seconds and click Apply Figure 181 Modem MSE Thresholds Configuration Edit Page Displa...

Page 364: ...in a separate page select the interval in the Modem XPI PM table and click View Table 57 XPI PMs Parameter Definition Interval For 24 hour intervals displays the date of the interval For 15 minute intervals displays the date and ending time of the interval Min XPI dB The minimum XPI level that was measured during the interval Max XPI dB The maximum XPI level that was measured during the interval X...

Page 365: ...ld for calculating XPI Exceed Threshold seconds and click Apply Figure 183 XPI Thresholds Configuration Edit Page Displaying Traffic PMs This section includes Displaying Capacity and Throughput PMs Displaying Utilization PMs Displaying Frame Error Rate PMs Displaying Capacity and Throughput PMs You can display PMs for capacity and throughput for a radio based on The total Layer 1 bandwidth payload...

Page 366: ...elect 15 minutes o To display reports in daily intervals select 24 hours To set the thresholds for capacity and throughput PMs 1 Select Threshold The Ethernet Radio Capacity Throughput Threshold page opens Figure 185 Ethernet Radio Capacity and Throughput Threshold Page 2 Enter the capacity and throughput thresholds you want in Mbps The range of values is 0 to 4294967295 The default value for is 1...

Page 367: ...andwidth exceeded 0 Peak throughput Mbps Displays the highest throughput in Mbps that occurred for the selected radio during the measured time interval Average throughput Mbps Displays the average throughput in Mbps for the selected radio during the measured time interval Seconds exceeding Threshold Displays the number of seconds during the measured time interval during which the throughput exceed...

Page 368: ...pe field o To display reports in 15 minute intervals select 15 minutes o To display reports in daily intervals select 24 hours To set the thresholds for utilization PMs 1 Select Threshold The Utilization Threshold page opens Figure 187 Ethernet Radio Utilization Threshold Page 1 Enter the utilization threshold you want in 1 100 The default value for is 100 2 Click Apply then Close Table 59 describ...

Page 369: ...erval during which the L1 bandwidth exceeded 0 Peak throughput Mbps Displays the highest throughput in Mbps that occurred for the selected radio during the measured time interval Average throughput Mbps Displays the average throughput in Mbps for the selected radio during the measured time interval Seconds exceeding Threshold Displays the number of seconds during the measured time interval during ...

Page 370: ...y the same parameters for a specific interval in a separate page select the interval in the PM table and click View Table 60 Frame Error Rate PMs Parameter Definition Time interval index For 24 hour intervals displays the date of the interval For 15 minute intervals displays the date and ending time of the interval FER Displays the frame error rate during the measured time interval Integrity Indic...

Page 371: ...Chapter 5 Radio Configuration Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics phn 3965_006v002 Page 5 57 ...

Page 372: ...nd the S VLAN Ethertype Configuring Ethernet Interfaces Configuring Automatic State Propagation Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics Related topics Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP Quality of Service QoS Ethernet Protocols Performing Ethernet Loopback Ethernet Traffic Interfaces Ethernet Management Interfaces Ethernet Pin Outs and LEDs ...

Page 373: ...P2P Management MNG In addition to user defined services PTP 820G and PTP 820F contains a pre defined management service Service ID 1025 By default this service is operational Note You can use the management service for in band management For instructions on configuring in band management see Configuring In Band Management A service point is a logical entity attached to a physical or logical interf...

Page 374: ...ow these guidelines for creating service points Always use SNP service points on NNI ports and SAP service points on UNI ports For each logical interface associated with a specific service there should never be more than a single service point The transport VLAN ID should be unique per service within a single region That is no two services should use the same transport VLAN ID The Ethernet Service...

Page 375: ...the NMS for topology management EVC description The Ethernet Virtual Connection EVC description This parameter does not affect the network element s behavior but is used by the NMS for topology management Admin Indicates whether the service is enabled Operational or disabled Reserved You can configure services for later use by defining the service as Reserved In Reserved mode the service occupies ...

Page 376: ... by the NMS for topology management 6 Optionally in the EVC Description field enter a text description of the service up to 64 characters This parameter does not affect the network element s behavior but is used by the NMS for topology management 7 In the Admin field select one of the following options o Operational The service is functional o Reserved The service is disabled until this parameter ...

Page 377: ...r interface level o Preserve SP COS Decision The CoS of frames passing through the service is not modified by the service s default CoS 11 Click Apply then Close to close the Ethernet Services Add page 12 Add service points You must add service points to the service in order for the service to carry traffic See Configuring Service Points Editing a Service To edit a service 1 Select Ethernet Servic...

Page 378: ...lete the selected services select Delete underneath the Ethernet Services Configuration Table Before deleting a service you must delete any service points attached to the service as described in Deleting a Service Point Figure 191 Multiple Selection Operation Section Ethernet Services Note When setting multiple services to Reserve state make sure to avoid setting the management service to Reserve ...

Page 379: ...r network with its access points SAPs are used for Point to Point and Multipoint traffic services An SNP is equivalent to an NNI or E NNI in MEF terminology and defines the connection between the network elements in the user network SNPs are used for Point to Point and Multipoint traffic services A Pipe service point is used to create traffic connectivity between two ports in a port based manner S...

Page 380: ... Table The General SP Attributes table is shown in Figure 192 Ethernet Service Points Page Table 62 describes the parameters displayed in the General SP Attributes table Table 62 General Service Point Attributes Parameter Definition Service point ID This ID is unique within the service For Point to Point and Multipoint services the range of values is 1 32 For Management services the range of value...

Page 381: ...location The physical or logical interface on which the service point is located Once you have added the service point you cannot change this parameter Attached interface type The encapsulation type Ethertype for frames entering the service point Once you have added the service point you cannot change this parameter The Attached Interface Type determines which frames enter the service via this ser...

Page 382: ...ace Types Attached Interface Type Types of Frames Available for Service Point Types dot1q A single C VLAN is classified into the service point All s tag A single S VLAN is classified into the service point SNP PIPE and MNG Bundle C A set of C VLANs is classified into the service point SAP Bundle S A single S VLAN and a set of C VLANs are classified into the service point SAP All to One All C VLANs...

Page 383: ...type Options are SAP Service Access Point SNP Service Network Point MNG Management service point PIPE Pipe service point Learning admin Determines whether MAC address learning for incoming frames is enabled Enable or disabled Disable When enabled the service point learns the source MAC addresses of incoming frames and adds them to a MAC address forwarding table Allow flooding Determines whether in...

Page 384: ...reserves the CoS decision made at the interface level The decision can still be overwritten at the service level PCL Reserved for future use TCAM Reserved for future use Default CoS The default CoS If the CoS Mode is sp def cos this is the CoS assigned to frames that pass through the service point This decision can be overwritten at the service level Possible values are 0 to 7 Split horizon group ...

Page 385: ... 20 characters Service point type The service point type Options are SAP Service Access Point SNP Service Network Point MNG Management service point PIPE Pipe service point C Vlan CoS preservation Determines whether the original C VLAN CoS value is preserved or restored for frames egressing from the service point If C VLAN CoS preservation is enabled the C VLAN CoS value of frames egressing the se...

Page 386: ...an preservation Read only Indicates whether the original S VLAN ID is preserved or restored for frames egressing from the service point If S VLAN preservation is enabled the S VLAN ID of frames egressing the service point is the same as the S VLAN ID when the frame entered the service If S VLAN preservation is disabled the S VLAN ID of frames egressing the service point is set at whatever value mi...

Page 387: ...to personalize the QoS egress path Permitted values are 1 63 Adding a Service Point To add a service point 1 Select Ethernet Services The Ethernet Services page opens Figure 189 2 Select the relevant service in the Ethernet Services Configuration table 3 Click Service Points The Ethernet Service Points page opens Figure 192 4 Select the relevant service point in the Ethernet Services Points Genera...

Page 388: ...hapter 6 Ethernet Services and Interfaces Configuring Ethernet Service s phn 3965_006v002 Page 6 17 Figure 195 Ethernet Service Points Add Page 6 Configure the service point attributes as described above ...

Page 389: ... opens The Ethernet Service Points Edit page is similar to the Ethernet Service Points Add page Figure 195 You can edit any parameter that can be configured in the Add Service Point page except Service Point ID Service Point Type and the General SP Attributes 6 Edit the service point attributes as described in Table 62 Table 64 and Table 65 7 Click Apply then Close Deleting a Service Point You can...

Page 390: ...rnet Services Configuration table 3 Click Service Points The Ethernet Service Points page opens Figure 192 4 Select the relevant service point in the Ethernet Services Points General SP Attributes table 5 Click Attached VLAN The Attached VLAN List page opens Figure 196 Attached VLAN List Page 6 Click Add The Attached VLAN List Add page opens ...

Page 391: ...r logical interface on which the service point is located Service ID Read only The ID of the service to which the service point belongs Service Point ID Read only The ID of the service point C Vlan Encapsulation Select the C VLAN you want to add to the service point S Vlan Encapsulation Read only If the Attached Interface Type for the service point is Bundle S this field displays the S VLAN encaps...

Page 392: ...However if the service point or service are configured to apply their own CoS that decision overrides the decision made here If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to false this parameter has no effect Color If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to true the Color value defined in this field is applied to frames with the C VLAN defined in the C VLAN Encapsulation field This Color overrides the Color decision made a...

Page 393: ...re 198 Ethernet General Configuration Page 2 In the MRU field enter the global size in bytes of the Maximum Receive Unit MRU Permitted values are 64 to 9612 The default value is 2000 Frames that are larger than the global MRU will be discarded 3 In the S VLAN Ether type field select the S VLAN Ethertype This defines the ethertype recognized by the system as the S VLAN ethertype Options are 0x8100 ...

Page 394: ...faces Setting the MRU Size and the S VLAN Ethertype phn 3965_006v002 Page 6 23 Note You can also map Ethernet services to MSTP instances MSTIs in the Ethernet General Configuration page See Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances MSTIs ...

Page 395: ...face corresponds to a logical interface on a one to one basis For some features such as LAG a group of physical interfaces can be joined into a single logical interface The basic interface characteristics such as media type port speed duplex and auto negotiation are configured for the physical interface via the Physical Interfaces page Ethernet services QoS and OAM characteristics are configured o...

Page 396: ... field select On to enable or Off to disable Auto Negotiation When the Media Type is Radio Auto Negotiation is always Off 6 In the Speed field select the maximum speed of the interface in Mbps Options are o Ethernet RJ 45 interfaces 100 and 1000 o Ethernet SFP interfaces Only 1000 is supported o Radio interfaces The parameter is read only and set by the system to 1000 7 In the Duplex field select ...

Page 397: ...dicates whether the interface is currently enabled Up or disabled Down You can enable or disable an interface from the Interface Manager page See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager Actual port speed Displays the actual speed of the interface for the link as agreed by the two sides of the link after the auto negotiation process Actual port duplex Displays the actual duplex status of the inte...

Page 398: ...lled Interface with the same LLF ID at the remote side of the link This means if ASP is triggered locally it is propagated to the remote side of the link but only to Controlled Interfaces with LLF IDs that match the LLF IDs of the affected Controlled Interfaces on the local side of the link Note It is recommended to configure both ends of the link to the same Automatic State Propagation configurat...

Page 399: ... the ASP mechanism does not propagate the event until this delay time has elapsed A trigger delay from 0 to 10 000 ms can be set per LLD ID The delay time must be configured via CLI See Configuring Automatic State Propogation and Link Loss Forwarding To configure an Automatic State Propagation interface pair 1 Select Ethernet Interfaces ASP LLF The Automatic State Propagation page opens Figure 201...

Page 400: ...t is set to Enable ASP events at the other side of the link are propagated to Controlled Interfaces with LLF IDs that match the LLF IDs of affected Controlled Interfaces at the other side of the link LLF IDs are unique per Monitored Interface That is if LLF ID 1 has been used for a Controlled Interface that is grouped with fixed radio interface 1 that ID cannot be used again for another Controlled...

Page 401: ...eeded the configured threshold This section includes RMON Statistics Error Reference source not found Port TX Statistics Port RX Statistics RMON Statistics To view and reset RMON statistics 1 Select Ethernet PM Statistics RMON The RMON page opens Figure 203 RMON Page To clear the statistics click Clear All at the bottom of the page To refresh the statistics click Refresh at the bottom of the page ...

Page 402: ...atistics per CoS value For each CoS value the following statistics are displayed per Color Green and Yellow Number of packets transmitted Number of packets dropped Number of bytes transmitted Number of bytes dropped Note Transmitted bits per second are not supported in the current release To display egress CoS statistics 1 Select Ethernet PM Statistics Egress CoS Statistics The Egress CoS Statisti...

Page 403: ...r specific services In the current release only Service Bundle 1 is supported By default the egress CoS statistics are cumulative That is they are not automatically cleared You can set each individual CoS number to be cleared whenever the Egress CoS Statistics page is opened by changing the Clear on read value to Yes 3 To change the clear on read value select the CoS number in the CoS queue index ...

Page 404: ...et Services and Interfaces Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics phn 3965_006v002 Page 6 33 4 In the Clear on read field select Yes to have statistics for the CoS value cleared every time you open the page 5 Click Apply ...

Page 405: ...his section includes Displaying Ethernet Port TX PMs Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port TX PM Statistics per Interface Setting the Ethernet Port TX Threshold Displaying Ethernet Port TX PMs To display Ethernet Port TX PMs 1 Select Ethernet PM Statistics Port TX The Ethernet Port TX PM Report page opens Figure 207 Ethernet Port TX PM Report Page 2 In the Interface field select the interface fo...

Page 406: ...threshold sec The number of seconds the TX bytes exceeded the specified threshold during the interval For instructions on setting the threshold see Setting the Ethernet Port TX Threshold Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the measured interval are valid An x in the column indicates that the values are not valid for example because of a power surge or power failure that ...

Page 407: ...ected interface 4 Click Close Setting the Ethernet Port TX Threshold The TX bytes Layer 1 exceed threshold sec column shows for each interval the number of seconds the TX bytes exceeded the specified threshold during the interval To view and set this threshold 1 In the Ethernet Port TX PM Report page click Threshold The Ethernet Port Tx Threshold page opens Figure 209 Ethernet Port Tx Threshold Pa...

Page 408: ...t RX PMs To display Ethernet Port RX PMs 1 Select Ethernet PM Statistics Port RX The Ethernet Port RX PM Report page opens Figure 210 Ethernet Port RX PM Report Page 2 In the Interface field select the interface for which you want to display PMs 3 In the Interval Type field o To display reports for the past 24 hours in 15 minute intervals select 15 minutes o To display reports for the past month i...

Page 409: ...ded the specified threshold during the interval For instructions on setting the threshold see Setting the Ethernet Port RX Threshold Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the measured interval are valid An x in the column indicates that the values are not valid for example because of a power surge or power failure that occurred during the interval To clear the PMs click Cl...

Page 410: ...thernet PM Port Admin Page 2 Select the interface 3 Click Enable Port PM or Disable Port PM to enable or disable the gathering of Port RX PMs on the selected interface 4 Click Close Setting the Ethernet Port RX Threshold The RX bytes Layer 1 exceed threshold sec column shows for each interval the number of seconds the RX bytes exceeded the specified threshold during the interval To view and set th...

Page 411: ...Chapter 6 Ethernet Services and Interfaces Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics phn 3965_006v002 Page 6 40 2 Enter a threshold between 0 and 4294967295 3 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 412: ...y of Service QoS This section includes QoS Overview Configuring Classification Configuring Policers Rate Metering Configuring Marking Configuring WRED Configuring Egress Shaping Configuring Scheduling Note You can display QoS egress statistics but only via CLI For information see Displaying Egress Statistics CLI ...

Page 413: ... Port Scheduler Shaper Standard QoS H QoS Queue Manager Marker Optional Egress Port Scheduler Shaper Standard QoS H QoS Queue Manager Marker Optional Egress Port Scheduler Shaper Standard QoS H QoS Queue Manager Marker CET Pipe Services Rate Limit Policing Classifier Optional Ingress Port Rate Limit Policing Classifier Optional Ingress Port Rate Limit Policing Classifier Optional Ingress Port GE R...

Page 414: ...eues Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ in bytes per each transmission queue and eligibility to transmit based on required shaping on several different levels per queue per service bundle and per port Marker This mechanism provides the ability to modify priority bits in frames based on the calculated CoS and Color For a more detailed description of QoS in the PTP 820G or PTP 820F refer to the Technical Des...

Page 415: ...terface level and overrides any other classification criteria at the logical interface level Classification by VLAN ID can only be configured via CLI See Configuring VLAN Classification and Override CLI Classification Overview PTP 820G and PTP 820F supports a hierarchical classification mechanism The classification mechanism examines incoming frames and determines their CoS and Color The benefit o...

Page 416: ...ful for example if classification is based on DSCP priority bits If no match is found at the logical interface level the default CoS is applied to incoming frames at this level In this case the Color of the frame is assumed to be Green Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface This section explains how to configure the classification criteria per each logical interface The fol...

Page 417: ...gical Interface Classification Parameters Parameter Definition Trust VLAN UP bits Select the interface s trust mode for user priority UP bits Trust The interface performs QoS and color classification according to UP and CFI DEI bits according to user configurable tables for 802 1q UP bits C VLAN frames or 802 1AD UP bits S VLAN frames VLAN UP bit classification has priority over DSCP and MPLS clas...

Page 418: ...ound with the DSCP value of the ingressing frame MPLS bits are not considered Un Trust The interface does not consider DSCP during classification Trust MPLS Select the interface s trust mode for MPLS bits Trust The interface performs QoS and color classification according to a user configurable table for MPLS EXP to CoS and color classification Un Trust The interface does not consider MPLS bits du...

Page 419: ...ens Figure 216 802 1Q Classification Page 2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit The 802 1Q Classification Edit page opens Figure 217 802 1Q Classification Edit Page 3 Modify the parameters you want to change o 802 1Q UP Read only The User Priority UP bit to be mapped o 802 1Q CFI Read only The CFI bit to be mapped o 802 1Q CoS The CoS assigned to frames with the designated UP and CFI ...

Page 420: ...ion Table To modify the classification criteria for 802 1AD User Priority UP bits 1 Select Ethernet QoS Classification 802 1AD The 802 1AD Classification page opens Figure 218 802 1AD Classification Page 2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit The 802 1AD Classification Edit page opens Figure 219 802 1Q Classification Edit Page ...

Page 421: ...n Close Modifying the DSCP Classification Table You can configure the classification criteria for Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP priority values The DSCP is a 6 bit length field inside the IP datagram header carrying priority information Classification by DSCP can be used for untagged frames as well as 802 1Q tagged or provider VLAN tagged frames To modify the classification criteria for D...

Page 422: ...eters you want to change o DSCP Read only The DSCP value to be mapped o Binary Read only The binary representation of the DSCP value o Description Read only The description of the DSCP value o CoS The CoS assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value o Color The Color assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value 4 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 423: ...lizing the bits set in the MPLS labels Classification by MPLS bits is supported in both untagged and 802 1Q provider tagged frames To modify the classification criteria for MPLS EXP bits 1 Select Ethernet QoS Classification MPLS The MPLS Classification page opens Figure 222 MPLS Classification Page 2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit The MPLS Classification Edit page opens ...

Page 424: ... MPLS Classification Edit Page 3 Modify the parameters you want to change o MPLS EXP Read only The MPLS experimental bit to be mapped o CoS The CoS assigned to frames with the designated MPLS EXP value o Color The Color assigned to frames with the designated MPLS EXP value 4 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 425: ...nned for future release PTP 820G and PTP 820F s policer mechanism is based on a dual leaky bucket mechanism TrTCM The policers can change a frame s color and CoS settings based on CIR EIR CBS EBS which makes the policer mechanism a key tool for implementing bandwidth profiles and enabling operators to meet strict SLA requirements The output of the policers is a suggested color for the inspected fr...

Page 426: ...002 Page 7 15 Figure 224 Policer Profile Page 2 Click Add The Policer Profile Add page opens Figure 225 Policer Profile Add Page 3 Configure the profile s parameters See Table 71 Policer Profile Parameters for a description of the policer profile parameters 4 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 427: ...that ingress with a CFI or DEI field set to 1 yellow Options are Color Aware All packets that ingress with a CFI DEI field set to 1 yellow are treated as EIR packets even if credits remain in the CIR bucket Color Blind All ingress packets are treated as green regardless of their CFI DEI value A color blind policer discards any former color decisions Coupling flag Select Enable or Disable When enab...

Page 428: ... in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and click Policers The Policers page opens Figure 226 Logical Interfaces Policers Page Unicast Policer Default For a logical interface you can assign policers to the following traffic flows Unicast Policer Multicast Policer Broadcast Policer Ethertype Policers Assigning Unicast Policers To assign a policer for unicast traffic to a logical interface...

Page 429: ... interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and click Policers The Policers page opens By default the Policers page opens to the Unicast Policer table Figure 226 3 Select Multicast Policer The Multicast Policer table appears Figure 227 Logical Interfaces Policers Page Multicast Policer 4 In the Policer profile field select a profile from the policer profiles defined in the system T...

Page 430: ...ll defined profiles 5 In the Broadcast admin field select Enable to enable policing on broadcast traffic flows from the logical interface or Disable to disable policing on broadcast traffic flows from the logical interface 6 Click Apply Assigning Ethertype Policers You can define up to three policers per Ethertype value To assign a policer to an Ethertype 1 Select Ethernet Interfaces Logical Inter...

Page 431: ... and Ethertype type 3 Policer and repeat the steps above Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation You can define the ingress and egress byte compensation value per logical interface The policer attached to the interface uses these values to compensate for Layer 1 non effective traffic bytes To define the ingress byte compensation value for a logical interface 1 Select Ethernet Interfac...

Page 432: ...bit in the service point egress attributes determines whether the frame is marked as green or according to the calculated color Note The calculated color is sent to the queue manager regardless of whether the marking bit is set Regular marking is only performed when The outer frame is S VLAN and S VLAN CoS preservation is disabled or The outer frame is C VLAN and C VLAN CoS preservation is disable...

Page 433: ...king 802 1Q The 802 1Q Marking page opens Each row in the 802 1Q Marking page represents a CoS and color combination Figure 230 802 1Q Marking Page 2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit The 802 1Q Marking Edit page opens Figure 231 802 1Q Marking Edit Page 3 Enter the new 802 1Q UP and 802 1Q CFI values 4 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 434: ...king is enabled To modify the 802 1AD Marking table 1 Select Ethernet QoS Marking 802 1AD The 802 1AD Marking page opens Each row in the 802 1AD Marking page represents a CoS and color combination Figure 232 802 1AD Marking Page 2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit The 802 1AD Marking Edit page opens Figure 233 802 1AD Marking Edit Page 3 Enter the new 802 1AD UP and 802 1AD DEI valu...

Page 435: ...g values o 100 Yellow traffic drop after 64kbytes occupancy o 100 Green traffic drop after 128kbytes occupancy o Yellow maximum drop is 100 o Green maximum drop is 100 Profile number 32 defines a profile in which all will be dropped It is for internal use and should not be applied to traffic A WRED profile can be assigned to each queue The WRED profile assigned to the queue determines whether or n...

Page 436: ...int field enter the minimum throughput of green packets for queues with this profile in Kbytes 0 8192 When this value is reached the system begins dropping green packets in the queue 5 In the Green curve max point field enter the maximum throughput of green packets for queues with this profile in Kbytes 0 8192 When this value is reached all green packets in the queue are dropped 6 In the Green cur...

Page 437: ...edit a WRED profile 1 Select Ethernet QoS WRED WRED Profile The WRED Profile page opens 2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit The WRED Profile Edit page opens This page is similar to the WRED Profile Add page Figure 235 You can edit any parameter except the WRED Profile ID 3 Modify the profile 4 Click Apply then Close Deleting a WRED Profile You cannot delete a WRED profile that is ...

Page 438: ...D page opens Figure 236 Logical Interfaces WRED Page 3 In the Show Service bundle ID field select 1 Note Service Bundles are bundles of queues grouped together in order to configure common egress characteristics for specific services In the current release only Service Bundle 1 is supported 4 Select a CoS Queue ID and click Edit The Logical Interfaces WRED Edit page opens Figure 237 Logical Interf...

Page 439: ...e up to 31 single leaky bucket shaper profiles If no profile is attached to the queue no egress shaping is performed on that queue Service Bundle Level Dual leaky bucket shaping On the service bundle level users can configure up to 256 dual leaky bucket shaper profiles If no profile is attached to the service bundle no egress shaping is performed on that service bundle Interface Level Single leaky...

Page 440: ...Add Page 3 In the Profile ID field select a unique ID to identify the profile Permitted values are 1 31 4 Optionally in the Description field enter a description of the profile 5 In the CIR field enter the Committed Information Rate CIR assigned to the profile in bits per second Permitted values are o 16 000 32 000 000 bps with granularity of 16 000 o 32 000 000 131 008 000 bps with granularity of...

Page 441: ...ile ID 3 Modify the profile 4 Click Apply then Close Deleting a Queue Shaper Profile You cannot delete a queue shaper profile that is assigned to a queue You must first remove the profile from the queue then delete the profile See Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue To delete a queue shaper profile select the profile in the Queue Shaper Profiles Configuration table Figure 238 and click Del...

Page 442: ...Profile Adding a Service Bundle Shaper Profile To add a service bundle shaper profile 1 Select Ethernet QoS Shaper Service Bundle Profiles The Service Bundle Shaper Profile page opens Figure 240 Service Bundle Shaper Profile Page 2 Click Add The Service Bundle Shaper Profile Add page opens with default values displayed Figure 241 Service Bundle Shaper Profile Add Page 3 In the Profile ID field sel...

Page 443: ...u can edit any parameter except the Profile ID 3 Modify the profile 4 Click Apply then Close Deleting a Service Bundle Shaper Profile You cannot delete a service bundle shaper profile that is assigned to a service bundle You must first remove the profile from the service bundle then delete the profile To delete a service bundle shaper profile select the profile in the Service Bundle Shaper Profile...

Page 444: ...Queue Shaper Configuration Add Page Note In this release only one service bundle Service Bundle ID 1 is supported 4 In the CoS queue ID field select the CoS queue ID of the queue to which you want to assign the shaper Queues are numbered according to CoS value from 0 to 7 5 In the Profile ID field select from a list of configured queue shaper profiles See Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles ...

Page 445: ... Egress Queue Shaper Configuration table open by default Figure 242 3 Select an interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and click Shaper The Logical Interfaces Shaper page opens with the Egress Queue Shaper Configuration table open by default Figure 242 4 Select the row you want to edit and click Edit The Egress Queue Shaper Configuration Edit page opens This page is similar to ...

Page 446: ...an interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and click Shaper The Logical Interfaces Shaper page opens with the Egress Queue Shaper Configuration table open by default Figure 242 3 Select Egress Service Bundle Shaper The Egress Service Bundle Shaper Configuration table appears All service bundle shaper profiles defined in the system are listed in the table Figure 244 Logical Inter...

Page 447: ...s The Logical Interfaces page opens Figure 214 2 Select an interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and click Shaper The Logical Interfaces Shaper page opens with the Egress Queue Shaper Configuration table open by default Figure 242 3 Select Egress Service Bundle Shaper The Egress Service Bundle Shaper Configuration table appears Figure 244 All service bundle shaper profiles def...

Page 448: ...riority is served before lower priority queues Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ If two or more queues have the same priority and are ready to transmit the scheduler transmits frames from the queues based on a WFQ algorithm that determines the ratio of frames per queue based on a predefined weight assigned to each queue Configuring Priority Profiles Scheduling priority profiles determine the queue priorit...

Page 449: ...ing phn 3965_006v002 Page 7 38 1 Select Ethernet QoS Scheduler Priority Profiles The Scheduler Priority Profile page opens Figure 246 Scheduler Priority Profile Page 2 Click Add The Scheduler Priority Profile Add page opens with default values displayed ...

Page 450: ...select a unique Profile ID between 1 and 8 4 For each CoS value enter the Green priority from 4 highest to 1 lowest 1 4 This priority is applied to Green frames with that CoS egressing a queue to which the profile is assigned 5 Optionally you can enter a description of up to 20 characters in the field to the right of each CoS value 6 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 451: ... Priority Profile Edit page opens This page is similar to the Scheduler Priority Profile Add page Figure 247 You can edit any parameter except the Profile ID 3 Modify the profile 4 Click Apply then Close Deleting a Scheduler Priority Profile To delete a scheduler priority profile select the profile in the Scheduler Priority Profiles page Figure 246 and click Delete The profile is deleted To delete...

Page 452: ...o which the profile is assigned You can configure up to five WFQ profiles A sixth profile Profile ID 1 is pre configured This section includes Adding a WFQ Profile Editing a WFQ Priority Profile Deleting a WFQ Profile Adding a WFQ Profile To add a WFQ profile 1 Select Ethernet QoS Scheduler WFQ Profiles The Scheduler WFQ Profile page opens Figure 248 Scheduler WFQ Profile Page 2 Click Add The Sche...

Page 453: ... Profile page opens Figure 248 2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit The Scheduler WFQ Profile Edit page opens This page is similar to the Scheduler WFQ Profile Add page Figure 249 You can edit any parameter except the Profile ID 3 Modify the profile 4 Click Apply then Close Deleting a WFQ Profile To delete a scheduler WFQ profile select the profile in the Scheduler WFQ Profiles pag...

Page 454: ...rt Scheduling Priority 3 In the Profile ID field select from a list of configured scheduling priority profiles See Configuring Priority Profiles 4 Click Apply then Close Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface To assign a WFQ profile to an interface 1 Select Ethernet Interfaces Logical Interfaces The Logical Interfaces page opens Figure 214 2 Select an interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Config...

Page 455: ...uality of Service QoS Configuring Scheduling phn 3965_006v002 Page 7 44 4 In the Profile ID field select from a list of configured scheduling priority profiles See Configuring WFQ Profiles 5 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 456: ...Chapter 8 Ethernet Protocols Configuring Scheduling phn 3965_006v002 Page 8 1 Chapter 8 Ethernet Protocols This section includes Configuring G 8032 Configuring MSTP Configuring LLDP ...

Page 457: ...s of sub 50ms ERPS prevents loops in an Ethernet ring by guaranteeing that at any time traffic can flow on all except one link in the ring This link is called the Ring Protection Link RPL Under normal conditions the RPL is blocked i e not used for traffic One designated Ethernet Ring Node the RPL Owner Node is responsible for blocking traffic at one end of the RPL When an Ethernet ring failure occ...

Page 458: ...G 8032 1 Select Ethernet Protocols G 8032 General Attribute The G 8032 General Attribute page opens Figure 252 G 8032 General Attribute Page 2 In the G8032 destination MAC address field enter the destination MAC address for PDUs generated by the node 3 Click Apply Note The G 8032 Node ID field displays the base MAC address for the node This field is read only ...

Page 459: ...n Ethernet service the service must be mapped to an MSTP instance See Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances MSTIs To add an ERPI 1 Select Ethernet Protocols G 8032 ERPI Attribute The G 8032 ERPI Attribute page opens Figure 253 G 8032 ERPI Attribute Page 2 Click Add The Add G8032 ERPI Attribute wizard opens Figure 254 G 8032 ERPI Attribute Wizard Page 1 3 In the ERPI ID field select an availa...

Page 460: ...b ring links and the link between interconnection nodes that is controlled by other ring or network o Ring with sub ring The ERPI includes both a ring with East and West service points and a connection to a sub ring using a Sub Ring service point 6 In the Service ID field select the ID of the Ethernet service to which the ERPI belongs 7 Optionally in the MEG Level field select the Maintenance Enti...

Page 461: ...as been configured for the service 12 Click Next o If the Type is Ring or Sub ring the Submit page opens Go to Step 15 o If the Type is Ring with sub ring the fourth page of the Add G 8032 ERPI Attribute wizard opens Figure 257 G 8032 ERPI Attribute Wizard Page 4 13 In the Sub Ring port SP field select the service point that connects the Ring with the Sub Ring This can be any service point that ha...

Page 462: ...ernet Protocols Configuring G 8032 phn 3965_006v002 Page 8 7 14 Click Next The Submit page opens Figure 258 G 8032 ERPI Attribute Wizard Submit 15 Verify that the parameters of the ERPI are correct and click Submit ...

Page 463: ...ffic at one end of the ERPI To designate the RPL Owner Node 1 Select Ethernet Protocols G 8032 ERPI Attribute The G 8032 ERPI Attribute page opens Figure 253 2 Select the ERPI and click Edit The ERPI Attribute Edit page opens Figure 259 G 8032 ERPI Attribute Edit Page 3 In the RPL Owner field select the service point you want to configure as RPL Owner 4 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 464: ...anges and loops 5 In the ERPI Holdoff Time field enter the ERPI hold off time in msec You must enter a multiple of 100 The hold off time determines the time period from failure detection to response 6 Click Apply then Close Viewing the ERPI Configuration and Status Parameters The G 8032 ERPI Attribute page Figure 253 displays some of the configuration and status parameters for ERPIs configured in ...

Page 465: ...is 0 there is no virtual channel Table 73 ERPI Configuration Parameters Parameter Definition ERPI State Indicates the current ERPI state Possible values are Initializing Idle Pending Protecting FS Forced Switch MS Manual Switch MEG Level The Maintenance Entity Group MEG level used for R APS messages sent in the ERPI Last Local State Describes the current local state input to the ERPI state machine...

Page 466: ...e service point is active for traffic forwarding R APS Channel Forwarding State Indicates whether the service point is forwarding R APS messages ERPI Data Forwarding State Indicates whether the service point is in unblocked forwarding state RPL Blocking State Only relevant if the ERPI to which the service point belongs is the RPL owner Indicates whether the service point is in blocked state ERPI P...

Page 467: ...he expiration of the relevant timer Blocking or Unblocking R APS Messages on a Service Point To enable or disable transmission of R APS messages on a service point 1 Select Ethernet Protocols G 8032 ERPI Attribute The G 8032 ERPI Attribute page opens Figure 253 2 Select the ERPI and click State The ERPI Attribute State page opens Figure 260 3 Select the service point on which you want to perform t...

Page 468: ... Manual Switched MS frames that have been transmitted via the service point Transmitted R APS Events Reserved for future use Received R APS Frames The number of R APS frames that have been received via the service point Received Invalid R APS Frames The number of R APS frames with an invalid format that have been received via the service point Received SF PDU The number of R APS Signal Fail SF fra...

Page 469: ...ols Configuring MSTP phn 3965_006v002 Page 8 14 Configuring MSTP This section includes MSTP Overview Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances MSTIs Configuring the MSTP Bridge Parameters Configuring the MSTP Port Parameters ...

Page 470: ...0G and PTP 820F supports MSTP according to the following IEEE standards 802 1q 802 1ad amendment Q in Q 802 1ah TE instance For a more detailed description of MSTP support in the PTP 820G or PTP 820F refer to the Technical Description for the product you are using Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances MSTIs Ethernet services can be mapped to MSTP instances MSTIs in the Instances per Service ...

Page 471: ...tance Per Service Mapping Edit Page 4 In the Instance ID field enter a number between 0 and 16 or 4095 A service mapped to MSTI 4095 is never blocked by any protocol 5 Click Apply By default all Ethernet services are mapped to MSTI 0 which represents the CIST Common Instance Spanning Tree ...

Page 472: ...wing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge CIST Parameters Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge MSTI Parameters Viewing the MSTP VLAN Parameters Enabling MSTP and Configuring the MSTP Bridge General Attributes To configure the MSTP bridge general attributes 1 Select Ethernet Protocols MSTP Bridge General Attributes The MSTP Bridge General Attribut...

Page 473: ...auses the MSTP stack to reset 4 In the MSTP BPDU Destination MAC field select the destination MAC address of BPDUs generated in the unit Options are o Customer The destination MAC address of BPDUs is 0x0180 C200 0000 Provider BPDUs are either tunneled or discarded o Provider The destination MAC address of BPDUs is 0x0180 C200 0008 Customer BPDUs are either tunneled or discarded 5 In the MSTP SD Ha...

Page 474: ...ion ID Parameters Parameter Definition MSTP Configuration ID Format Selector Read only Indicates the format specified in 802 1Q MSTP Configuration Name Enter a valid configuration name Note Changing the Configuration Name when MSTP is enabled causes the MSTP stack to reset MSTP Configuration Digest Read only Displays the MSTP Configuration Digest MSTP Revision Level Enter a valid MSTP revision lev...

Page 475: ...Spanning Tree page Table 77 MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Status Parameters Parameter Definition STP Time Since Last TC The time that has elapsed in cs since the last time the bridge entity detected a topology change STP Number of Topology Changes The total number of topology changes that have been detected by this bridge since the management entity was last reset or initialized Note Discontinuities i...

Page 476: ...arameter described below which is user configurable and which represents the value that this and all other bridges use if and when this bridge becomes the root STP Version The STP version the bridge is currently running MSTP Table 78 MSTP Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Parameters Parameter Definition STP Priority Select a value as the writeable portion of the Bridge ID This value constitutes t...

Page 477: ...o Time The Hello Time determines how often the switch broadcasts its hello message to other switches and is the same for all MSTIs Options are 100 1000 cs Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge CIST Parameters To configure the maximum hops parameter for the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST and view CIST status information 1 Select Ethernet Protocols MSTP Bridge CIST The MSTP Bridge CIST pag...

Page 478: ...age 2 In the CIST Max Hops field select the value that all bridges will use when this bridge is the root as the maximum number of hops allowed for a BPDU within a region before it is discarded Options are 6 40 3 Click Apply Table 79 lists and describes the status parameters in the MSTP Bridge CIST page ...

Page 479: ...egional root CIST Path Cost The CIST path cost from the transmitting bridge to the CIST regional root If the transmitting bridge is the CIST regional root the value of this parameter may be 0 Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Bridge MSTI Parameters To view the parameters of each MSTI in the system and to configure the MSTI bridge priority for each MSTI 1 Select Ethernet Protocols MSTP Bridge MSTI T...

Page 480: ...ridge MSTI page Table 80 MSTP Bridge MSTI Status Parameters Parameter Definition MSTI Instance ID The MSTI ID MSTI Bridge Identifier The Bridge ID for the MSTI MSTI Designated Root The Bridge ID of the root bridge for the MSTI MSTI Root Cost The path cost from the transmitting bridge to the root bridge for the MSTI MSTI Root Port The root port for the MSTI MSTI Number of Topology Changes The numbe...

Page 481: ... a port in the MSTI Viewing the MSTP VLAN Parameters Each Ethernet service is mapped to an MSTI By default all services VLAN ID are assigned to MSTI 0 CIST See Mapping Ethernet Services to MSTP instances MSTIs Note A service mapped to MSTI 4095 is never blocked by any protocol To view the VLAN ID to MSTI mapping table 1 Select Ethernet Protocols MSTP Bridge VLAN The MSTP Bridge VLAN page opens Fig...

Page 482: ...iewing and Configuring the MSTP Port MSTI Parameters Viewing and Resetting the BPDU Counters Viewing and Configuring the MSTP Port Spanning Tree To view the port level spanning tree parameters and configure the STP port priority 1 Select Ethernet Protocols MSTP Port Spanning Tree The MSTP Port Spanning Tree page opens Figure 270 MSTP Port Spanning Tree Page 2 Select an interface and click Edit The...

Page 483: ...te controls the action the port takes upon receipt of a frame Possible values are Forwarding The port sends and receives traffic normally Blocking The port does not send or receive traffic but does receive BPDUs Learning The port receives traffic but does not forward the traffic The port learns the source MAC addresses of incoming frames Listening The port monitors BPDUs but does not forward traff...

Page 484: ...guring the MSTP Port CIST Parameters To view and configure CIST port parameters 1 Select Ethernet Protocols MSTP Port CIST The MSTP Port CIST page opens Figure 272 MSTP Port CIST Page 2 Select an interface and click Edit The MSTP Port CIST Edit page opens Figure 273 MSTP Port CIST Edit Page ...

Page 485: ...dless of any indications to the contrary that are generated by the MAC entity o Automatic The MAC Enabled parameter is set to True if the MAC is connected to a point to point or full duplex LAN The MAC Enabled parameter is set to False if the MAC is connected to a non point to point and half duplex LAN 6 Click Apply then Close Table 82 lists and describes the status parameters in the MSTP Port Spa...

Page 486: ...rwarding traffic blocked but can become a Designated port after MSTP calculation CIST Port CIST Regional Route ID The Bridge ID of the current CIST Regional Root CIST Port CIST Path Cost The CIST path cost from the transmitting bridge to the CIST regional root If the transmitting bridge is the CIST regional root the value of this parameter will be 0 CIST Port Hello Time The port s Hello Time timer...

Page 487: ... of the parameters select the row with the MSTI port combination you want to view and or modify and click Edit The MSTP Port MSTI Edit page opens Figure 275 MSTP Port MSTI Edit Page 3 In the MSTI Port Priority field select the port s Priority parameter value for the MSTI i e the priority field for the Port ID for the MSTI You can select values from 0 240 in multiples of 16 ...

Page 488: ...and port number of the port MSTI Port State The port s current state for the MSTI Possible values are Forwarding The port sends and receives traffic normally Blocking The port does not send or receive traffic but does receive BPDUs Learning The port receives traffic but does not forward the traffic The port learns the source MAC addresses of incoming frames Listening The port monitors BPDUs but do...

Page 489: ...d The port is in Operational Down state and is not included in the MSTP calculation Designated The port is in Operational Up state and has been designated to forward traffic Root The port is forwarding traffic towards the root bridge Alternate The port is not forwarding traffic blocked but can become a Designated port after MSTP calculation Master The port is forwarding traffic towards the CIST ro...

Page 490: ...figuration BPDU The number of configuration BPDUs received since the last counter reset Received RST BPDU The number of Rapid Spanning Tree RST BPDUs received since the last counter reset Received MST BPDU The number of Multiple Spanning Tree MST BPDUs received since the last counter reset Transmitted TCN BPDU The number of Topology Change Notifications TCNs transmitted since the last counter rese...

Page 491: ...hysically adjacent layer 2 peers LLDP is a part of the IEEE 802 1AB 2005 standard that enables automatic network connectivity discovery by means of a port identity information exchange between each port and its peer Each port periodically sends and also expects to receive frames called Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units LLDPDU LLDPDUs contain information in TLV format about port identity suc...

Page 492: ...ng used in the associated LLDP Agent Remote Management Address Time Mark The time the entry was created Configuring the General LLDP Parameters This section explains how to define the general LLDP parameters for the unit For instructions on defining port specific parameters see Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters Note The management IP address advertised by the local element depends on the IP pro...

Page 493: ...s in seconds the interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted during fast transmission periods such as when the unit detects a new peer In this release the Fast TX Interval is set at 1 Fast TX The initial value used to initialize the variable which determines the number of transmissions that are made during fast transmission periods In this release the Fast TX No is set at 4 Reinit Delay Seconds ...

Page 494: ...normal transmission periods You can select a value from 5 to 3600 The default value is 10 Hold Multiplier Defines the time to live TTL multiplier The TTL determines the length of time LLDP frames are retained by the receiving device The TTL is determined by multiplying the TX Interval by the Hold Multiplier You can select a value from 2 to 10 The default value is 4 Configuring the LLDP Port Parame...

Page 495: ...ames on this port but does not update information about its peer o RX Only LLDP agent receives but does not transmit LLDP frames on this port o TX and RX LLDP agent transmits and receives LLDP frames on this port default value o Disabled LLDP agent does not transmit or receive LLDP frames on this port 4 In the Notification Enable field select from the following options to define on a per agent bas...

Page 496: ...tion address of the LLDP agent associated with this port TLV TX Indicates which of the unit s capabilities is transmitted by the LLDP agent for the port PortDesc The LLDP agent transmits Port Description TLVs SysName The LLDP agent transmits System Name TLVs SysDesc The LLDP agent transmits System Description TLVs SysCap The LLDP agent transmits System Capabilities TLVs Displaying the Unit s Manag...

Page 497: ...Page 8 42 Figure 281 LLDP Destination Address Table Page To displays the MAC address associated with the unit for purposes of LLDP transmissions 1 Select Ethernet Protocols LLDP Advanced Configuration Management TLV The LLDP Management TLV Configuration page opens ...

Page 498: ...rs Parameter Definition Interface Location Identifies the port Destination Address Defines the MAC address associated with the port for purposes of LLDP transmissions Management Address The unit s IP address Address Subtype Defines the type of the management address identifier encoding used for the Management Address Tx Enable Indicates whether the unit s Management Address is transmitted with LLD...

Page 499: ...arameters Parameter Definition Local Interface Location The location of the local interface Management Address The octet string used to identify the management address component associated with the remote system Address Sub Type The type of management address identifier encoding used in the associated LLDP Agent Remote Management Address Destination Address The peer LLDP agent s destination MAC Ad...

Page 500: ...eger value used by this agent to identify a particular connection instance unique only for the indicated peer Remote Chassis ID An octet string used to identify the peer s chassis Chassis ID Subtype The type of encoding used to identify the peer s chassis Remote Port An octet string used to identify the port component associated with the remote system Port Sub type The type of port identifier enco...

Page 501: ...cluded in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent as defined in the Name field of the Unit Parameters page See Configuring Unit Parameters System Description The system description included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent as defined in the Description field of the Unit Parameters page See Configuring Unit Parameters Chassis ID The MAC Address of the local unit s chassis Chassis ID SubType The typ...

Page 502: ...her 1 repeater 2 bridge 3 wlanAccessPoint 4 router 5 telephone 6 docsisCableDevice 7 stationOnly 8 cVLANComponent 9 sVLANComponent 10 twoPortMACRelay Capabilities Enabled A bitmap value used to identify which system capabilities are enabled on the local system as included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent The bitmap is defined by the following parameters 0 other 1 repeater 2 bridge 3 wlanAcces...

Page 503: ...286 LLDP Local System Port Page Table 93 describes the parameters in the LLDP Local System Port page These parameters are read only Table 93 LLDP Local System Port Parameters Parameter Definition Interface Location Identifies the port Port ID The port s MAC address Port Sub Type The type of encoding used to identify the port in LLDP transmissions In this release this parameter is always set to MAC...

Page 504: ... Ethernet Protocols LLDP Advanced Local System Management The LLDP Local System Management page opens Figure287 LLDP Local System Management Page 2 To display all the parameters select a row and click View Figure 288 LLDP Local System Management View Page Table 94 describes the parameters in the LLDP Local System Management page These parameters are read only ...

Page 505: ...ddress Length Reserved for future use Address Interface ID Reserved for future use Address Interface Sub Type Reserved for future use Address OID Reserved for future use Displaying LLDP Statistics To display statistics about changes reported via LLDP by the remote unit 1 Select Ethernet Protocols LLDP Advanced Statistic General The LLDP Statistic page opens Figure 289 LLDP Statistic Page Table 95 ...

Page 506: ...ure use Ageouts The number of times the information from the remote system has been deleted from the local unit s database because the information s TTL has expired The RX Ageouts counter in the Port RX page is similar to this counter but is for specific ports rather than the entire unit To display statistics about LLDP transmissions and transmission errors 1 Select Ethernet Protocols LLDP Advance...

Page 507: ... destination MAC address If the set of TLVs that is selected in the LLDP local system MIB by network management would result in an LLDPDU that violates LLDPDU length restrictions then the No of Length Error statistic is incremented by 1 and an LLDPDU is sent containing the mandatory TLVs plus as many of the optional TLVs in the set as will fit in the remaining LLDPDU length To display statistics a...

Page 508: ...nt is enabled Valid Frames The number of valid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on this port Discarded TLVs The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on this port Unrecognized TLVs The number of LLDP TLVs received on the given port that are not recognized by LLDP agent Ageouts The number of age outs that occurred on the port An age out is the number of times the comp...

Page 509: ...9 1 Chapter 9 TDM Services and Interfaces This section includes TDM Overview Configuring the E1 DS1 Interface Configuring Native TDM Trails Configuring TDM Pseudowire Services Configuring Advanced Pseudowire Parameters Displaying TDM PMs Related topics Performing TDM Diagnostics ...

Page 510: ... with third party packet PW equipment PTP 820G and PTP 820F also offers hybrid Ethernet and TDM services Hybrid services can utilize either Native TDM or pseudowire Hybrid Ethernet and TDM services can also be transported via cascading interfaces This enables the creation of links among multiple units in a node for multi carrier and multi directional applications The PTP 820G and PTP 820F Web EMS ...

Page 511: ...the ETSI standard in E1 mode For instructions on configuring the system to operate according to the ANSI FCC standard DS1 see TDM Overview CLI You can configure the E1 DS1 interface in the E1 DS1 Interfaces page To configure the E1 DS1 interface 1 Select TDM Interfaces E1 DS1 The E1 DS1 Interfaces page opens Figure 292 E1 DS1 Interfaces Page 2 Select an interface and click Edit The E1 DS1 Interfac...

Page 512: ... the E1 DS1 Interface phn 3965_006v002 Page 9 4 Figure 293 E1 DS1 Interfaces Edit Page 3 Configure the parameters described in Table 98 4 Click Apply then Close Note Table 99 lists and describes the non configurable E1 DS1 Interface status parameters ...

Page 513: ...ou select Clock Recovery you must select the clock source reference in the Recovery Clock Source Reference Port field Absolute Clock Reference If Timing Mode is set to Absolute select the clock source reference for the port Options are Front Panel An external clock reference from a dedicated front panel clock interface This can be o An E1 DS1 line or o A Digital 2 048MHz 1 544MHz input System Refe...

Page 514: ...is planned for future release Idle Code Enter the value to be transmitted on this port for unused time slots 0 255 Cable Length Reserved for future use Table 99 E1 DS1 Interface Parameters Parameter Definition Shelf Slot ID Slot 1 Port Number The physical port number of the port on the TDM card Operational State Indicates whether the port is currently operational Up or non operational Down Line Al...

Page 515: ... Trails Limitations on Available Endpoints Native TDM Trail Configuration Overview Note By default the TDM interfaces in a PTP 820G or PTP 820F unit are set to operate according to the ETSI standard in E1 mode For instructions on configuring the system to operate according to the ANSI FCC standard DS1 see TDM Overview CLI The Web EMS provides a simple interface that guides you step by step through...

Page 516: ... and the Admin Status field in the Interface Manager page to Up Otherwise the LIC T155 will not appear in the dropdown list See Enabling the Expansion Slots and Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager Radio endpoints can be selected from the radio interfaces a Radio Protection Group or a Multi Carrier ABC Group Cascading interfaces can be configured on ports GbE1 CS1 and GbE2 CS2 When operating ...

Page 517: ... currently configured as an RFU port it is listed as Radio Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager If the port is currently configured as an Ethernet port it is listed as Ethernet Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager 2 In the Radio Unit page set the Admin status of Radio Unit Slot 1 Port 3 to Down 3 If there are any service points attached to the port...

Page 518: ...Ethernet Interface Configuration Edit Page 8 In the Interface Type field select RFU or Ethernet 9 Click Apply then Close 10 If you configured the port as an Ethernet interface you must set the port s admin state to Up in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager If you configured the port as an RFU interface its admin state is Up automatically If you configured the port a...

Page 519: ...PTP 820F Ethernet ports support 1 GE only If you configured the port as an RFU interface make sure to set the Radio Unit parameters as necessary Configuring Cascading Interfaces Optional Note In order use a radio interface a radio protection group a Multi Carrier ABC group or a cascading interface as an endpoint for a TDM trail you must configure either a management or a pipe service point on that...

Page 520: ...l Description A text description of the trail Interface 1 Slot Group Slot 1 or the group number of the first endpoint in the trail Interface 1 Port The port number of the first endpoint in the trail Interface 1 VC The VC classified to the first endpoint of the trail 1 256 This field is only relevant for radio and cascading endpoints Interface 2 Slot Group Slot 1 or the group number of the second e...

Page 521: ...protecting TDM trail so that the configured WTR time will be in effect for this trail To set the WTR time for trails with revertive 1 1 path protection 1 Underneath the Native TDM Services table click Timer Configuration The TDM Service Revertive Timer Configuration page opens Figure 295 TDM Service Revertive Timer Configuration Page 2 Enter the number in seconds for the WTR time The default value...

Page 522: ...Services Creation page configure the parameters of the trail s first endpoint 2 In the Slot Group Port field select a TDM interface a radio interface or group or a cascading interface Configuring a TDM Card or Group as an Endpoint i Select the E1 DS1 interface Figure 296 Native TDM Service Creation Interface 1 E1 DS1 Note Some interfaces may not appear in the Slot Group Port field Refer to Limitat...

Page 523: ...sed to correct frequency offsets o System Reference The interface is synchronized to the system reference clock o Front Panel The interface is synchronized to an external clock reference from a dedicated front panel clock interface Configuring a Radio Card or Group or a Cascading Interface as an Endpoint Note In order to add a radio radio group or cascading interface as a trail endpoint an MNG ser...

Page 524: ...il ID field select a Trail ID 1 512 to identify the trail Only unused Trail ID values appear in the selection box The default value is the lowest unused Trail ID 7 Optionally in the Trail Description field enter text to describe the trail 8 In the Trail Protection field select one of the following o Unprotected The trail will not have trail protection o 1 1 Protection non revertive The trail will ...

Page 525: ...e protected or protecting path the node itself is essentially unprotected and you do not need to configure a separate protecting path When you click Next you will be asked to configure a Working Path ID Note In a 1 1 Protection configuration the third party equipment usually detects problems in the link via E1 DS1 AIS signals If the third party equipment does not support the ability to read E1 DS1...

Page 526: ...e appears that no endpoint can be selected 11 In the VC field select the VC you want to classify to the endpoint of the protecting trail 1 512 12 In the Protecting Trail ID or Working Trail ID field select a Trail ID 1 512 to identify the protecting or working trail Only unused Trail ID values appear in the selection box The default value is the lowest unused Trail ID All nodes in the protected co...

Page 527: ...en the time you selected the resource and the time you pressed Submit If this occurs you must go back and if necessary select alternative resources for the trail Adding a Trail between Radio Ports Radio Groups or Cascading Interfaces Note In order to add a radio radio group or cascading interface as a trail endpoint an MNG service point must be added to the interface or group in the pre defined ma...

Page 528: ...fer to Limitations on Available Endpoints for the possible reasons an interface will not appear If there are no available interfaces a message appears that no endpoint can be selected 3 In the VC field select the VC you want to classify to the endpoint 1 512 4 Click Next The Interface 2 page opens In the Interface 2 configure the parameters of the trail s second endpoint Figure 303 Native TDM Serv...

Page 529: ...dio Cascading 7 In the Trail ID field select a Trail ID 1 512 to identify the trail Only unused Trail ID values appear in the selection box The default value is the lowest unused Trail ID 8 Optionally in the Trail Description field enter text to describe the trail 9 Click Finish The Selection Summary page opens displaying the parameters you have configured ...

Page 530: ...arameters click Back Note An invalid configuration error may occur in the event that another user utilized a resource that you selected such as an interface or a Trail ID between the time you selected the resource and the time you pressed Submit If this occurs you must go back and if necessary select alternative resources for the trail Editing TDM Trails To edit an existing trail 1 Select the trai...

Page 531: ...n Status Select Up to enable the trail or Down to disable the trail For protected trails you can select Working Down or Protecting Down to disable only the working or only the protecting trail Switch Command Used for protected trails to initiate a manual switchover Select from the following options o No Action No manual switchover is initiated o Manual Switch Initiates a manual switchover To imple...

Page 532: ...Services table or select all the trails by selecting the check box in the top row 2 Click Delete underneath the TDM Services table Limitations on Available Endpoints A group or interface will not appear in the Slot Group Port field if any of the following conditions exist For the E1 DS1 interface the E1 DS1s have all already been assigned to other trails For a radio interface or group all VCs have...

Page 533: ...ervices This section includes TDM Pseudowire Services Configuration Overview General Guidelines for Provisioning TDM Pseudowire Services Viewing TDM Pseudowire Services Configuring the Revertive Timer Adding TDM Pseudowire Services Editing TDM Pseudowire Services Deleting TDM Pseudowire Services Limitations on Available Endpoints ...

Page 534: ...e TDM PseudoWire Services page displays all pseudowire services configured on the unit and provides a simple and efficient workflow for adding pseudowire services The following interfaces can be used as service endpoints TDM interfaces Radio interfaces Cascading interfaces Ethernet interfaces TDM endpoints can be E1 DS1s Radio endpoints can be selected from the radio interfaces a Radio Protection ...

Page 535: ...t is currently configured as an RFU port it is listed as Radio Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager If the port is currently configured as an Ethernet port it is listed as Ethernet Slot 1 Port 5 in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager 2 In the Radio Unit page set the Admin status of Radio Unit Slot 1 Port 3 to Down 3 If there are any service points attached to the ...

Page 536: ...FU Ethernet Interface Configuration Edit Page 8 In the Interface Type field select RFU or Ethernet 9 Click Apply then Close 10 If you configured the port as an Ethernet interface you must set the port s admin state to Up in the Interface Manager See Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager If you configured the port as an RFU interface its admin state is Up automatically If you configured the por...

Page 537: ... services it is recommended to follow these guidelines Each service within the same local region should use a unique EC ID The EC ID should also be unique along the path of each service For protected services the EC ID of the protecting service must be different from the EC ID of the working service At one of the two endpoint devices the Local MEP parameter should be set to 1 while at the far end ...

Page 538: ...2 Slot Group The slot or group number of the second endpoint in the service Interface 2 Port The port number of the second endpoint in the service Interface 2 VC VLAN For Ethernet radio and cascading interfaces The VLAN classified to the second endpoint of the service 1 4094 For E1 DS1 interfaces Not relevant N A Protecting Interface Slot Group For protected services Slot 1 or the group number of ...

Page 539: ...ath protection 1 Underneath the TDM PseudoWire Services table click Timer Configuration The TDM Service Revertive Timer Configuration page opens Figure 309 TDM Service Revertive Timer Configuration Page 2 Enter the number in seconds for the WTR time The default value is 10 seconds 3 Click Apply then Close Adding TDM Pseudowire Services To initiate the workflow for adding a pseudowire service 1 Sel...

Page 540: ...elect the E1 DS1 interface Figure 310 Pseudowire Service Creation Interface 1 E1 DS1 Note Some interfaces may not appear in the Slot Group Port field Refer to Limitations on Available Endpoints for the possible reasons an interface will not appear If there are no available interfaces a message appears that no endpoint can be selected ii In the E1 DS1 field select an E1 DS1 or VC12 This configures ...

Page 541: ...erence from a dedicated front panel clock interface Configuring a Radio Port or Group or an Ethernet or Cascading Interface as an Endpoint i In the Interface 1 screen of the TDM PseudoWire Services Creation page configure the parameters of the service s first endpoint Figure 311 Pseudowire Service Creation Interface 1 Radio Ethernet Cascading Note Some interfaces may not appear in the Slot Group P...

Page 542: ...s a TDM interface select a radio interface a Radio Protection group a Multi Carrier ABC group or an Ethernet or cascading interface in the Interface 2 page o If the first endpoint is a radio interface a Radio Protection group a Multi Carrier ABC group or an Ethernet or cascading interface select a TDM interface in the Interface 2 page 4 Follow the instructions in Step 2 to configure the second end...

Page 543: ...y SAToP Ethernet pseudowire services are supported 9 In the Protection field select one of the following o Unprotected The service will not have path protection o 1 1 Protection non revertive The service will have 1 1 path protection in which two separate network paths are defined for the service Each service has the same TDM interface endpoints but traffic flows to the destination via different r...

Page 544: ...terface o 1 1 Dual Homing Network Edge Used for PTP 820G or PTP 820F units located at the network edge in a 1 1 Protection configuration Since the node itself is part of the protected or protecting path the node itself is essentially unprotected and you do not need to configure a separate protecting path When you click Next you will be asked to configure a Working Path ID Note In a 1 1 Protection ...

Page 545: ... group or cascading interface to serve as the interface for the protecting path Note Some interfaces may not appear in the Slot Group Port field Refer to Limitations on Available Endpoints for the possible reasons an interface will not appear If there are no available interfaces a message appears that no endpoint can be selected 12 In the VLAN Type field select the VLAN Type for the protecting pat...

Page 546: ...15 Click Finish The Selection Summary page opens displaying the parameters you have configured Figure 315 Pseudowire Service Creation Selection Summary Page Radio Ethernet Cascading TDM 16 To create the service with the displayed parameters click Submit If you want to return to an earlier page and change the service parameters click Back Note An invalid configuration error may occur in the event t...

Page 547: ...y not appear in the Slot Group Port field Refer to Limitations on Available Endpoints for the possible reasons an interface will not appear If there are no available interfaces a message appears that no endpoint can be selected 3 In the VLAN Type field select the VLAN Type for the first endpoint The VLAN Type determines which frames enter the service via this endpoint based on the frame s VLAN tag...

Page 548: ...Service Creation Service Selection Page Radio Ethernet Cascading 8 Select an EC ID 1 512 to identify the service Only unused EC ID values appear in the EC ID selection box The default value is the lowest unused EC ID 9 In the P bit field select a p bit value 0 7 This value will be assigned to frames passing through the service 10 Optionally in the Description field enter text to describe the servi...

Page 549: ...ameters click Back Note An invalid configuration error may occur in the event that another user utilized a resource that you selected such as an interface or a EC ID between the time you selected the resource and the time you pressed Submit If this occurs you must go back and if necessary select alternative resources for the service Editing TDM Pseudowire Services To edit an existing service 1 Sel...

Page 550: ...only the protecting path Switch Command Used for protected services to initiate a manual switchover Select from the following options o No Action No manual switchover is initiated o Manual Switch Initiates a manual switchover To implement the changes click Apply then Close To change the Admin Status of multiple services 1 Select the services in the TDM PseudoWire Services table or select all the s...

Page 551: ...ndpoints A slot group or interface will not appear in the Slot Group Port field if any of the following conditions exist An SAP service point has been configured on the interface For the E1 DS1 interface the E1 DS1s have all already been assigned to other services For a radio interface or group all VCs have already been assigned to other services For a TDM interface there is no available TDM servi...

Page 552: ...DM PseudoWire Advanced section of the Web EMS This section includes Configuring Pseudowire Card Parameters Configuring OEM for Pseudowire Services Configuring Pseudowire Tunnels and Tunnel Groups Configuring Pseudowire Profiles Configuring Pseudowire TDM Services Manually Note The DS0 Bundles page is reserved for future use Configuring Pseudowire Card Parameters To configure the pseudowire paramet...

Page 553: ...emains the same and no configuration changes are required Signal to System Sync Distribution Reference Select the clock source that the TDM interface exports to the general PTP 820G or PTP 820F synchronization mechanism Options are None No clock source is exported from the TDM interface to the general PTP 820G synchronization mechanism Front Panel Reserved for future use Clock Recovery Reserved fo...

Page 554: ...ction you must first assign a Maintenance Domain MD to the E1 DS1 interface You must then configure Maintenance Associations MAs which are assigned to the tunnels that constitute the tunnel group in the protected service You can configure up to eight MDs per card Note Pseudowire Loopback and Link Trace are planned for future release Configuring Pseudowire Maintenance Domains MDs To view all the MD...

Page 555: ... maintenance level of the MD The maintenance level ensures that the CFM frames for each domain do not interfere with each other Where domains are nested the encompassing domain must have a higher level than the domain it encloses The maintenance level is carried in all CFM frames that relate to that domain To add an MD 1 In the Select a slot field select the TDM card to which you want to add the M...

Page 556: ...nt to edit belongs 2 Click Edit The Service OAM Maintenance Domain Edit page opens You can edit any of the MD parameters you can configure when you add an MD except the Maintenance Domain ID field 3 Edit the MD parameters as described above 4 Click Apply then Close To delete an MD 1 In the Select a slot field select the TDM card to which the MD you want to delete belongs 2 Click Delete The MD is d...

Page 557: ... Association Page Table 104 Pseudowire Maintenance Association Parameters Parameter Definition Maintenance Association ID A unique ID that identifies the MA Maintenance Association Name A name for the MA for information purposes Maintenance Domain ID The MD to which the MA belongs Local MEP ID A unique ID for the local MEP Remote MEP ID A unique ID for the remote MEP VLAN Type The outer VLAN type ...

Page 558: ...0 7 Detected Defects A bitmask that indicates several possible problems with the link 0 no alarm 1 RDI 2 MAC status 4 remote CCM 8 error CCM 16 Cross connection CCM 32 AIS The number that appears indicates the sum of the defects For example the number 7 indicates that RDI MAC status and remote CCM defects have been detected in the link Remote MEP MAC Address The MAC address of the remote MEP ...

Page 559: ...e Domain ID field select an MD to which the MA belongs 6 In the Local MEP ID field select a unique ID for the local MEP 7 In the Remote MEP ID field select a unique ID for the remote MEP 8 In the VLAN Type field select the outer VLAN type assigned to the tunnel to which the MA will be attached Options are o None o C type o S type This should be the same as the VLAN Type for the service being monit...

Page 560: ...escribed above 4 Click Apply then Close To delete an MA 1 In the Select a slot field select the TDM card to which the MA you want to delete belongs 2 Click Delete The MA is deleted Note You cannot delete an MA that is assigned to a tunnel See Configuring Pseudowire Tunnels and Tunnel Groups Configuring Pseudowire Tunnels and Tunnel Groups Each TDM service must include an encapsulation tunnel to de...

Page 561: ...arameter Definition Tunnel ID A unique ID that identifies the tunnel Tunnel Admin Displays the administrative state of the tunnel Enabled or Disabled Tunnel Type Displays the tunnel s encapsulation type In this release only Ethernet Layer 2 MEF 8 encapsulation Eth is available Destination MAC Address The MAC address of the interface or card at the other site of the link This is only relevant for E...

Page 562: ...he Tunnel ID field enter a unique ID from 1 to 16 to identify the tunnel 3 In the Tunnel Admin field select Enable to enable the tunnel or Disable if you want to add the tunnel but enable it at a later time 4 In the Tunnel Type field select the tunnel s encapsulation type In this release only Ethernet Layer 2 MEF 8 encapsulation Eth is available 5 In the Destination MAC Address field for Ethernet ...

Page 563: ...ines when a switchover is necessary You must define the MA separately in order to assign it to a tunnel For instructions see Configuring OEM for Pseudowire Services For more information about defining TDM path protection generally see Configuring a Tunnel Group 10 Click Apply then Close Editing a Tunnel To edit a tunnel 1 Select the tunnel you want to edit 2 Click Edit The PseudoWire PSN Tunnels E...

Page 564: ... Tunnel operational state Displays the current operational state of the tunnel Up or Down Tunnel source IP address Reserved for future use Tunnel source MAC address The source MAC address for the tunnel Remote MAC address The MAC address of the interface or card at the other site of the link This is only relevant for Ethernet MEF 8 tunnels Deleting a Tunnel To delete a tunnel 1 Select the tunnel y...

Page 565: ...s to MSTP instance number 63 which is meant for Traffic Engineering ports are always forwarding and to map the two different transport VLANs over two different paths TDM path protection uses CFM to monitor the network paths Because SOAM CFM is configured on the TDM interface level the TDM interface can determine the status of the entire network path up to and including the interface itself To conf...

Page 566: ...ed or disabled for the tunnel group See Configuring the Revertive Timer Operational state Displays the current operational state of the tunnel group Up or Down Active Tunnel Displays the ID of the tunnel that is currently in active mode Number of switches Displays the number of protection switches that have taken place since the last system reset or creation of the group Revertive countdown In the...

Page 567: ...nfigure the tunnel group as explained below Note TDM pseudowire services with 1 1 path protection that were configured using software versions prior to T7 9 are non revertive To set the WTR time for TDM pseudowire services with revertive path protection 1 In the Revertive Timer Configuration area at the top of the Pseudowire Tunnel Groups page Figure 331 enter the number in seconds for the WTR tim...

Page 568: ...s the time remaining in seconds before reversion to the primary path will take place See Configuring the Revertive Timer Editing a Tunnel Group To edit a tunnel group 1 Select the tunnel you want to edit 2 Click Edit The PseudoWire Tunnel Groups Edit page opens You can edit any of the tunnel group parameters you can configure when you add a tunnel except the Tunnel group ID field 3 Edit the tunnel...

Page 569: ...the pseudowire profiles configured for the unit 1 Select TDM TDM PseudoWire Advanced Profiles The PseudoWire Profiles page opens Figure 333 PseudoWire Profiles Page Table 108 describes the pseudowire profile parameters Table 108 Pseudowire Profile Parameters Parameter Definition Profile ID Enter unique ID from 1 to 64 that identifies the profile Once you add the profile you cannot edit this field ...

Page 570: ...er the number of consecutive packets with sequential sequence numbers required in order for the system to exit a loss of packet synchronization state LOPS from 1 to 10 The default value is 2 Consecutive Missing Packets Threshold Enter the number of consecutive missing packets required in order for the system to enter a loss of packet synchronization state LOPS from 1 to 15 The default value is 2 P...

Page 571: ...ose Editing a Pseudowire Profile To edit a pseudowire profile 1 In the PseudoWire Profiles page Figure 333 select the profile you want to edit and click Edit The PseudoWire Profiles Edit page opens 2 Edit the pseudowire profile parameters described in Table 108 You can edit any of the parameters you can configure when you add a profile except the Profile ID field 3 Click Apply then Close Deleting ...

Page 572: ... Services and Interfaces Configuring Advanced Pseudowire Parameters phn 3965_006v002 Page 9 64 2 Click Delete The profile is deleted Note You cannot delete a tunnel group that is assigned to a pseudowire TDM service ...

Page 573: ...rofile tunnel or bundle until you first disable the service This section includes Viewing Pseudowire TDM Services Adding a Pseudowire TDM Service Editing a Pseudowire TDM Service Viewing the Status of a Pseudowire TDM Service Deleting a Pseudowire TDM Service Viewing Pseudowire TDM Services To view all the pseudowire TDM services configured for a TDM card 1 Select TDM TDM PseudoWire Advanced Servi...

Page 574: ...ace Select the TDM port to use with the service TDM Port Bundle ID Reserved for future use PW Profile ID Select the TDM profile to use with the service The TDM profile determines the behavior of the TDM service including the buffer payload suppression and other parameters A profile can be used by multiple TDM services You can define up to 64 TDM profiles for the unit in the PseudoWire Profiles pag...

Page 575: ...ating a service with path protection select Yes If you are creating a service without path protection select No If you select Yes the Tunnel ID must be the ID of a Tunnel Group For instructions on creating a tunnel group see Configuring a Tunnel Group Adding a Pseudowire TDM Service To add a pseudowire TDM service 1 Click Add The PseudoWire Services Add page opens ...

Page 576: ... 1 Select the service you want to edit 2 Click Edit The PseudoWire Services Edit page opens You can edit any of the service parameters you can configure when you add a service except the Service ID field 3 Edit the service parameters as described above 4 Click Apply then Close Viewing the Status of a Pseudowire TDM Service To view the operational status of a service and the service s statistics 1 ...

Page 577: ...vice ID Operational Status Displays the current operational state of the service Up or Down If no traffic is currently passing through the service the Operational Status displays Down This does not necessarily mean there is anything wrong with the unit or the configuration of the service Tx Packets The number of transmitted packets Rx Packets The number of received packets LOPS Transitions The num...

Page 578: ...r Count The maximum jitter buffer usage registered for the previous second Deleting a Pseudowire TDM Service To delete a pseudowire TDM service 1 Select the service you want to delete 2 Select the service 3 Click Edit and set the Admin State of the service to Disable 4 Click Apply then Close 5 Select the service 6 Click Delete The service is deleted ...

Page 579: ...ge 2 In the Interface field select the port for which you want to display PMs 3 In the Interval Type field select o To display reports in 15 minute intervals select 15 minutes o To display reports in daily intervals select 24 hours Table 111 describes the E1 DS1 PMs Table 111 E1 DS1 PMs Parameter Definition ES Indicates the number of seconds during which errors occurred SES Indicates the number of...

Page 580: ...Indicates whether the values received at time and date of the measured interval are reliable An x in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time To display the PMs in a graph format click Graph Figure 339 E1 DS1 PM Page Graph Format ...

Page 581: ...the Native TDM Service PMs Table 112 Native TDM Service PMs Parameter Definition ES Indicates the number of seconds during which errors occurred SES Indicates the number of seconds during which severe errors occurred UAS Indicates the Unavailable Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes FC Indicates the number of LOPS Loss of Packets events during...

Page 582: ...page opens Figure 342 Services PM Page Pseudowire TDM Services 2 In the Service field select a service 3 In the Interval Type field select o To display reports in 15 minute intervals select 15 minutes o To display reports in daily intervals select 24 hours Table 113 describes the Pseudowire TDM Service PMs Table 113 Pseudowire TDM Service PMs Parameter Definition ES Indicates the number of seconds...

Page 583: ...es the number of packets that arrived out of order but could be recovered during the current interval Misordered and Dropped Packets Indicates the number of packets that arrived out of order and could not be recovered during the current interval Malformed Packets Indicates the number of packets that were detected as having an unexpected size or a bad header stack during the current interval Integr...

Page 584: ...onfiguring the Sync Configuring the Outgoing Clock and SSM Message Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock Configuring the 1588 Boundary Clock Note By default the unit is set to operate according to the ETSI standard For instructions on configuring the system to operate according to the ANSI FCC standard DS1 see TDM Overview CLI ...

Page 585: ... is selected Note You can configure a revertive timer for the PTP 820G or PTP 820F unit When the revertive timer is configured the unit will not switch to another synchronization source unless that source has been stable for at least the number of seconds defined in the revertive timer This helps to prevent a situation in which numerous switchovers occur when a synchronization source reports a hig...

Page 586: ... assigned to this synchronization source This enables the system to select the source with the highest quality as the current synchronization source If the Sync Interface Quality is set to Automatic the quality is determined by the received SSMs If no valid SSM messages are received or in case of interface failure such as LOS LOC LOF the quality becomes Failure SSM must be enabled on the remote in...

Page 587: ... SSM messages are received or in case of interface failure such as LOS LOC LOF the quality becomes Failure SSM must be enabled on the remote interface in order for the interface to receive SSM messages For instructions how to enable SSM see Configuring the Outgoing Clock and SSM Messages o If the Sync Interface Quality is set to a fixed value then the quality status becomes Failure upon interface ...

Page 588: ...iguring the Sync Source phn 3965_006v002 Page 10 5 Deleting a Sync Source To delete a synchronization source 1 Select the synchronization source in the Sync Source page Figure 344 2 Click Delete The synchronization source is deleted ...

Page 589: ...d or in case of interface failure such as LOS LOC LOF the quality becomes failure Each unit holds a parameter which indicates the quality of its reference clock This is the quality of the current synchronization source interface The reference source quality is transmitted through SSM messages to all relevant radio interfaces In order to prevent loops an SSM with quality Do Not Use is sent from the...

Page 590: ...nterface s synchronization source Options are o Local Clock The interface uses its internal clock as its synchronization source o System Clock Default value The interface uses the system clock as its synchronization source o Source Interface Reserved for future use o Time Loop Reserved for future use 4 The Sync Radio Channel field is only relevant for radio interfaces Select a synchronization chan...

Page 591: ...Messages phn 3965_006v002 Page 10 8 5 In the SSM Admin field select On or Off to enable or disable SSM for the interface By default SSM is disabled on all interfaces On radio interfaces SSM messages with the quality DNU Do not Use are sent when SSM Admin is set to Off ...

Page 592: ...mmunication is using the IPv6 transport layer 1588 TC cannot be used on 1 1 HSB links 1588 TC is not supported with Frame Cut Through Note Make sure to enable Transparent Clock on the remote side of the link before enabling it on the local side To configure Transparent Clock 1 Add the port receiving synchronization from the customer side as a Sync source See Adding a Sync Source 2 Add a radio inte...

Page 593: ... values on the two sides of the link If you set the local side to Upstream you must set the remote side to Downstream and vice versa Note This parameter must be set to Upstream on one side of the 1588 link and Downstream on the other 11 Click Apply then Close 12 1588 packets should be mapped to CoS 7 By default 1588 packets are not mapped to any CoS To map 1588 packets to CoS 7 you must disable Co...

Page 594: ...ng command root ethernet generalcfg ptp tc cos preserve cos value 7 After you enter these commands 1588 packets will automatically be mapped to CoS 7 Note If necessary you can use the ethernet generalcfg ptp tc cos preserve cos value command to map a different CoS value 0 7 to 1588 packets but it is recommended to map 1588 packets to CoS 7 ...

Page 595: ...clocks This reduces the processing load from grandmaster clocks and increases the scalability of the synchronization network while rigorously maintaining timing accuracy The PTP 820 Boundary Clock mechanism requires the use of untagged Ethernet multicast PTP packets Note Boundary Clock and Transparent Clock can be used together in the same PTP 820 node Note that in System Release 10 0 1588 BC cann...

Page 596: ...meters page opens You can configure up to four interfaces per unit to be part of the Boundary Clock node These interfaces can be radio and Ethernet interfaces but not TDM interfaces or groups e g LAG or Multi Carrier ABC groups Figure 350 1588 Boundary Clock Port Parameters Page 5 Select an interface and click Edit The 1588 Boundary Clock Port Parameters Edit page opens ...

Page 597: ... an external grandmaster clock The Best Master Clock Algorithm BMCA determines the port s role based on its determination of which is the best available grandmaster clock Only one slave port can exist in a single PTP 820 node at any one time 8 Optionally in the Local Priority field select a value between 1 255 The default value is 128 The Local Priority value is taken into account when two identic...

Page 598: ...urce 14 Add a radio interface as a Sync source with lower priority than the port receiving synchronization from the customer side See Adding a Sync Source 15 On the remote side of the radio link add the radio interface facing the local device as a Sync source with Sync Interface Priority 1 See Adding a Sync Source 16 On the remote side of the radio link if there is an Ethernet port conveying synch...

Page 599: ...xceeded packets from this grandmaster candidate are discarded and the grandmaster will not be eligible for use by the Boundary Clock node 6 To implement your changes click Apply The following Table lists and describes the read only Boundary Clock default parameters Table 115 Boundary Clock Default Parameters Parameter Definition Two Step Indicates whether the Boundary Clock node is operating in tw...

Page 600: ... a maximum number of steps in the Clock Default Parameters page See Displaying and Setting the Boundary Clock Default Parameters Offset from Master Nanoseconds The time difference between the master clock and the local slave clock in ns Mean Path Delay Nanoseconds The mean propagation time for the link between the master and the local slave in ns Master Clock Identity The clock identity of the cur...

Page 601: ...ap 61 Indicates that the last minute of the current UTC day contains 61 seconds Time Traceable Traceability to the primary time reference Frequency Traceable Traceability to the primary frequency reference PTP Timescale Indicates whether the clock time scale of the grandmaster clock is PTP Time Source The source of the time used by the grandmaster clock Displaying the Boundary Clock Port Parameter...

Page 602: ...ways displays 1 Version Number Always displays 2 Displaying the Boundary Clock Port Statistics To display the Boundary Clock port statistics 1 Select Sync 1588 Boundary Clock Port Statistics The 1588 Boundary Clock Port Statistics page opens Figure 354 1588 Boundary Clock Port Statistics Page To display the statistics for a specific port in a separate page click View To clear the statistics for a ...

Page 603: ... Received The number of Follow Up messages that have been received by the port Delay Response Received The number of Delay Response messages that have been received by the port Delay Request Received The number of Delay Request messages that have been received by the port Dropped Messages The number of dropped messages Lost Messages The number of lost messages Disabling 1588 PTP To disable 1588 PT...

Page 604: ...ation Configuring 1588 Boundary Clock phn 3965_006v002 Page 10 21 Note Disabling 1588 PTP disables both Transparent Clock and Boundary Clock and can drastically affect time synchronization performance in the entire network ...

Page 605: ...ion includes Configuring the General Access Control Parameters Configuring the Password Security Parameters Configuring the Session Timeout Configuring Users Configuring RADIUS Configuring X 509 CSR Certificates Blocking Telnet Access Uploading the Security Log Uploading the Configuration Log Related topics Changing Your Password Operating in FIPS Mode ...

Page 606: ...er blocking If a user attempts to login to the system with incorrect credentials this number of times consecutively the user will temporarily be prevented from logging into the system for the time period defined in the Blocking period field Valid values are 1 10 The default value is 3 3 In the Blocking period Minutes field enter the length of time in minutes that a user is prevented from logging i...

Page 607: ...Page 11 3 1 Select Platform Security Access Control User Accounts The Access Control User Accounts page opens Figure 361 2 Select the user and click Edit The Access Control User Accounts Edit page opens Figure 356 Access Control User Accounts Edit Page 3 In the Blocked field select No 4 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 608: ...f the following character types lower case letters upper case letters digits and special characters For purposes of meeting this requirement upper case letters at the beginning of the password and digits at the end of the password are not counted o A password cannot be repeated within five changes in password 3 In the Password change for first login field select Yes or No When Yes is selected the ...

Page 609: ...rm any activity on the system for the period of time defined as the session timeout the user session times out and you will have to log in to the system again To modify the session timeout 1 Select Platform Security Protocols Control The Protocols Control page opens Figure 358 Protocols Control Page 2 In the Session timeout Minutes field select a session timeout in minutes from 1 to 60 3 Click App...

Page 610: ... system parameters are divided into the following functional groups Security Management Radio TDM Ethernet Synchronization A user profile defines the permitted access level per functionality group For each functionality group the access level is defined separately for read and write operations The following access levels can be assigned None No access to this functional group Normal The user has a...

Page 611: ...ers phn 3965_006v002 Page 11 7 To add a user profile 1 Select Platform Security Access Control User Profiles The Access Control User Profiles page opens Figure 359 Access Control User Profiles Page 2 Click Add The Access Control User Profiles Add page opens ...

Page 612: ...s assigned 4 In the Permitted access channels row select the access channels the user will be permitted to use to access the system 5 For each functionality group select one of these options for write level and read level All users with this profile will be assigned these access levels o None o Normal o Advanced 6 Click Apply then Close To view a user profile click next to the profile you want to ...

Page 613: ...p to 2 000 users Each user has a user name password and user profile The user profile defines a set of read and write permission levels per functionality group See Configuring User Profiles To add a new user 1 Select Platform Security Access Control User Accounts The Access Control User Accounts page opens Figure 361 Access Control User Accounts Page 2 Click Add The Access Control User Profiles Ad...

Page 614: ... A password cannot be repeated within five changes in password 6 In the Blocked field you can block or unblock the user Selecting Yes blocks the user You can use this option to block a user temporarily without deleting the user from the system If you set this option to Yes while the user is logged into the system the user will be automatically logged out of the system within 30 seconds Note Users ...

Page 615: ... Users phn 3965_006v002 Page 11 11 To edit a user s account details select the user and click Edit You can edit all of the user account parameters except the User name and password To add a user click Add To delete a user select the user and click Delete ...

Page 616: ...mpting to log into the system from any access channel CLI WEB NMS is not authenticated locally Instead the user s credentials are sent to a centralized standard RADIUS server which indicates to the PTP 820G or PTP 820F whether the user is known and which privilege is to be given to the user The following RADIUS servers are supported FreeRADIUS RADIUS on Windows Server IAS o Windows Server 2008 You...

Page 617: ...re the RADIUS server attributes 1 Select Platform Security Access Control Radius Radius Configuration The Radius Configuration page opens Figure 363 2 In the Radius Configuration table select the line that corresponds to the RADIUS server you want to configure o Select Server ID 1 to configure the Primary Radius server o Select Server ID 2 to configure the Secondary Radius server 3 Click Edit The ...

Page 618: ... password between the RADIUS server and the RADIUS client The string must be between 22 and 128 characters long 9 Click Apply then Close In addition to the configurable parameters described above the Radius Configuration page displays the following information for each RADIUS server Server Id The server ID of the Radius server o 1 The primary Radius server o 2 The secondary Radius server Connectiv...

Page 619: ... o The Access Channels column displays the access channels the user is allowed to use to access the unit o The User Instances column displays the number of open sessions the user currently has To view the user s authorized access levels click next to the user name The page refreshes and displays the additional access level information ...

Page 620: ...re a Win2008 RADIUS server and a Linux FreeRADIUS server to work with a PTP 820 For the sake of simplicity the subsections describe how to create three users a Advanced user with Advanced read write permissions a Normal user with regular read write permissions and a Viewer user with no read write permissions Configuring a Win 2008 RADIUS Server The following sub sections describe how to configure ...

Page 621: ...Chapter 11 Access Management and Security Configuring RADIUS phn 3965_006v002 Page 11 17 Figure 367 Server Manager Creating User Groups 2 Create three users o u1 o u2 o u3 ...

Page 622: ... Radius_Advanced o Attach u2 to Radius_Normal o Attach u3 to Radius_Viewer Step 2 Creating a RADIUS Client Define the PTP 820 device as a RADIUS client as follows 1 In the Server Manager navigate to Roles Network Policy and Access Services NPS Local RADIUS Clients and Servers RADIUS Clients 2 Right click RADIUS Clients and select New RADIUS Client The New RADIUS Client window appears ...

Page 623: ...ent check box ii Enter a descriptive Friendly name for the device such as PTP 820X iii Enter the device IP Address iv Select RADIUS Standard as the Vendor name v In the Shared Secret section select Manual and enter a Shared secret then enter it again in Confirm shared secret Note down the secret because you will need to enter the same value in the Secret field of the Radius Configuration Edit page...

Page 624: ...avigate to Roles Network Policy and Access Service NPS Local Policies Network Policies 2 Right click Network Policies and select New The New Network Policy wizard appears 3 In the specify Network Policy Name and Connection Type give the policy a descriptive name indicating whether it is a policy for the Advanced the Normal or the Viewer group Figure 370 Create Network Policy Specify Name and Conne...

Page 625: ...cy Select Condition 7 In the User Groups window that appears click Add Groups 8 In the Select Group window that appears click Advanced 9 In the Select Group window that appears click Find Now to list all groups and then select the appropriate group from the list Radius_Advanced Radius_Normal or Radius_Viewer 10 Click OK ...

Page 626: ...iguring RADIUS phn 3965_006v002 Page 11 22 Figure 372 Create Network Policy User Group added to Policy s Conditions 11 Click OK to save settings 12 Click Next 13 In the Specify Access Permission window that appears select the Access Granted option ...

Page 627: ...ing RADIUS phn 3965_006v002 Page 11 23 Figure 373 Create Network Policy Specifying Access Permission 14 Click Next 15 In the Configure Authentication Methods window that appears make sure only the Unencrypted Authentication PAP SPAP option is selected ...

Page 628: ...965_006v002 Page 11 24 Figure 374 Create Network Policy Configuring Authentication Methods 16 In the query window that appears click No Figure 375 Create Network Policy Insecure Authentication Method Query 17 In the Configure Constraints window that appears click Next ...

Page 629: ...urity Configuring RADIUS phn 3965_006v002 Page 11 25 Figure 376 Create Network Policy Configuring Constraints 18 In the Configure Settings window that appears i Remove all Standard RADIUS attributes Make sure the Attributes table is empty ...

Page 630: ...006v002 Page 11 26 Figure 377 Create Network Policy Configuring Settings ii Select the Vendor Specific checkbox and click Add under the Attributes table 19 In the Add Vendor Specific Attribute window that appears i Select Custom in the Vendor drop down field ii Click Add ...

Page 631: ...Page 11 27 Figure 378 Create Network Policy Adding Vendor Specific Attributes 20 In the Attribute Information window that appears click Add Figure 379 Create Network Policy Selecting to Add Attribute Information 21 In the Vendor Specific Attribute Information window that appears ...

Page 632: ...field These twelve attributes define the Read access level None Regular or Advanced and the Write access level None Regular or Advanced for each of the six functional groups Ethernet Management Radio Security Sync TDM Therefore in the Attribute value field enter the value corresponding to the access level you wish to permit to members of the group whose policy you are configuring where 2 Advanced ...

Page 633: ...ribute defines the access channel s permitted to members of the group whose policy you are configuring The Attribute value is the sum of the values corresponding to the access channels you wish to permit where the value for each access channel is o none 0 o serial 1 o telnet 2 o ssh 4 o web 8 o nms 16 o snmp 32 o snmpV3 64 Thus for example enter 127 to allow access from all channels Serial Telnet ...

Page 634: ...from all channels Figure 382 Create Network Policy Example of Vendor Specific Attribute Configuration 24 Close all opened windows and click Next 25 In the Completing New Network Policy window click Finish 26 Reset the Network Policy Server NPS by stopping and starting the NPS service as follows i Right click the NPS Local node and select Stop NPS Service ii Right click the NPS Local node and selec...

Page 635: ... etc raddb users etc raddb clients conf usr share freeradius dictionary cambium Step 1 Creating Users This step describes how to create the following three users u1 with advanced read write privileges password 1111 u2 with normal read write privileges password 2222 u3 with no read write privileges password 3333 To create these RADIUS users 1 Add the users in the etc raddb users file using any edit...

Page 636: ...u1accesschannel fall through yes user2 regular privileges u2 auth type local Cleartext Password 2222 security ro regular security wo regular mng ro regular mng wo regular radio ro regular radio wo regular tdm ro regular tdm wo regular eth ro regular eth wo regular sync ro regular sync wo regular access_channel u2accesschannel fall through yes user3 no privilege viewer u3 auth type local Cleartext ...

Page 637: ...snmp 32 snmpV3 64 For example The value 127 denotes permission to access the device from all channels Serial Telnet SSH Web NMS SNMP SNMPv3 The value 24 indicates permission to access the device only from the Web NMS channels To define each user s access channels 1 In the usr share freeradius dictionary cambium file configure the values of the access channels according to the following example acc...

Page 638: ...te down the secret because you will need to enter the same value in the Secret field of the Radius Configuration Edit page Figure 364 o The shortname is not mandatory but should be added and should be different for each RADIUS client 2 Save the changes to the etc raddb clients conf file Step 4 Restarting the RADIUS client After configuring all of the above restart the RADIUS process To restart the...

Page 639: ... to the PTP 820G or PTP 820F and install the certificate See Downloading a Certificate 3 Enable HTTPS This must be performed via CLI See Enabling HTTPS CLI When uploading a CSR and downloading a certificate the PTP 820G or PTP 820F functions as an SFTP client You must install SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to perform the upload or download For details see Configuring the In...

Page 640: ...hat handles the certificate 5 In the Locality field enter the city in which the organization is legally located 6 In the State field enter the state province or region in which the organization is located Do not abbreviate 7 In the Country field enter the two letter ISO abbreviation for your country e g US 8 In the Email field enter an e mail address that can be used to contact your organization 9...

Page 641: ...are using as the SFTP server in the Server IP address field See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications 17 If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6 enter the IPv6 address of the PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPv6 address field See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications 18 Click Apply then Close to save the FTP pa...

Page 642: ...e opens Figure 386 Security Certification Download and Install Page 2 Click FTP Parameters to display FTP Parameters page Figure 387 FTP Parameters Page Security Certificate Download Install 3 In the Username field enter the user name you configured in the SFTP server 4 In the Password field enter the password you configured in the SFTP server If you did not configure a password for your SFTP user...

Page 643: ...ed to be IPv4 enter the IPv4 address of the PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPV4 address field See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications 8 If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6 enter the IPv6 address of the PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPv6 address field See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiati...

Page 644: ...ock telnet access to the unit By default telnet access is not blocked To block telnet access 1 Select Platform Security Protocols Control The Protocols Control page opens Figure 388 Protocols Control Page 2 In the Telnet Admin field select Disable to block telnet access By default telnet access is enabled Enable 3 Click Apply ...

Page 645: ...og the PTP 820G or PTP 820F functions as an FTP or SFTP client You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to perform the import or export For details see Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP To upload the security log 1 Install and configure an FTP server on the PC or laptop you are using to perform the upload See Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP...

Page 646: ...ick FTP Parameters to display FTP Parameters page Figure 390 FTP Parameters Page Security Upload Page 4 In the Username field enter the user name you configured in the FTP server 5 In the Password field enter the password you configured in the FTP server If you did not configure a password for your FTP user simply leave this field blank ...

Page 647: ...hich you are uploading the files Enter the path relative to the FTP user s home directory not the absolute path To leave the path blank enter 9 In the File name field enter the name you want to give to the exported security log 10 Click Apply then Closeto save the FTP parameters and return to the Security Log Upload page 11 Click Upload The upload begins The File transfer operation status field di...

Page 648: ...en uploading the configuration log the PTP 820G or PTP 820F functions as an FTP or SFTP client You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to perform the upload For details see Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP To upload the configuration log 1 Install and configure an FTP server on the PC or laptop you are using to perform the upload See Configuring...

Page 649: ...ation Log phn 3965_006v002 Page 11 45 Figure 391 Configuration Log Upload Page 3 Click FTP Parameters to display FTP Parameters page Figure 392 FTP Parameters Page Configuration Log Upload 4 In the Username field enter the user name you configured in the FTP server ...

Page 650: ... files Enter the path relative to the FTP user s home directory not the absolute path To leave the path blank enter 9 In the File name field enter the name you want to give to the exported configuration log Note The directory path and fie name together cannot be more than If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4 236 characters If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6 220 characte...

Page 651: ...purposes can be configured using the CLI See Working in CW Mode Single or Dual Tone CLI Related topics Configuring Trap Managers Alarms List Note You can configure a wait time of up to 120 seconds after an alarm is cleared in the system before the alarm is actually reported as being cleared This prevents traps flooding the NMS in the event that some external condition causes the alarm to be raised...

Page 652: ...e Current Alarms page displays current alarms in the unit Each row in the Current Alarms table describes an alarm and provides basic information about the alarm For a description of the information provided in the Current Alarms page see Table 119 Figure 393 Current Alarms Page 2 To view more detailed information about an alarm click at the beginning of the row or select the alarm and click View F...

Page 653: ...e Alarm Configuration page See Editing Alarm Text and Severity Description A system defined description of the alarm User Text Additional text that has been added to the system defined description of the alarm by users Note You can add user text to alarms in the Alarm Configuration page See Editing Alarm Text and Severity Origin The module that generated the alarm Probable Cause This field only ap...

Page 654: ...Select Faults Alarm Statistics The Alarm Statistics page opens Figure 395 Alarm Statistics Page The Alarm Statistics page displays the number of current alarms per severity level for each module interface and virtual interface such as Multi Carrier ABC groups in the unit Only modules and interfaces for which one or more alarms are currently raised are listed in the Alarm Statistics page ...

Page 655: ... Table 120 Event Log Information Parameter Definition Time The date and time the event was triggered Sequence Number A unique sequence number assigned to the event by the system Severity The severity of the event In the Event Log table the severity is indicated by a symbol You can display a textual description of the severity by holding the cursor over the symbol Note You can edit the severity of ...

Page 656: ...002 Page 12 6 Parameter Definition User Text Additional text that has been added to the system defined description of the event by users Note You can add user text to events in the Alarm Configuration page See Editing Alarm Text and Severity Origin The module that generated the event ...

Page 657: ... Default Values Displaying Alarm Information To view the list of alarms defined in the system 1 Select Faults Alarm Configuration The Alarm Configuration page opens For a description of the information provided in the Alarm Configuration page see Table 121 Alarm Configuration Page Parameters Figure 397 Alarm Configuration Page Table 121 Alarm Configuration Page Parameters Parameter Definition Sequ...

Page 658: ...ctions for an Alarm Type Most alarm types include a system defined probable cause and suggested corrective actions To view an alarm type s probable cause and corrective actions click on the left side of the alarm type s row in the Alarm Configuration page The Probable Cause and Corrective Actions appear underneath the alarm type s row as shown below If there is no that means no Probable Cause and ...

Page 659: ... 12 9 Figure 399 Alarm Configuration Edit Page 3 Modify the Severity and or Additional Text fields 4 Click Apply then Close Setting Alarms to their Default Values To set all alarms to their default severity levels and text descriptions click Set All to Default in the Alarm Configuration page Figure 397 ...

Page 660: ...shows the pin outs for the external alarms interface Table 122 External Alarms Interface Pin Outs Pin Number Description 1 External Input Alarm 1 2 External Input Alarm 2 3 External Input Alarm 3 4 External Input Alarm 4 5 External Input Alarm 5 6 Relay 1 normally closed pin 7 Relay 1 common pin 8 Relay 1 normally open pin 9 GND Configuring Input Alarms To enable and configure the input alarms 1 S...

Page 661: ... Page 12 11 Figure 400 External Alarms Input Page 2 Select the alarm input you want to configure 3 Click Edit The External Alarms Input Edit page opens Figure 401 External Alarms Input Edit Page 4 In the Admin field select Enable to enable the alarm input or Disable to disable the alarm input ...

Page 662: ...d Masking Undervoltage Alarms Some hardware models include dual power interfaces for power redundancy If you are only using one feed in a dual feed configuration it is recommended to mask the unused feed in order to prevent an unnecessary undervoltage alarm You can also configure undervoltage and overvoltage alarm thresholds The default thresholds for PTP 820F PTP 820G are Undervoltage Raise Thres...

Page 663: ...oltage alarm for the power feed on the left Mask undervoltage alarm on 2nd DC power feed Select Enable to mask the undervoltage alarm for the power feed on the right 3 To change the undervoltage and overvoltage alarm thresholds click Edit The Voltage Alarm Configuration Edit page opens Figure 403 Voltage Alarm Configuration Edit Page 4 Select the thresholds you want in the Undervoltage clear thres...

Page 664: ...asured period These PMs are displayed via CLI For instructions see Configuring Voltage Alarm Thresholds and Displaying Voltage Threshold PMs CLI Configuring the Output Alarm To enable and configure the output alarm 1 Select Platform Management External Alarms Output The External Alarms Output page opens Figure External Alarms Output Page 2 In the Admin field select enable to enable the output alar...

Page 665: ...ng External Alarms phn 3965_006v002 Page 12 15 o Environmental o All groups Note In the current release no alarms belong to the Quality of Service and Environmental groups For a list of alarms and their assigned groups see Alarms List 4 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 666: ...r SFTP Note For troubleshooting it is important that an updated configuration file be included in User Info files that are sent to customer support To ensure that an up to date configuration file is included it is recommended to back up the unit s configuration before generating the Unit Info file To generate and upload a Unit Information file 1 Install and configure an FTP server on the PC or lap...

Page 667: ... file The following fields display the status of the file creation process o Unit Info File Creation Status Displays the file creation status You must wait until the status is Success to upload the file Possible values are o Ready The default value which appears when no file is being created o Generating File The file is being generated o Success The file has been successfully created You may now ...

Page 668: ...cs This section includes Performing Radio Loopback Performing Ethernet Loopback Performing TDM Diagnostics Configuring Service OAM SOAM Fault Management FM Performing Radio Loopback To perform loopback on a radio 1 Select Radio Diagnostics Loopback The Radio Loopbacks page opens Figure 405 Radio Loopbacks Page PTP 820F ...

Page 669: ...perform loopback directly on a Multi Carrier ABC group To perform traffic level diagnostics on a Multi Carrier ABC group the loopback must be activated for all members of the group Radio level diagnostics can still be performed on individual members of the group Figure 407 Radio Loopbacks Edit Page 3 In the Loopback timeout minutes field enter the timeout in minutes for automatic termination of th...

Page 670: ... a LAG When Ethernet loopback is enabled on an interface the system loops back all packets ingressing the interface This enables loopbacks to be performed over the link from other points in the network To perform Ethernet loopback 1 Select Ethernet Interfaces Logical Interfaces The Logical Interfaces page opens Figure 214 2 Select an interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and c...

Page 671: ...al interface or Disable to disable Ethernet loopback on the logical interface 4 In the Ethernet loopback duration sec field enter the loopback duration time in seconds 5 In the Swap MAC address admin field select whether to swap DA and SA MAC addresses during the loopback Swapping addresses prevents Ethernet loops from occurring It is recommended to enable MAC address swapping if LLDP is enabled 6...

Page 672: ...ct TDM Diagnostics PDH Loopback The PDH Loopback page opens Figure 409 PDH Loopback Page 2 In the Select a slot field at the top of the PDH Loopback page select the slot with the TDM card on which you want to run the loopback 3 In the TDM Loopback Timeout field specify the number of minutes before timing out a loopback operation 4 Click Apply to save the settings 5 For each interface select the in...

Page 673: ...oting Performing Diagnostics phn 3965_006v002 Page 12 23 Figure 410 PDH Loopback Edit Page 6 In the Loopback type field select the type of loopback to run on the selected interface o None o Towards Line o Towards System 7 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 674: ...g multiple LANs including LANs other than IEEE 802 3 media Y 1731 Ethernet FM Fault Management consists of three protocols that operate together to aid in fault management Continuity check Link trace Loopback Note Link trace are planned for future release PTP 820G and PTP 820F utilizes these protocols to maintain smooth system operation and non stop data flow Note Support for IEEE 802 1ag is plann...

Page 675: ...he peer MEP is defined and identify network failures MIP MEG Intermediate Points Similar to MEPs but located inside the MEG and can only respond to not initiate CCM messages CCM Continuity Check Message MEPs in the network exchange CCMs with their peers at defined intervals This enables each MEP to detect loss of connectivity or failure in the remote MEP Configuring MDs In the current release you ...

Page 676: ...e nested the encompassing domain must have a higher level than the domain it encloses The maintenance level is carried in all CFM frames that relate to that domain The MD Level must be the same on both sides of the link 6 Click Apply then Close The MHF MIP Creation field displays the type of MHF format included in the CCMs sent in this MD in the current release this is MHF Default The Sender TLV C...

Page 677: ...413 SOAM MA MEG Page 2 Click Add MEG The SOAM MA MEG Add page opens Figure 414 SOAM MA MEG Add Page 3 Configure the fields described in Table 123 4 Click Apply then Close To edit a MEG select the MEG and click Edit The SOAM MA MEG Edit page opens Only the CCM Inteval and MIP Creation fields can be edited Table 124 describes the status read only fields in the SOAM MA MEG Component table ...

Page 678: ...Chapter 12 Alarm Management and Troubleshooting Performing Diagnostics phn 3965_006v002 Page 12 28 ...

Page 679: ...ween OAM frames belonging to nested MEGs of customers providers and operators The default MEG level assignment among customer provider and operator roles is The customer role is assigned MEG levels 6 and 7 The provider role is assigned MEG levels 3 through 5 The operator role is assigned MEG levels 0 through 2 The default MEG level assignment can be changed via a mutual agreement among customer pr...

Page 680: ... in the CCM frame indicating the operational status of the interface on which the transmitting MEP is configured Up or Down MEP List Lists all local and remote MEPs that have been defined for the MEG Configuring MEPs Each MEP is attached to a service point in an Ethernet service The service and service point must be configured before you configure the MEP See Configuring Ethernet Service s Each ME...

Page 681: ...002 Page 12 31 d Adding Local and Remote MEPs To add a MEP to the MA MEG 1 In the SOAM MA MEG page select a MA MEG and click MEP List The MEP List page opens Figure 415 MEP List Page 2 Click Add The Add MEP page opens Figure 416 Add MEP Page 3 In the MEP ID field enter a MEP ID 1 8191 ...

Page 682: ...EP The SOAM MEP page opens Table 125 lists and describes the parameters displayed in the SOAM MEP page Figure 417 SOAM MEP Page Note To display MEPs belonging to a specific MEG select the MEG in the Filter by MA MEG field near the top of the SOAM MEP page To display all MEPs configured for the unit select All 2 Click Add Page 1 of the Add SOAM MEP wizard opens Figure 418 Add SOAM MEP Wizard Page 1...

Page 683: ...he Up direction is not supported 6 In the MEP ID field select from a list of MEPs you have added to the selected MEG 7 In the Service Point field select the service point on which you want to place the MEP 8 Click Finish The Add Soam MEP wizard displays the parameters you have selected Figure 420 Add SOAM MEP Wizard Summary Page 9 Verify that you want to submit the displayed parameters and click S...

Page 684: ...cleared transient state Connectivity Status Indicates whether a MEP can exchange PDU CCM Loopback LTR with its remote MEP A MEP with some defect or an inactive MEP cannot exchange PDUs Possible values are inactive At least one of the remote MEPs is in rMEPFailed status not discovered active All remote MEPs are discovered correctly and have an rMEPOk status MEP Active Indicates whether the MEP is e...

Page 685: ...Chapter 12 Alarm Management and Troubleshooting Performing Diagnostics phn 3965_006v002 Page 12 35 2 Click Edit The SOAM MEP Edit page opens ...

Page 686: ...02 Page 12 36 Figure 421 SOAM MEP Edit Page 3 In the MEP Active field select True 4 In the MEP CCM TX Enable field select True 5 In the CCM and LTM Priority field select the p bit that will be include in CCMs sent by this MEP 0 to 7 It is recommended to select 7 6 Click Apply then Close ...

Page 687: ...nal state of the remote MEP RMEP Last rx CCM MAC Address The MAC Address of the interface on which the remote MEP is located RMEP Last CCM OK or Fail Timestamp The timestamp marked by the remote MEP indicated the most recent CCM OK or failure it recorded If none this field indicates the amount of time since SOAM was activated RMEP Last rx CCM RDI Indication Displays the state of the RDI Remote Def...

Page 688: ...ast CCM cross connect error message received by a specific local MEP 1 Select Ethernet Protocols SOAM MEP The SOAM MEP page opens Figure 417 2 Select a MEP and click Last Invalid CCMS The MEP Last Invalid CCMS page opens Figure 423 MEP Last Invalid CCMS Page The Last RX error CCM message field displays the frame of the last CCM error message received by the MEP The Last RX Xcon fault message field...

Page 689: ...thernet Service However you can create MEGs with the MHF none attribute on the same service on lower levels then the MEG with the MHF default attribute MEPs cannot be attached to a MEG with the MHF default attribute The Ethernet service and service points must already be defined before creating the MEG with the MHF default attribute in order for MIPs to be created on the service points To configur...

Page 690: ...rom the following options o MEP ID If you select MEP ID you must enter the MEP ID of the MEP on the interface to which you want to perform the loopback in the Loopback Messages Destination MEP ID field If you select MEP ID the loopback will only be activated if CCMs have already been received from the MEP For this reason it is recommended to initiate loopback via MAC address ...

Page 691: ...e selected frame size 7 In the Loopback Messages Priority field select a value 0 7 for the priority bit for tagged frames 8 In the Drop Enable field choose the value of the DEI field for tagged loopback frames True or False The default value is False 9 In the Loopback Messages Data Pattern Type field select the type of data pattern to be sent in an OAM PDU Data TLV Options are All Zeros and All On...

Page 692: ...MS Utilities Performing Diagnostics phn 3965_006v002 Page 13 1 Chapter 13 Web EMS Utilities This section includes Restarting the HTTP Server Calculating an ifIndex Displaying Searching and Saving a list of MIB Entities ...

Page 693: ... To restart the unit s HTTP server 1 Select Utilities Restart HTTP The Restart HTTP page opens Figure 425 Restart HTTP Page 2 Click Restart The system prompts you for confirmation 3 Click OK The HTTP server is restarted and all HTTP sessions are ended After a few seconds the Web EMS prompts you to log in again ...

Page 694: ...e opens Figure 426 ifIndex Calculator Page If you have an ifIndex and you want to determine which hardware item in the unit it represents enter the number in the ifIndex number field and click Calculate Index to name A description of the object appears in the Result field To determine the ifIndex of a hardware item in the unit such as an interface card or slot select the object type in the Functio...

Page 695: ...le Page The MIB Reference Table is customized to the type of PTP 820 product you are using There are two separate versions of the MIB Reference Table PTP 820G F PTP 820C S Note Even though the MIB Reference Table is customized to these three product groups some of the entities listed in the Table may not be relevant to the particular unit you are using This may occur because of activation key rest...

Page 696: ... IP Address CLI Configuring Unit Redundancy for the PTP 820 Split Mount CLI Configuring the Activation Key CLI Setting the Time and Date Optional CLI Enabling the Interfaces Interface Manager CLI Configuring Cascading Interfaces Optional CLI Entering Radio View CLI Unmuting a Radio CLI Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI Configuring the Transmit TX Frequency CLI Configuring the Radio MRMC Script...

Page 697: ...ted CLI Establishing a Connection CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 14 2 Establishing a Connection CLI For instructions on establishing a physical management connection to the unit from your PC or laptop see Establishing a Connection ...

Page 698: ... telnet ip address command from the CMD window of your PC or laptop The default IP address of the unit is 192 168 1 1 Establish a telnet connection to the unit using the default IP address When you have connected to the unit a login prompt appears For example Linux 2 6 34 8 grsec WR4 1 0 0_cgl CE 0 5 localhost 13 44 on Saturday 21 March 2015 login At the prompt enter the default login user name ad...

Page 699: ...te through recent commands Use the key to display a list of useful commands and their definitions At the prompt or at any point in entering a command enter the word help to display a list of available commands If you enter help at the prompt a list of all commands is displayed If you enter help after entering part of a command a list of commands that start with the portion of the command you have ...

Page 700: ...g command in root view root platform security access control password edit own password The system will prompt you to enter your existing password The system will then prompt you to enter the new password If Enforce Password Strength is activated the password must meet the following criteria Password length must be at least eight characters Password must include characters of at least three of the...

Page 701: ...ID 257 The management service is a multipoint service that connects the two local management ports and the network element host CPU into a single service In order to enable in band management you must add at least one service point to the management service in the direction of the remote site or sites from which you want to access the unit for management For instructions on adding service points s...

Page 702: ...ay name name description name Table 127 IP Address IPv4 CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description ipv4 address Dotted decimal format Any valid IPv4 address The IP address for the unit subnet Dotted decimal format Any valid subnet mask The subnet mask for the unit gateway Dotted decimal format Any valid IPv4 address The default gateway for the unit optional name Text String E...

Page 703: ...ns Any valid IPv6 address The default gateway for the unit optional Examples The following command sets the following parameters IPv4 Address 192 168 1 160 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 100 root platform management ip set ipv4 address 192 168 1 160 subnet 255 255 0 0 gateway 192 168 1 100 The following command sets the following parameters IPv6 Address FE80 0000 0000 0000 0202 ...

Page 704: ... Ethernet interface protection See Configuring Ethernet Interface Protection CLI 3 Enable unit redundancy See Enabling Unit Redundancy CLI Configuring Unit Redundancy CLI Before configuring unit redundancy verify that both units have the same hardware part number see Displaying Unit Inventory CLI and the same software version see Displaying Current Software Versions CLI If the units do not have th...

Page 705: ...n operation state is Up and the protection link to mate status is Connected See Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity CLI 13 Enter the following command in root view to copy the configuration of the active unit to the standby unit root platform management protection copy to mate Note While the system is performing the copy to mate operation a temporary loss of management connection will ...

Page 706: ...admin enable The system configures itself for unit redundancy o The system determines which unit is the Active unit based on a number of pre defined criteria o When the system returns online all management must be performed via the Active unit using the IP address you defined for that unit o The IP address you defined for the unit which is now the Standby unit is no longer valid and the management...

Page 707: ...s CLI Configuring the activation key See Configuring the Activation Key CLI For instructions on performing configuration directly on the standby unit see Running Commands in the Standby Unit CLI When configuring MRMC scripts after enabling unit redundancy it should be done in the following order It is important to use this order because if the changes are not performed in the correct order the con...

Page 708: ...tform management protection show lockout status Switchover CLI The following events trigger switchover for unit redundancy according to their priority with the highest priority triggers listed first 1 Loss of active unit 2 Force switch 3 Lockout 4 Radio Loss of Frame LOF on active unit 5 Change request from the remote unit This takes place in the event of radio LOF on both units a change request i...

Page 709: ...redundancy must be disabled in the following order to ensure that management is not lost 1 Disable unit redundancy in the active unit of the remote pair The link remains up and no switchover takes place 2 Change the IP address of the active remote unit 3 Disable all active traffic interfaces on the active remote unit Line interfaces should be disabled first followed by radio interfaces since disab...

Page 710: ...phn 3965_006v002 Page 14 15 Note On some occasions in links with TDM traffic if you disable unit redundancy then re enable unit redundancy later a TDM LIC configuration mismatch alarm may be raised Alarm ID 2002 If this happens you must reset the unit with the alarm then perform copy to mate ...

Page 711: ...to enable features that are not covered by a valid activation key In the event that the activation key enabled capacity and feature set is exceeded an Activation Key Violation alarm occurs and the Web EMS displays a yellow background and an activation key violation warning After a 48 hour grace period all other alarms are hidden until the capacity and features in use are brought within the activat...

Page 712: ... display a list of features that your current activation key supports and usage information about these features enter the following command in root view root platform activation key show usage all To display a list of the radio capacities that your current activation key supports and their usage information enter the following command in root view root platform activation key show usage radio Act...

Page 713: ...Chapter 14 Getting Started CLI Configuring the Activation Key CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 14 18 ...

Page 714: ... powered down for longer the time and date may need to be reconfigured To set the UTC time enter the following command in root view root platform management time services utc set date and time date and time To set the local time offset relative to UTC enter the following command in root view root platform management time services utc set offset hours offset hours offset minutes offset minutes offs...

Page 715: ...nth start date month start date day start date day end date month end date month end date day end date day offset offset Table 130 Daylight Savings Time CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description start date month Number 1 12 The month when Daylight Savings Time begins start date day Number 1 31 The date in the month when Daylight Savings Time begins end date month Number 1 12...

Page 716: ...006v002 Page 14 21 root platform management time services show status Local Time 04 03 2014 03 07 01 UTC date time 04 03 2014 08 07 01 UTC offset hours 5 UTC offset minutes 0 Daylight Saving Time DST settings Start Date month day 3 9 End Date month day 11 1 Offset in hours 1 root ...

Page 717: ... See Configuring the E1 DS1 Parameters CLI Table 131 Interface Configuration CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description interface type Variable ethernet radio management sync stm1oc3 ethernet An Ethernet interface radio A radio interface management A management interface sync A synchronization interface stm1oc3 The STM 1 OC 3interface slot Number 1 Always enter 1 port Number ...

Page 718: ...terface enter the following command in root view root platform management local mngt admin state set enable port mng2 To disable the second management interface enter the following command in root view root platform management local mngt admin state set disable port mng2 To display the status of both management interfaces enter the following command in root view root platform management local mngt...

Page 719: ...nterface belongs to a LAG You cannot set Auto Negotiation to On while the interface is configured as a Cascading interface To configure an interface as a cascading interface go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth 1 2 port cascading set cascading cascading To display whether or not an interface is configured as a cascading interface go to interface view ...

Page 720: ... s view level in the CLI To enter a radio s view level enter the following command in root view root radio slot slot port port The following command enters radio view for radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 The following prompt appears radio 1 1 The following command enters radio view for radio interface 2 root radio slot 1 port 2 The following prompt appears radio 1 2 ...

Page 721: ...isplay the mute status of a radio go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x rf mute show status Table 133 Radio Mute Unmute CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description admin Variable on off Mutes on or unmutes off the radio The following command mutes radio interface 1 radio 1 1 rf mute set admin on The following command unmutes radio interface 2 radio 1 2 rf ...

Page 722: ... rf set tx level tx level To display the maximum transmit TX level of a radio go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x rf show max tx level Table 134 Radio Transmit TX Level CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description tx level Number PTP 820G units 1 to 22 The desired TX signal level TSL in dBm The following command sets the TX level of radio interface 1 to 1...

Page 723: ...escription tx frequency Number Depends on the MRMC script and the unit type The desired TX frequency in KHz and if local remote is set to enable the desired RX frequency of the remote unit local remote Variable enable disable Optional Determines whether to apply the configured TX frequency value to the RX frequency of the remote unit The following command sets the TX frequency of radio interface 1...

Page 724: ...t type acm support acm support Note The list of available scripts reflects activation key enabled features Only scripts within your activation key enabled capacity will be displayed Displaying Available MRMC Scripts CLI To display all scripts that are available for a specific radio carrier in your unit go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x mrmc script show script type script t...

Page 725: ...e symmetrical normal scripts with ACM support for radio interface 1 root radio slot 1 port 1 radio 1 1 mrmc script show script type normal acm support yes Script Script Name ID 1003 mdN_A5656N_145_1003 1004 mdN_A2828N_149_1004 1005 mdN_A2828N_130_1005 1006 mdN_A5656N_129_1006 1007 mdN_A4040N_119_1007 1008 mdN_A0707N_121_1008 1009 mdN_A1414N_113_1009 1010 mdN_A5050N_111_1010 1020 mdN_A1010N_100_102...

Page 726: ...he current MRMC script configuration go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x mrmc show script configuration Table 137 MRMC Script Assignation to Radio Carrier CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description script id Number Depends on available scripts The ID of the script you want to assign to the radio carrier modulation Variable adaptive fixed Determines whet...

Page 727: ...which the system will operate The following command assigns MRMC script ID 1204 with ACM enabled a minimum profile of 3 and a maximum profile of 8 to radio interface 2 radio 1 2 mrmc set acm support script id 1204 modulation adaptive max profile 8 min profile 3 The following command assigns MRMC script ID 1204 with ACM disabled and a maximum profile of 5 to radio interface 1 radio 1 1 mrmc set acm...

Page 728: ...capable of adjusting power on the fly and optimizing the available capacity at every modulation point To enable Adaptive TX Power for a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf adaptive power admin enable To disable Adaptive TX Power for a radio enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf adaptive power admin disable To display whether Adaptive TX Power is enabled en...

Page 729: ... of the RSL threshold alarm enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf rsl degradation set threshold 99 0 The default threshold is 68 dBm To display the current alarm configuration enter the following command in radio view radio x x rf rsl degradation show status The following commands enable the RSL threshold alarm for fixed radio interface 1 and set the threshold to 55 dBm root radio...

Page 730: ...requirements for operating in FIPS mode see Requirements for FIPS Compliance Enabling FIPS Mode CLI To set the unit to operate in FIPS mode enter the following command in root view root platform security fips mode set admin enable To disable FIPS mode enter the following command in root view root platform security fips mode set admin disable Note Changing the FIPS configuration causes a unit reset...

Page 731: ...Chapter 14 Getting Started CLI Operating in FIPS Mode CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 14 36 ...

Page 732: ...965_006v002 Page 15 1 Chapter 15 Configuration Guide CLI This section includes System Configurations CLI Configuring a 1 0 Link CLI Configuring Multi Carrier ABC CLI Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP CLI Configuring XPIC CLI Configuring HSB Radio Protection CLI ...

Page 733: ... in the following radio configurations Note One Multi Carrier ABC group can be configured per unit Table 138 Radio Configuration PTP 820F Configuration Special Requirements Link to Configuration Instructions 1 0 Configuring a 1 0 Link CLI 2 0 Single Polarization Requires Multi Carrier ABC or LAG Configuring Multi Carrier ABC CLI Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP CLI 2 0 Dual Polarization X...

Page 734: ...tegrated E1 DS1 interfaces Two types of TDM services are supported using the same hardware Native TDM trails TDM Pseudowire services enabling interoperability with third party packet PW equipment PTP 820G and PTP 820F also offers hybrid Ethernet and TDM services Hybrid services can utilize either Native TDM or pseudowire PTP 820G and PTP 820F offers a variety of path protection options Table 140 l...

Page 735: ...e a 1 0 link you must perform the following steps 1 Unmute the radio See Unmuting a Radio CLI 2 Configure the radio s TX level See Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI 3 Configure the radio s frequency See Configuring the Transmit TX Frequency CLI 4 Configure the radio s MRMC script See Configuring the Radio MRMC Script s CLI ...

Page 736: ... fading events which cause ACM modulation changes each carrier fluctuates independently with hitless switchovers between modulations increasing capacity over a given bandwidth and maximizing spectrum utilization The result is 100 utilization of radio resources in which traffic load is balanced based on instantaneous radio capacity per carrier One Multi Carrier ABC group that includes both radio in...

Page 737: ...s the interface within the group 3 To set the amount of bandwidth in the Multi Carrier ABC group in kbps reserved for Ethernet traffic enter the following command in Multi Carrier ABC Group view multi carrier abc group id 1 slot 1 high pri ethernet bandwidth set 1 2147483647 Note If you are managing the unit using in band management it is strongly recommended to set this parameter to a value that ...

Page 738: ...d radio carrier The following commands create a Multi Carrier ABC group root multi carrier abc create group group_id 1 multi carrier abc group id 1 attach member slot 2 port 1 channel id 1 multi carrier abc group id 1 attach member slot 2 port 2 channel id 2 multi carrier abc group id 1 exit Removing Members from a Multi Carrier ABC Group CLI To remove members from a Multi Carrier ABC group 1 To r...

Page 739: ... Members from a Multi Carrier ABC Group CLI 3 2 To delete a Multi Carrier ABC group on a PTP 820F enter the following command in root view root multi carrier abc delete group group_id 1 slot 1 type RFU 4 To delete a Multi Carrier ABC group on a PTP 820G enter the following command in root view root multi carrier abc delete group group_id 1 slot 1 ...

Page 740: ... whether or not LACP is enabled on a LAG group go to interface view for the LAG and enter the following command eth group lagx lacp admin show The following commands enable LACP for LAG group 1 root ethernet interfaces group lag1 eth group lag1 lacp admin set enable eth group lag1 Enabling and Disabling the LAG Group Shutdown in case of Degradation Event Option CLI Configuring Enhanced LAG Distrib...

Page 741: ...Manager CLI PTP 820 supports LACP which expands the capabilities of static LAG and provides interoperability with third party equipment that uses LACP LACP improves the communication between LAG members This improves error detection capabilities in situations such as improper LAG configuration or improper cabling It also enables the LAG to detect uni directional failure and remove the link from th...

Page 742: ...the following command eth group lagx port static lag show members The following commands create a LAG with the ID lag2 The LAG includes Ethernet ports 1 2 and 3 root platform if manager set interface type ethernet slot 1 port 1 admin down root platform if manager set interface type ethernet slot 1 port 2 admin down root platform if manager set interface type ethernet slot 1 port 3 admin down root ...

Page 743: ...ove Ethernet port 2 from the LAG root platform if manager set interface type ethernet slot 1 port 2 admin down root ethernet interfaces group lag2 eth group lag2 eth group lag2 port static lag remove member interface eth slot 1 port 2 Configuring LACP CLI To enable LACP on a LAG group go to interface view for the LAG and enter the following command eth group lagx lacp admin set enable To disable L...

Page 744: ...nal the LAG is automatically re opened Note Failure of a port in the LAG also triggers a lag degraded alarm Alarm ID 100 To enable the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option go to interface view for the LAG and enter the following command eth group lagx static lag set lag degrade admin admin enable To disable the LAG group shutdown in case of degradation event option go to interfac...

Page 745: ...ommand eth group lagx static lag set df pattern df 1 10 The following commands set the LAG distribution scheme for LAG group 1 as distribution pattern 3 root ethernet interfaces group lag1 eth group lag1 static lag set df pattern df 3 The default LAG distribution pattern is 1 To display the current LAG distribution scheme go to interface view for the LAG and enter the following command eth group l...

Page 746: ...ed above Displaying LACP Parameters and Statistics CLI You can display the following LACP parameters and statistics LACP Aggregation per LAG LACP Port Status LACP Port Statistics LACP Port Debug Statistics Note PTP 820 does not support any LACP write parameters Displaying LACP Aggregation Status Parameters CLI To display LACP aggregation status parameters go to interface view for the LAG and enter...

Page 747: ...rrent operational value of the Key for the Aggregator Agg MAC Address The individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator Partner System ID The MAC address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this Aggregator Partner System Priority The priority value associated with the Partner s System ID Partner Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the...

Page 748: ...tem ID The MAC Address value that defines the value of the System ID for the system that contains this Aggregation Port Port Priority The priority value assigned to this Aggregation Port Actor State The current operational values of the Actor s state as transmitted by the Actor via LACPDUs Partner State The current values of Actor State in the most recently received LACPDU transmitted by the proto...

Page 749: ...Reason A text string indicating the reason for the most reason change in the state of the Mux machine Partner Oper Port The operational port number assigned to this Aggregation port by the Aggregation port s port Partner Partner Oper System Priority The operational value of priority associated with the Partner s System ID Partner Oper Key The current operational value of the Key for the protocol P...

Page 750: ...CP port statistics Table 143 LACP port statistics Parameter Definition LACPDU RX The number of LACPDUs that this port has received LACPDU TX The number of LACPDUs that this port has transmitted Illegal RX The number of illegal protocol frames that this port has received Unknown RX The number of unknown protocol frames that this port has received ...

Page 751: ...oup CLI Related topics Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs CLI Prerequisites for XPIC CLI ForPTP 820F XPIC requires a MultiCore RFU D For PTP 820G each radio interface must be connected to the same type of RFU Each radio carrier must be assigned the same script The script must be an XPIC script The script must be an XPIC script The letter X XPIC or N Non XPIC in the script na...

Page 752: ... D being used with an PTP 820F root radio xpic create group 1 radio 1 port 1 radio 1 port 2 root radio xpic set group 1 admin enable Table 144 XPIC Configuration CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description Group Number 1 4 The group ID of the XPIC group slot Number 1 port Number 1 2 Theradio carrier you want to add to the XPIC group Performing Antenna Alignment for XPIC CLI 1 ...

Page 753: ...nit should match the RSL of the horizontal carrier of the remote unit within 2dB 7 Check the XPI levels of both carriers on both sides of the link by checking the Modem XPI field of the Radio Parameters page in the Web EMS See Viewing the Radio Status and Settings All four carriers should have approximately the same XPI value Do not adjust the XPI at the remote side of the link as this may cause t...

Page 754: ...ity You can configure the two radio interfaces as a protection group which protects against hardware failure in the RFU The CPU monitors the radio interfaces and initiates switchover upon indication of a hardware or signal failure The radios in a protected pair operate in active and standby mode If there is a failure in the active radio the standby radio switches to active mode Configuring 1 1 HSB...

Page 755: ...in Admin state Disable For instructions see Configuring a Multi Carrier ABC Group CLI 2 Enable protection for the Multi Carrier ABC group by entering the following command in Multi Carrier ABC group view multi carrier abc group id 1 protection set enable 3 Create a 1 1 HSB SD protection group by entering the following command in root view Radio interface 1 will automatically be the active radio ca...

Page 756: ...is up and running its configuration is aligned to the configuration of the other radio This operation has no effect on the source radio To perform a copy to mate command enter the following command in root view root radio protection copy to mate group group source radio radio source port port Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description group Number 1 4 The group ID of the protection group ra...

Page 757: ...HSB protection according to their priority with the highest priority triggers listed first 1 Card missing 2 Lockout 3 Force switch 4 Traffic failures 5 Manual switch To perform a manual switchover use the following command root radio protection manual switch group group For example to perform a manual switchover on group 1 use the following command root radio protection manual switch group 1 To pe...

Page 758: ...ction group 2 root radio protection delete group 2 Deleting an HSB Radio Protection Group with Space Diversity CLI Note Before deleting an HSB radio protection group both members of the group must be unmuted See Unmuting a Radio CLI To delete an HSB radio protection group with space diversity 1 Remove the HSB SD group from the Multi Carrier ABC group See Removing Members from a Multi Carrier ABC G...

Page 759: ...iguring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP CLI Upgrading the Software CLI Backing Up and Restoring Configurations CLI Editing CLI Scripts CLI Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration CLI Performing a Hard Cold Reset CLI Configuring Unit Parameters CLI Configuring NTP CLI Displaying Unit Inventory CLI Related topics Setting the Time and Date Optional CLI Enabling the Interfaces Interfa...

Page 760: ...it will use when initiating communications such as downloading software sending traps pinging or exporting configurations The options are IPv4 or IPv6 To do so enter the following command in root view root platform management ip set ip address family ipv4 ipv6 To show the IP protocol version the unit will use when initiating communications enter the following command in root view root platform man...

Page 761: ...ormat CLI To configure the remote radio s default gateway enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit set default gateway IP ipv4 address To display the remote radio s default gateway enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit show default gateway To set the remote radio s IP Address enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit set ip add...

Page 762: ...6 address To display the remote radio s IP Address enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit show ip address ipv6 To set the remote radio s prefix length enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit set prefix length prefix length To display the remote radio s prefix length enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit show prefix length T...

Page 763: ...Chapter 16 Unit Management CLI Configuring the Remote Unit s IP Address CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 16 5 radio 2 2 remote unit set prefix length 64 ...

Page 764: ...ersion set version To specify the SNMP read and write communities enter the following command in root view root platform security protocols control snmpv1v2 set read community read community write community write community The following commands are relevant for SNMPv3 To block SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 access so that only SNMPv3 access will be enabled enter the following command in root view root platfor...

Page 765: ...ity The community string for the SNMP read community write community Text String Any valid SNMP write community The community string for the SNMP write community set block Variable yes no yes SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 access is blocked no SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 access is not blocked v3 user name Text String A SNMPv3 user name v3 user password Text String Must be at least eight characters A SNMPv3 user password...

Page 766: ...ols control snmp v3 authentication add v3 user name geno v3 user password abcdefgh v3 security mode authPriv v3 encryption mode DES v3 auth algorithm SHA v3 access mode readWrite Displaying the SNMP Settings CLI To display the general SNMP parameters enter the following command in root view root platform security protocols control snmp show all To display the current MIB version used in the system...

Page 767: ... FTP and SFTP enter the following command in root view root platform management file transfer port show These ports are configured globally rather than per specific operation The following sequence of commands displays the current default FTP and SFTP port settings changes the FTP port to 125 and the SFTP port to 126 and shows the new FTP and SFTP port settings root platform management file transf...

Page 768: ...em verifies the validity of the bundle The system also compares the files in the bundle to the files currently installed in the PTP 820G or PTP 820F and its components so that only files that need to be updated are actually downloaded A message is displayed for each file that is actually downloaded Note When downloading an older version all files in the bundle may be downloaded including files tha...

Page 769: ... fpga fw xlic Cleared N A 3 3 main board cold reset gnss management Cleared 1 7 0 19 1 7 0 19 1 7 0 19 main board cold reset gnss mctl Cleared 7 7 0 0 0 42 7 7 0 0 0 42 7 7 0 0 0 42 main board cold reset gnss modem fw Cleared N A 3 40 2 3 40 2 main board cold reset gnss mrmc b scripts Cleared N A 2 24 2 24 main board cold reset gnss mrmc scripts Cleared N A 7 16 7 16 main board cold reset gnss pwc...

Page 770: ... to perform the software upgrade For details see Configuring the Internal Ports for FTP or SFTP CLI To set the file transfer protocol you want to use FTP or SFTP enter the following command root platform software download version protocol ftp sftp If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip address family is IPv4 enter the following command root platform software download channel ...

Page 771: ...Chapter 16 Unit Management CLI Upgrading the Software CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 16 13 root platform software download channel server show root platform software download channel server ipv6 show ...

Page 772: ...te path To leave the path blank enter username Text String The user name for the FTP session The following command configures a download from IP address 192 168 1 242 in the directory current with user name anonymous and password 12345 root platform software download channel server set server ip 192 168 1 242 directory current username anonymous password 12345 Downloading a Software Package CLI To...

Page 773: ...radio port root platform software install rfu version slot slot radio port radio port To view the status of an RFU installation or upgrade procedure enter the following command in root view root platform software rfu status show To display all RFU software versions currently running in the unit enter the following command root platform software show rfu versions Table 151 RFU Software Upgrade CLI ...

Page 774: ...ath the first row of the Installed Versions table The last row of the table indicates that the RFU is running an older version of the software version 2 10_B7 The next step is to perform the update and install commands root platform software update rfu version slot 1 radio port 1 root platform software install rfu version slot 1 radio port 1 To check the status of an update or install operation en...

Page 775: ...Chapter 16 Unit Management CLI Upgrading the Software CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 16 17 Note that in the table above the new version 2 13 is listed for both the IDU and the RFU ...

Page 776: ...tem after restoring the configuration The system provides three restore points to manage different configuration files Each restore point contains a single configuration file Files can be added to the restore points by creating backups of the current system state or by importing them from an external server For example you may want to use one restore point to keep a last good configuration another...

Page 777: ...ommands in root view root platform configuration channel server show root platform configuration channel server ipv6 show Table 152 Configuration Management CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description server ipv4 Dotted decimal format Any valid IPv4 address The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server server ipv6 Eight groups of four hexadecimal digits ...

Page 778: ...ation channel set protocol ftp sftp To set the FTP or SFTP parameters for configuration file import and export enter one of the following commands in root view If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip address family is IPv4 enter the following command root platform configuration channel server set ip address server ipv4 directory directory filename filename username username pa...

Page 779: ... configuration channel server show root platform configuration channel server ipv6 show To save the current configuration as a backup file to one of the restore points enter the following command in root view root platform configuration configuration file add restore point To export a configuration from a restore point to the external server location enter the following command in root view root p...

Page 780: ... or the name you want to give the file you are exporting Note You must add the suffix zip to the file name Otherwise the file import may fail You can export the file using any name then add the suffix zip manually username Text String The user name for the FTP session password Text String The password for the FTP session To configure the FTP settings without a password simply omit this parameter r...

Page 781: ...guration Restoring a saved configuration does not change the unit s FIPS mode or ETSI ANSI mode Note In order to import a configuration file you must configure the FTP channel parameters and restore points as described in Setting the Configuration Management Parameters and Backing up a Configuration File To import a configuration file enter the following command in root view root platform configur...

Page 782: ...ore point 3 The restore point to which the file is imported and from which it is applied to the PTP 820G or PTP 820F The following commands import a configuration file from an external PC or laptop to Restore Point 2 on the PTP 820G or PTP 820F and restore the file to be the system configuration file for the PTP 820G or PTP 820F root platform configuration configuration file import restore point 2...

Page 783: ...p unzip the file Configuration_files zip 4 Edit the cli_script txt file using clish commands one per line 5 Save and close the cli_script txt file and add it back into the Configuration_files zip file 6 Import the updated Configuration_files zip file back into the unit See Importing and Restoring a Configuration File CLI 7 Restore the imported configuration file See Importing and Restoring a Confi...

Page 784: ...t to its factory default configuration while retaining the unit s IP address settings and logs enter the following commands in root view root platform management set to default The following prompt appears WARNING All database and configuration will be lost unit will be restart Are you sure yes no yes At the prompt type yes Note This does not change the unit s IP address or FIPS configuration ...

Page 785: ...002 Page 16 27 Performing a Hard Cold Reset CLI To initiate a hard cold reset on the unit enter the following command in root view root platform management chassis reset The following prompt appears You are about to reset the shelf Are you sure yes no Enter yes The unit is reset ...

Page 786: ...m contact set name John Doe To define the unit s latitude coordinates enter the following command in root view root platform management system latitude set latitude For example root platform management system latitude set 40 To define the unit s longitude coordinates enter the following command in root view root platform management system longitude set longitude For example root platform managemen...

Page 787: ...econds 4615 Unit Temperature Celsius 11 Unit Temperature Fahrenheit 51 Unit Input voltage port 1 volts 45 Unit Input voltage port 2 volts 0 root Table 155 Unit Parameters CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description name Text Up to 64 characters Defines the system parameter specified by the command latitude Text Up to 256 characters Defines the system parameter specified by the...

Page 788: ... NTP configuration enter the following command in root view root platform management ntp show status Table 156 NTP CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description admin Variable enable disable Enter enable or disable to enable or disable the NTP server ntp version Variable v3 v4 Enter the NTP version you want to use NTPv4 provides interoperability with NTP v3 and with SNTP ntp ser...

Page 789: ...following command in root view root platform management inventory show info For example root platform management inventory show info System information card name PTP 820G Subtype 572792847 part number 24 G009 1A serial number E095900075 company name Cambium Networks Ltd product name PTP 820G product description PTP 820G 1RU 2 radio 6 GbE 16 TDM dual feedroot ...

Page 790: ...ring Frame Cut Through CLI Configuring AES 256 Payload Encryption CLI Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics CLI Related topics Entering Radio View CLI Unmuting a Radio CLI Configuring the Transmit TX Level CLI Configuring the Transmit TX Frequency CLI Configuring the Radio MRMC Script s CLI Radio Configurations CLI Configuring a 1 0 Link CLI Configuring Multi Carrier ABC CLI Configuring...

Page 791: ...uency KHz 18186250 RX Frequency KHz 18723750 TX RX Frequency separation KHz 537500 TX Level dBm 15 RX Level dBm 99 IF Combiner Mode main IF Combiner RX Level Diversity dBm 0 IF Combiner RX Level Combined dBm 0 Mute Configuration on Mute status on Temperature Celsius 32 Temperature Fahrenheit 89 Communication status up RSL connector main SW running version C2 16_B5 XPIC mode disable radio 1 1 To di...

Page 792: ...ies show Type RFU C Part Number 1C18020L0B Serial Number F42927471 Band 18 Max bandwidth KHz 5600 Min bandwidth KHz 100 Max RX frequency KHz 19206250 Min RX frequency KHz 18723750 Max TX frequency KHz 18186250 Min TX frequency KHz 17713750 Max Available TX Power dBm 18 Min Available TX Power dBm 0 XPIC Support yes IF Combiner support not supported radio 1 1 ...

Page 793: ...e communication status with the remote radio go to radio view and enter the following command in radio view radio x x remote unit communication status show Displaying the Remote Radio s Link ID and Location CLI To display the remote radio s Link ID go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x remote unit show link id To display the remote radio s slot ID location in the chassis enter...

Page 794: ... radio view and enter the following command radio x x remote unit set tx level tx level To display the transmit TX level of the remote radio go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x remote unit show tx level Table 158 Remote Radio TX Level CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description tx level Number Depends on the frequency and unit type The desired TX signal ...

Page 795: ...Radio Configuration CLI Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 17 6 Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description ref level Number 70 30 The RX reference level for the ATPC mechanism ...

Page 796: ...ncy or radio protection the ATPC override state is propagated to the standby unit or radio in the event of switchover Note When canceling an ATPC override state you should ensure that the underlying problem has been corrected Otherwise ATPC may be overridden again To enable or disable ATPC enter the following command in radio view radio x x atpc set admin admin To display whether or not ATPC is en...

Page 797: ...led ATPC override is not enabled Override ATPC override has been activated To cancel ATPC override enter the following command in radio view radio x x atpc set override cancel Table 160 Radio ATPC CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description admin Variable enable disable Enables or disables ATPC mode rx level Number 70 30 The RX reference level for the ATPC mechanism timeout Nu...

Page 798: ...Configuring ATPC and Override Timer CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 17 9 radio 2 1 atpc set rx level atpc_ref_rx_level 55 radio 1 1 atpc set override timeout 900 radio 1 1 atpc override set admin enable radio 1 1 atpc set override tx level 18 ...

Page 799: ... which the compression mechanism operates from Layer 2 to Layer 4 You must balance the depth of compression against the number of flows in order to ensure maximum efficiency Multi Layer Enhanced compression supports up to 256 flow types Note The Header De Duplication configuration must be identical on both sides of the link To configure Header De Duplication enter the following command in radio vi...

Page 800: ... the Tunnel and T 3 layers for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames Tunnel Layer4 Header De Duplication operates on Layer 2 Layer 3 and on the Tunnel T 3 and T 4 layers for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames The following command enables Layer 2 Header De Duplication on fixed radio interface 1 with a defined flow type of 0x00 root radio slot 1 port 1 radio 1 1 compression header compression set mode...

Page 801: ...clusion rules for Header De Duplication is planned for future release TX frame uncompressed other count Frames on the TX side that were not compressed for reasons other than the use of exclusion rules TX out frame learning count The number of frames that have been used to learn unique data flows Once a particular flow type has been learned subsequent frames with that flow type are compressed by He...

Page 802: ...ven a CoS that is not assigned to the fourth priority queue To enable Frame Cut Through on a radio carrier enter the following command in radio view radio x x cut through mode mode Table 162 Frame Cut Through CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description mode Variable yes no yes Enables Frame Cut Through no Disables Frame Cut Through The following commands enable Frame Cut Throu...

Page 803: ...stem upon user command The master key is a 32 byte symmetric encryption key The same master key must be manually configured on both ends of the encrypted link The session key is a 32 byte symmetric encryption key used to encrypt the actual data Each link uses two session keys one for each direction For each direction the session key is generated by the transmit side unit and propagated automatical...

Page 804: ...ion mode of the radio interface enter the following command in Payload Encryption view Payload Encryption x x payload encryption mode show The following display indicates that payload encryption is enabled on fixed radio interface 2 Traffic Encryption 1 2 payload encryption mode show Admin Mode AES 256 The following display indicates that payload encryption is disabled on fixed radio interface 1 P...

Page 805: ...Enter the following command in Payload Encryption view Payload Encryption x x payload encryption mode admin AES 256 This step will cause the link status to be Down until payload encryption is successfully enabled on the local unit However the RSL measured on the link should remain at an acceptable level To disable payload encryption enter the following command in Payload Encryption view Payload En...

Page 806: ...n the remote and then on the local unit See Switchovers and Lockout CLI 6 Verify that there are no alarms on the link You can set all master keys defined on the unit to zero value To zeroize the master keys enter the following command in root view root payload encryption key zeroize Warning Executing this command on a FIPS enabled unit formats the unit s disk and renders the unit non operational I...

Page 807: ...playing the MSE PMs CLI Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs CLI Displaying ACM PMs CLI Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block PMs CLI To display the general status of the modem go to radio view and enter the following command in radio view radio x x modem show status The following is a sample output of the modem show status command MSE db 99 00 Defective Blocks c...

Page 808: ...l 15min The following is a partial sample output of the framer pm aggregate show interval 15min command radio 1 1 framer pm aggregate show interval 15min Modem BER PM table Interval Integrity ES SES UAS BBE 0 1 0 0 333 0 1 1 0 0 900 0 2 1 0 0 900 0 3 1 0 0 900 0 4 1 0 0 900 0 5 1 0 0 900 0 6 1 0 0 900 0 7 1 0 0 900 0 8 1 0 0 900 0 radio 1 1 To display modem BER PMs in daily intervals go to radio v...

Page 809: ...Chapter 17 Radio Configuration CLI Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 17 20 ...

Page 810: ...ound block errors during the measured interval Displaying BER Level and Configuring the Excessive BER Thresholds CLI To display the current BER level go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x modem show ber The excessive ber parameter determines whether or not excessive BER is propagated as a fault and considered a system event For example if excessive ber is enabled excessive BER...

Page 811: ... the excessive BER threshold enter the following command in radio view radio x x modem excessive ber show threshold Table 165 Excessive BER Threshold Parameters CLI Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description threshold Variable 1e 3 1e 4 1e 5 The level above which an excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link The following command sets the excessive BER threshold f...

Page 812: ... CLI To set the TSL threshold go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x rf pm tsl set threshold 15 Table 167 TSL Thresholds CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description threshold Number 10 34 The TSL threshold dBm The following command sets the TSL threshold to 10 dBm radio 2 1 rf pm tsl set threshold 10 Displaying RSL and TSL Levels CLI You can display the RSL...

Page 813: ...nal Level that was measured during the interval Max RSL dBm The maximum RSL Received Signal Level that was measured during the interval Min TSL dBm The minimum TSL Transmit Signal Level that was measured during the interval Max TSL dBm The maximum TSL Transmit Signal Level that was measured during the interval TSL exceed threshold seconds The number of seconds the measured TSL exceeded the thresho...

Page 814: ...t threshold 1e 7 Configuring the MSE Thresholds and Displaying the MSE PMs CLI To configure the MSE Mean Square Error threshold go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x modem set mse exceed threshold threshold To display the currently configured MSE threshold go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x modem show threshold mse exceed Table 170 MSE CLI Parameters Pa...

Page 815: ...1 0 00 0 00 900 9 1 0 00 0 00 900 10 1 0 00 0 00 900 radio 1 1 To display MSE Mean Square Error PMs in daily intervals go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x modem pm mse show interval 24hr The following is sample output of the modem pm mse show interval 24hr command radio 1 1 modem pm mse show interval 24hr Modem MSE PM Table Interval Integrity Min MSE dB Max MSE dB Exceed thr...

Page 816: ...es the number of seconds the MSE exceeded the MSE PM threshold during the interval Displaying ACM PMs CLI To display ACM PMs in 15 minute intervals enter the following command in radio view radio x x mrmc pm acm show interval 15min The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm acm show interval 15min command radio 1 1 mrmc pm acm show interval 15min MRMC PM Table Interval Integrity Min ...

Page 817: ...cates whether the values received at time and date of the measured interval are reliable 1 in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time Min profile Indicates the minimum ACM profile that was measured during the interval Max profile Indicates the maximum ACM profile that was measured during the interval Min bitrat...

Page 818: ...nd enter the following command radio x x modem pm xpi show interval 15min The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm xpi show interval 15min command radio 1 1 modem pm xpi show interval 15min Modem XPI PM Table Interval Integrity Min XPI dB Max XPI dB XPI below threshold seconds 0 1 55 00 0 00 0 1 1 55 00 0 00 0 2 1 55 00 0 00 0 3 1 55 00 0 00 0 4 1 55 00 0 00 0 5 1 55 00 0 00 0 6 1 ...

Page 819: ...00 0 radio 1 1 Table 174 XPI PMs CLI Parameter Description Interval The number of the interval 1 30 for daily PM reports and 1 96 for 15 minute PM reports Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of the measured interval are reliable 1 in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time Min X...

Page 820: ...hernet Services CLI Setting the MRU Size and the S VLAN Ethertype CLI Configuring Ethernet Interfaces CLI Configuring Automatic State Propagation and Link Loss Forwarding CLI Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics CLI Related topics Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP CLI Quality of Service QoS CLI Ethernet Protocols CLI Performing Ethernet Loopback CLI Ethernet Traffic Interfaces Ethernet Pin ...

Page 821: ... can use the management service for in band management For instructions on configuring in band management see Configuring In Band Management CLI A service point is a logical entity attached to a physical or logical interface Service points define the movement of frames through the service Each service point includes both ingress and egress attributes A Point to Point or Multipoint service can hold...

Page 822: ...meters After defining the service you must add service points to the service in order for the service to carry traffic This section includes Adding a Service CLI Entering Service View CLI Showing Service Details CLI Configuring a Service s Operational State CLI Configuring a Service s CoS Mode and Default CoS CLI Configuring a Service s EVC ID and Description CLI Deleting a Service CLI Adding a Se...

Page 823: ...the NMS for topology management The following command adds a Multipoint service with Service ID 18 root ethernet service add type mp sid 18 admin operational evc id Ring_1 description east_west The following command adds a Point to Point service with Service ID 10 root ethernet service add type p2p sid 10 admin operational evc id Ring_1 description east_west These services are immediately enabled ...

Page 824: ...tailed info show For example service 1 service detailed info show service info service id 1 service type mp service admin operational Maximal MAC address learning entries 131072 default cos 0 cos mode preserve sp cos decision EVC id N A EVC description N A split horizon group disable configured multicast grouping no service points info Service ID Service Type List of SP s Attached to Interface Att...

Page 825: ...f a service go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID service admin set service admin mode Table 177 Ethernet Service Operational State CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description service admin mode Variable Operational reserved The administrative state of the service operational The service is functional reserved The service is disabled un...

Page 826: ...he service To set a service s CoS mode go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID service cos mode set cos mode cos mode If the CoS mode is set to default cos you must define the Default CoS Use the following command to define the Default CoS service SID service default cos set cos cos Table 178 Ethernet Service CoS Mode CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permi...

Page 827: ... EVC ID of a service go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID service evcid set evcid To display a service s EVC ID go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID service evcid show To add or change the EVC description of a service go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID service description...

Page 828: ... EVC description go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID service description show For example the following commands add the EVC ID East_West and the EVC description Line to Radio to Service 10 service 10 service evcid set East_West service 10 service description set Line to Radio Deleting a Service CLI Before deleting a service you must first delete any serv...

Page 829: ...P is equivalent to a UNI in MEF terminology and defines the connection of the user network with its access points SAPs are used for Point to Point and Multipoint traffic services An SNP is equivalent to an NNI or E NNI in MEF terminology and defines the connection between the network elements in the user network SNPs are used for Point to Point and Multipoint traffic services A Pipe service point ...

Page 830: ... is based on a key consisting of The Interface ID of the interface through which the frame entered The frame s C VLAN and or S VLAN tags The Interface Type provides a definitive mapping of each arriving frame to a specific service point in a specific service Since more than one service point may be associated with a single interface frames are assigned to the earliest defined service point in case...

Page 831: ...Q A single S VLAN and C VLAN combination is classified to the service point Table 184 and Table 185 show which service point Interface Type combinations can co exist on the same interface Table 184 Legal Service Point Interface Type Combinations per Interface SAP and SNP SP Type SAP SNP SP Type Attached Interface Type 802 1q Bundle C Bundle S All to One Q in Q 802 1q S Tag SAP 802 1q Yes Yes No No...

Page 832: ...o Yes No No Only 1 MNG SP Allowed Adding a Service Point CLI The command syntax for adding a service point depends on the interface type of the service point The interface type determines which frames enter the service via this service point To add a service point with an All to One interface type go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID sp add sp type sp type...

Page 833: ...e int type bundle s spid sp id interface group interface group slot slot port port outer vlan outer vlan vlan vlan sp name sp name Note In SAP service points use the parameter outer vlan In SP service points use the parameter vlan To add a service point with a Q in Q interface type go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID sp add sp type sp type int type qinq s...

Page 834: ...d for all service point types s tag A single S VLAN is classified to the service point Valid for SNP and MNG service point types bundle c tag A set of multiple C VLANs is classified to the service point Only valid for SAP service point types bundle s tag A single S VLAN and a set of multiple C VLANs are classified to the service point Only valid for SAP service point types qinq A single S VLAN and...

Page 835: ...which the service point is located vlan Number or Variable 1 4094 or Untagged Defines the VLAN classified to the service point This parameter should not be included for service points with an interface type of bundle C tag For instructions on attaching a bundled VLAN refer to Attaching a VLAN Bundle to a Service Point This parameter is also not relevant for Service points with an interface type of...

Page 836: ...ystem from that port is classified to the service point service 37 sp add sp type sap int type all to one spid 10 interface radio slot 1 port 2 sp name all to one The following command adds an SNP service point with Service Point ID 10 to Service 37 with interface type dot1q This service point is located on radio interface 1 VLAN ID 100 is classified to this service point service 37 sp add sp type...

Page 837: ... CLI CoS Preservation and Modification on a Service Point CLI Enabling and Disabling Flooding CLI Enabling and Disabling Broadcast Frames CLI To determine whether frames with a broadcast destination MAC address are allowed to ingress the service via this service point go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID sp broadcast set spid sp id state state Table 187 En...

Page 838: ...rvice Point ID cos mode Variable sp def cos interface decision sp def cos The service point re defines the CoS of frames that pass through the service point according to the Default CoS below This decision can be overwritten on the service level interface decision The service point preserves the CoS decision made at the interface level This decision can still be overwritten at the service level If...

Page 839: ...vice SID sp flooding set spid sp id state flooding state Table 190 Service Point Enable Disable Flooding CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description sp id Number 1 32 for P2P and MP services 1 30 for MNG services The Service Point ID state Variable Allow disable Determines whether incoming frames with unknown MAC addresses are forwarded to other service points via flooding The...

Page 840: ...vation CLI CoS and VLAN preservation determines whether the CoS and or VLAN IDs of frames egressing the service via the service point are restored to the values they had when the frame entered the service This section includes Configuring C VLAN CoS Preservation CLI Configuring C VLAN Preservation CLI Configuring S VLAN CoS Preservation CLI ...

Page 841: ...ng the service point enable the C VLAN CoS value of frames egressing the service point is the same as the value when the frame entered the service disable the C VLAN CoS value of frames egressing the service point is set at whatever value might have been re assigned by the interface service point or service or whatever value results from marking see Configuring Marking CLI The following command en...

Page 842: ...ice disable The C VLAN ID of frames egressing the service point is set at whatever value might have been re assigned by the interface service point or service or whatever value results from marking see Configuring Marking CLI The following command enables C VLAN preservation for Service Point 1 on Service 37 service 37 sp cvlan preservation mode set spid 1 mode enable The following command disable...

Page 843: ... is set at whatever value might have been re assigned by the interface service point or service or whatever value results from marking see Configuring Marking CLI The following command enables S VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1 on Service 37 service 37 sp svlan cos preservation mode set spid 1 mode enable The following command disables S VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1 on Servic...

Page 844: ...rvice point go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SIP sp bundle cvlan attach spid sp id vlan vlan to vlan to vlan To remove a VLAN Bundle from a bundle c tag or bundle s tag service point go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SIP sp bundle cvlan remove spid sp id vlan vlan to vlan to vlan Table 195 VLAN Bundle to Service Poi...

Page 845: ... 1 30 for MNG services The Service Point ID The following command displays the attributes of Service Point 1 in Service 37 service 37 sp service point info show spid 1 Deleting a Service Point CLI You can only delete a service point if no VLAN bundles are attached to the service point This is only relevant if the interface type of the service point is bundle c tag or bundle s tag For more informat...

Page 846: ...ze of the MAC address forwarding table The maximum size of the MAC address forwarding table is configurable per service in granularity of 16 entries When a frame arrives via a specific service point the learning mechanism checks the MAC address forwarding table for the service to which the service point belongs to determine whether that MAC address is known to the service If the MAC address is not...

Page 847: ...put Type Permitted Values Description time Number 15 3825 The global aging time for the MAC address forwarding table in seconds The following command sets the global aging time to 2500 seconds root ethernet service learning ageing time set time 2500 To display the global aging time for the MAC address forwarding table enter the following command root ethernet service learning ageing time show Addi...

Page 848: ...Chapter 18 Ethernet Services and Interfaces CLI Configuring Ethernet Services CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 18 29 service SID service mac learning table del static mac static mac spid sp id ...

Page 849: ...ress Forwarding Table CLI You can display the MAC address forwarding table for an interface a service or for the entire unit To display the MAC address forwarding table for a service go to service view for the service and enter the following command service SID service mac learning table show To display the MAC address forwarding table for an interface go to interface view for the interface and en...

Page 850: ...et spid sp id learning learning Table 200 Enabling MAC Address Learning CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description sp id Number 1 32 for P2P and MP services 1 30 for MNG services The Service point ID learning Variable enable disable Select enable or disable to enable or disable MAC address learning for frames that ingress via the service point When enabled the service point l...

Page 851: ...m Note The MTU is determined by the receiving frame and editing operation on the frame This section includes Configuring the S VLAN Ethertype CLI Configuring the C VLAN Ethertype CLI Configuring the MRU CLI Configuring the S VLAN Ethertype CLI To configure the S VLAN Ethertype enter the following command in root view root ethernet generalcfg ethertype set svlan value ethertype To display the syste...

Page 852: ...the global size in bytes of the Maximum Receive Unit MRU enter the following command in root view root ethernet generalcfg mru set size size To display the system MRU enter the following command in root view root ethernet generalcfg mru show Table 202 Configure MRU CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description size Number 64 to 9612 Defines the global size in bytes of the Maximu...

Page 853: ...the Operational State of the Interfaces in the Unit CLI Viewing Interface Attributes CLI Configuring an Interface s Media Type CLI Configuring an Interface s Speed and Duplex State CLI Configuring an Interface s Auto Negotiation State CLI Configuring an Interface s IFG CLI Configuring an Interface s Preamble CLI Adding a Description for the Interface CLI Related Topics Enabling the Interfaces Inte...

Page 854: ...faces eth slot 1 port 3 The following prompt appears eth type eth 1 3 The exact prompt depends on the type of interface For example Radio interface eth type radio x x Group interface e g 1 1 HSB SD group eth type group x x TDM interface eth type pwe x x For simplicity the examples in the following sections show the prompt for an Ethernet interface Displaying the Operational State of the Interfaces...

Page 855: ...uto Type can only be used when the interface speed is set to 1000 Mbps To configure an Ethernet interface s Media Type go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x media type state set media type Table 204 Interface Media Type CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description media type Variable auto type rj45 sfp Select the physical interf...

Page 856: ...eth 1 1 speed and duplex state set 100fd Note Before performing this command you must verify that the media type attribute is set to rj45 The following command sets GbE 1 to 1000 Mbps full duplex eth type eth 1 1 speed and duplex state set 1000fd Configuring an Interface s Auto Negotiation State CLI To configure an Ethernet interface s auto negotiation state go to interface view for the interface ...

Page 857: ...for Ethernet port 1 eth type eth 1 1 ifg get Configuring an Interface s Preamble CLI Although you can modify an Ethernet interface s preamble it is strongly recommended not to modify the default value of 8 bytes without a thorough understanding of how the modification will impact traffic To configure an Ethernet interface s preamble go to interface view for the interface and enter the following co...

Page 858: ... delete To display an interface s description go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x description show Table 209 Interface Description CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description description Text String Up to 40 characters Adds a text description to the interface The following command adds the description Line to Ethernet port 2 ...

Page 859: ...utomatic State Propagation configuration Configuring Automatic State Propagation to an Ethernet Port CLI To configure propagation of a radio interface failure to an Ethernet port use the following commands root auto state propagation add eth port to radio eth slot eth slot eth port eth port radio slot radio slot radio port radio port To enable automatic state propagation on an Ethernet port and de...

Page 860: ...up are propagated to the local Ethernet interface csf mode admin Variable enable disable Enables or disables Client Signal Failure CSF mode In CSF mode the ASP mechanism does not physically shut down the Controlled Interface when ASP is triggered Instead the ASP mechanism sends a failure indication message a CSF message The CSF message is used to propagate the failure indication to external equipm...

Page 861: ...n the remote carrier are not propagated to Ethernet port 2 CSF mode is disabled root auto state propagation add eth port to protection group eth slot 1 eth port 2 protection group 1 root auto state propagation configure eth port eth slot 1 eth port 2 asp admin enable remote fault trigger admin disable csf mode admin disable The following commands configure and enable automatic state propagation to...

Page 862: ... a physical interface go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x rmon statistics show clear on read clear on read layer 1 layer 1 Table 211 RMON Statistics CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description clear on read Boolean Yes no If you enter yes the statistics are cleared once you display them layer 1 Boolean Yes no yes Statistics a...

Page 863: ...esholds CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description rx layer1 rate thershold Number 0 4294967295 The exceed threshold for port RX PMs in bytes per second tx layer1 rate thershold Number 0 4294967295 The exceed threshold for port TX PMs in bytes per second The following commands bring you to interface view for Ethernet port 1 enable PM gathering and set the thresholds for RX an...

Page 864: ...in 15 minute intervals go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x pm show rx bytes layer2 interval 15min To display Layer 2 RX PMs in bytes per second in 24 hour intervals go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x pm show rx bytes layer2 interval 24hr To display TX packet PMs in 15 minute intervals go to int...

Page 865: ...r intervals displays the date of the interval For 15 minute intervals displays the date and ending time of the interval Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the measured interval are valid An x in the column indicates that the values are not valid for example because of a power surge or power failure that occurred during the interval Peak RX Packets The peak rate of RX pa...

Page 866: ...ackets per second for the measured time interval Peak TX Multicast Packets The peak rate of TX multicast packets per second for the measured time interval Average TX Multicast Packets The average rate of TX multicast packets per second for the measured time interval Peak TX Bytes in Layer1 The peak TX rate in bytes per second for the measured time interval including preamble and IFG Average TX Byt...

Page 867: ...Chapter 18 Ethernet Services and Interfaces CLI Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 18 48 ...

Page 868: ... 3965_006v002 Page 19 1 Chapter 19 Quality of Service QoS CLI This section includes Configuring Classification CLI Configuring Policers Rate Metering CLI Configuring Marking CLI Configuring WRED CLI Configuring Shapers CLI Configuring Scheduling CLI Displaying Egress Statistics CLI ...

Page 869: ...sification is that it provides the ability to zoom in or zoom out enabling classification at higher or lower levels of the hierarchy The nature of each traffic stream defines which level of the hierarchical classifier to apply or whether to use several levels of the classification hierarchy in parallel The hierarchical classifier consists of the following levels Logical interface level classificat...

Page 870: ...ecify a specific CoS and Color for a specific VLAN ID In the case of double tagged frames the match must be with the frame s outer VLAN Permitted values are CoS 0 to 7 and Color Green or Yellow per VLAN ID This is the highest classification priority on the logical interface level and overrides any other classification criteria at the logical interface level To configure CoS and Color override base...

Page 871: ...mmand configures the classification mechanism on GbE 2 to override the CoS and Color values of frames with VLAN ID 20 with a CoS value of 5 and a Color value of Green eth type eth 1 2 vlan cos override set outer vlan id 20 use cos 5 use color green The following command displays the CoS and Color override values for frames that ingress on GbE 1 with S VLAN ID 10 and C VLAN ID 20 eth type eth 1 1 v...

Page 872: ...riority UP bits trust The interface performs QoS and color classification according to UP and CFI DEI bits according to user configurable tables for 802 1q UP bits C VLAN frames or 802 1AD UP bits S VLAN frames VLAN UP bit classification has priority over DSCP and MPLS classification so that if a match is found with the UP bit of the ingressing frame DSCP values and MPLS bits are not considered un...

Page 873: ... 1p 802 1p cfi cfi cos cos color color To display the C VLAN 802 1 UP and CFI bit classification table enter the following command root ethernet qos 802 1q up bits mapping tbl show Table 217 C VLAN 802 1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description 802 1p Number 0 7 The User Priority UP bit to be mapped cfi Number 0 1 The CFI bit to be mapped...

Page 874: ...1 1 1 Yellow 2 0 2 Green 2 1 2 Yellow 3 0 3 Green 3 1 3 Yellow 4 0 4 Green 4 1 4 Yellow 5 0 5 Green 5 1 5 Yellow 6 0 6 Green 6 1 6 Yellow 7 0 7 Green 7 1 7 Yellow To modify the S VLAN 802 1 UP and DEI bit classification table enter the following command root ethernet qos 802 1ad up bits mapping tbl set 802 1p 802 1p dei dei cos cos color color To display the S VLAN 802 1 UP and CFI bit classificat...

Page 875: ...face performs QoS and Color classification according to a user configurable DSCP to CoS and Color classification table 802 1p classification has priority over DSCP Trust Mode so that if a match is found on the 802 1p level DSCP is not considered This section includes Configuring Trust Mode for DSCP Classification CLI Modifying the DSCP Classification Table CLI Configuring Trust Mode for DSCP Class...

Page 876: ...ng classification The following command enables DSCP trust mode for GbE 1 eth type eth 1 1 classification set ip dscp trust The following command disables DSCP trust mode for GbE 1 eth type eth 1 1 classification set ip dscp un trust Modifying the DSCP Classification Table CLI The following table shows the default values for the DSCP classification table Table 221 DSCP Classification Table Default...

Page 877: ...and root ethernet qos dscp mapping tbl set dscp dscp cos cos color color To display the DSCP classification table enter the following command root ethernet qos dscp mapping tbl show Table 222 Modify DSCP Classification Table CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description dscp Number Valid DSCP values Refer to the DSCP column in the table above The DSCP value to be mapped cos Numb...

Page 878: ...ation set mpls mpls To display the trust mode for MPLS classification go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x classification show mpls state Table 223 Trust Mode for MPLS CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description mpls Variable Trust un trust Select the interface s trust mode for MPLS bits trust The interface performs QoS and co...

Page 879: ...meters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description mpls exp Number 0 7 The MPLS EXP bit to be mapped cos Number 0 7 The CoS assigned to frames with the designated MPLS EXP bit value color Variable green yellow The Color assigned to frames with the designated MPLS EXP bit value The following command maps frames with MPLS EXP bit value of 4 to CoS 4 and Yellow color root ethernet qos mpls exp ...

Page 880: ... 7 Enter the default CoS value for frames passing through the interface This value can be overwritten on the service point and service level The following command sets the default CoS for GbE 1 as 7 eth type eth 1 1 classification set default cos 7 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service Point CLI For instruction on configuring ingress path classification on a service point see CoS Pr...

Page 881: ... based on a dual leaky bucket mechanism TrTCM The policers can change a frame s color and CoS settings based on CIR EIR CBS EBS which makes the policer mechanism a key tool for implementing bandwidth profiles and enabling operators to meet strict SLA requirements The output of the policers is a suggested color for the inspected frame Based on this color the queue management mechanism decides wheth...

Page 882: ...ow the rate meter policer treats frames that ingress with a CFI or DEI field set to 1 yellow Options are color aware All frames that ingress with a CFI DEI field set to 1 yellow are treated as EIR frames even if credits remain in the CIR bucket color blind All ingress frames are treated as green regardless of their CFI DEI value A color blind policer discards any former color decisions coupling fl...

Page 883: ...le To display a specific profile enter the following command root ethernet qos rate meter show profile id profile id For example the following command displays the parameters of Rate Meter Profile 50 root ethernet qos rate meter show profile id 50 To display all configured profiles enter the following command root ethernet qos rate meter show profile id all Deleting a Rate Meter Profile CLI You ca...

Page 884: ...admin state profile id profile id To display the current unicast rate meter policer profile for an interface go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x rate meter unicast show configuration To delete the rate meter policer profile for unicast traffic go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x rate meter unica...

Page 885: ...ype eth x x rate meter multicast delete Table 229 Assigning Rate Meter for Multicast Traffic CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description admin state Variable enable disable Enables or disables rate metering on multicast traffic flows from the logical interface profile id Number 1 250 Select from the rate meter profiles defined in the system The following command assigns Rate M...

Page 886: ...pe eth 1 1 rate meter broadcast add capability admin state enable profile id 1 The following command changes the rate meter policer profile for broadcast traffic on GbE 1 to 4 eth type eth 1 1 rate meter broadcast edit admin state enable profile id 4 Assigning a Rate Meter Policer per Ethertype CLI You can define up to three policers per Ethertype value To assign a rate meter policer profile for a...

Page 887: ...250 Select from the policer profiles defined in the system For instructions on defining rate meter policer profiles refer to Configuring Rate Meter Policer Profiles CLI The following commands assign Rate Meter Profiles 1 2 and 3 to Ethertypes 0x8000 0x8100 and 0x9100 respectively on GbE 1 and enable rate metering on the port eth type eth 1 1 rate meter ethertype1 add capability ethertype value 0x8...

Page 888: ...This parameter is very important to users that want to distinguish between Layer 1 and Layer 2 traffic To configure the rate meter policer line compensation value for an interface go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x rate meter compensation value set value To display the rate meter policer line compensation value for an interface go to interface v...

Page 889: ...tics clear on read clear on read layer 1 layer 1 eth type eth x x rate meter ethertype1 show statistics clear on read clear on read layer 1 layer 1 eth type eth x x rate meter ethertype2 show statistics clear on read clear on read layer 1 layer 1 eth type eth x x rate meter ethertype3 show statistics clear on read clear on read layer 1 layer 1 Table 233 Displaying Rate Meter Statistics CLI Paramet...

Page 890: ...lear on read yes layer 1 no eth type eth 1 1 rate meter broadcast show statistics clear on read yes layer 1 no eth type eth 1 1 rate meter ethertype1 show statistics clear on read yes layer 1 no eth type eth 1 1 rate meter ethertype2 show statistics clear on read yes layer 1 no eth type eth 1 1 rate meter ethertype3 show statistics clear on read yes layer 1 no ...

Page 891: ...N tags or DEI bits for S VLAN tags The marking mode attribute in the service point egress attributes determines whether the frame is marked as Green or Yellow according to the calculated color Note The calculated color is sent to the queue manager regardless of whether the marking bit is set Regular marking is only performed when The outer frame is S VLAN and S VLAN CoS preservation is disabled Th...

Page 892: ...ation for the relevant outer VLAN is also set to enable re marking is not performed If mode is set to disable and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN is also set to disable re marking is applied but only according to the values defined for Green frames in the 802 1Q and 802 1AD marking tables For information about configuring CoS Preservation refer to CoS Preservation and Modification on ...

Page 893: ... 1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI bit mapping table enter the following command in root view root ethernet qos 802 1q up bits marking tbl set cos cos color color 802 1p 802 1p cfi cfi To display the 802 1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI bit mapping table enter the following command in root view root ethernet qos 802 1q up bits marking tbl show Table 236 802 1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI Bit Mapping Ta...

Page 894: ...cfi 0 Marking Table for S VLAN UP Bits CLI When marking is performed the following table is used by the marker to decide which CoS and Color to use as the egress CoS and Color bits for S VLAN tagged frames Table 237 802 1ad UP Marking Table S VLAN CoS Color 802 1ad UP Configurable DEI Color Configurable 0 Green 0 0 0 Yellow 0 1 1 Green 1 0 1 Yellow 1 1 2 Green 2 0 2 Yellow 2 1 3 Green 3 0 3 Yellow...

Page 895: ...2 1ad up bits marking tbl show Table 238 802 1ad UP Marking Table S VLAN CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description cos Number 0 7 The CoS value to be mapped color Variable green yellow The Color to be mapped 802 1p Number 0 7 The UP bit value assigned to matching frames dei Number 0 1 The DEI bit value assigned to matching frames The following command marks CoS 5 Yellow to 8...

Page 896: ... should not be applied to traffic A WRED profile can be assigned to each queue The WRED profile assigned to the queue determines whether or not to drop incoming frames according to the occupancy of the queue As the queue occupancy grows the probability of dropping each incoming frame increases as well As a consequence statistically more TCP flows will be restrained before traffic congestion occurs...

Page 897: ... When this value is reached the system begins dropping green frames in the queue green max threshold Number 0 8192 The maximum throughput of green frames for queues with this profile in Kbytes When this value is reached all green frames in the queue are dropped green max drop Number 1 100 The maximum percentage of dropped green frames for queues with this profile yellow min threshold Number 0 8192...

Page 898: ...s yellow max drop 100 Assigning a WRED Profile to a Queue CLI To assign a WRED profile to a queue go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x wred set service bundle id service bundle id cos cos profile id profile id To display the WRED profile assigned to a queue go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x wre...

Page 899: ...signs WRED Profile 2 to the CoS 0 queue in Service Bundle 1 on GbE 1 eth type eth 1 1 wred set service bundle id 1 cos 0 profile id 2 The following command displays the WRED profile assigned to the CoS 0 queue in Service Bundle 1 on Ethernet port 1 eth type eth 1 1 wred show profile id service bundle id 1 cos 0 ...

Page 900: ...ingle leaky bucket queue shaper profiles The CIR value can be set to the following values 16 000 32 000 000 bps granularity of 16 000 bps 32 000 000 131 008 000 bps granularity of 64 000 bps Note You can enter any value within the permitted range Based on the value you enter the software automatically rounds off the setting according to the granularity If you enter a value below the lowest granula...

Page 901: ...e the profile Table 241 Queue Shaper Profiles CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description profile id Number 1 32 A unique ID that identifies the profile cir Number 16000 131008000 The Committed Information Rate CIR assigned to the profile in bps shaper profile name Text String Up to 20 characters A description of the profile The following command creates Queue Shaper 1 named p...

Page 902: ...le 242 Attaching Shaper Profile to Queue CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description service bundle id Number 1 63 Note In the current release only Service Bundle 1 is supported The service bundle to which you are attaching the queue shaper profile cos Number 0 7 The CoS queue ID of the queue to which you want to assign the shaper Queues are numbered according to CoS value adm...

Page 903: ...000 32 000 000 bps with granularity of 16 000 bps 32 000 000 1 000 000 000 bps with granularity of 64 000 bps Note You can enter any value within the permitted range Based on the value you enter the software automatically rounds off the setting according to the granularity If you enter a value below the lowest granular value except 0 the software adjusts the setting to the minimum You can attach o...

Page 904: ... the following command in root view root ethernet qos service bundle shaper profile tbl delete profile id profile id You cannot delete a service bundle shaper profile if it is attached to a service bundle You must first remove the profile from the service bundle You can then delete the profile Table 243 Service Bundle Shaper Profiles CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description...

Page 905: ...and eth type eth x x service bundle shaper show configuration service bundle id service bundle id To remove a service bundle shaper profile from a service bundle go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x service bundle shaper delete service bundle id service bundle id Table 244 Attaching Shaper Profile to Service Bundle CLI Parameters Parameter Input T...

Page 906: ...face view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x shaping compensation value set value To display the egress line compensation value go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x shaping compensation value get Table 245 Egress Line Compensation for Shaping CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description value Num...

Page 907: ...e queues have the same priority and are ready to transmit the scheduler transmits frames from the queues based on a WFQ algorithm that determines the ratio of frames per queue based on a predefined weight assigned to each queue Configuring Queue Priority CLI A priority profile defines the exact order for serving the eight priority queues in a single service bundle When you attach a priority profil...

Page 908: ...e service bundle state is since it is assumed that only high priority traffic will be tunneled via CoS 7 The system supports up to nine interface priority profiles Profiles 1 to 8 are defined by the user while profile 9 is the pre defined read only default interface priority profile Configuring Interface Priority Profiles CLI To define an interface priority profile enter the following command in r...

Page 909: ...rofile CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description profile id Number 1 8 A unique ID to identify the profile cos0 priority Number 1 4 The Green priority for the CoS 0 queue from 4 highest to 1 lowest This priority is applied to Green frames with CoS 0 egressing the service bundle to which the profile is assigned description Text String Up to 20 characters A description of the ...

Page 910: ...ng the service bundle to which the profile is assigned The following command configures a priority profile with Profile ID 1 root ethernet qos port priority profile tbl add profile id 1 cos0 priority 1 description c0_p1 cos1 priority 1 description c1_p1 cos2 priority 1 description c2_p1 cos3 priority 2 description c3_p2 cos4 priority 2 description c4_p2 cos5 priority 3 description c5_p3 cos6 prior...

Page 911: ... Type Permitted Values Description profile id Number 1 9 Enter the ID of one of the configured logical interface priority profiles The following command attaches Interface Priority Profile 3 to GbE 1 eth type eth 1 1 priority set profile id 3 To display which priority profile is attached to an interface go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x port pr...

Page 912: ...isible to users and cannot be edited 0 20 20 1 20 20 2 20 20 3 20 20 4 20 20 5 20 20 6 20 20 7 20 20 You can attach one of the configured interface WFQ profiles to each interface By default the interface is assigned Profile ID 1 the pre defined system profile Configuring a WFQ Profile CLI To define a WFQ profile enter the following command in root view root ethernet qos wfq weight profile tbl add ...

Page 913: ...The relative weight for the CoS 3 queue cos4 weight Number 1 20 The relative weight for the CoS 4 queue cos5 weight Number 1 20 The relative weight for the CoS 5 queue cos6 weight Number 1 20 The relative weight for the CoS 6 queue cos7 weight Number 1 20 The relative weight for the CoS 7 queue The following command configures a WFQ profile with Profile ID 2 root ethernet qos wfq weight profile tb...

Page 914: ...ing a WFQ Profile to an Interface CLI To attach a WFQ profile to an interface go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x port wfq set profile id profile id Table 253 Attaching WFQ Profile to Interface CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description profile id Number 1 6 Enter the ID of one of the configured WFQ profiles The following co...

Page 915: ...ality of Service QoS CLI Configuring Scheduling CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 19 48 eth type eth 1 1 port wfq show profile id Profile ID 1 CoS Queue Weight Green 0 20 1 20 2 20 3 20 4 20 5 20 6 20 7 20 eth type eth 1 1 ...

Page 916: ... Packets 64 bits counter Dropped Yellow Bytes 64 bits counter To display queue level PMs enter interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x tm queue show statistics service bundle id service bundle id cos cos clear on read clear on read layer 1 layer 1 To clear queue level PMs for a specific service bundle enter interface view for the interface and enter the fo...

Page 917: ... 24 hour intervals per queue and color Maximum bytes passed per second Minimum bytes passed per second Average bytes passed per second Maximum bytes dropped per second Minimum bytes dropped per second Average bytes dropped per second Maximum packets passed per second Minimum packets passed per second Average packets passed per second Maximum packets dropped per second Minimum packets dropped per s...

Page 918: ...it s Admin status is disabled the following output is displayed eth type eth x x pm tm queue show configuration all Service bundle 1 Admin disable Num entries 1 To configure a service bundle enter the following command in interface view eth type eth x x pm tm queue create service bundle id 1 6 admin state enable disable To change the Admin state of a service bundle enter the following command in i...

Page 919: ...s4 yellow bytes passed threshold 675000 bytes cos5 yellow bytes passed threshold 675000 bytes cos6 yellow bytes passed threshold 675000 bytes cos7 yellow bytes passed threshold 675000 bytes To set thresholds for green bytes enter the following command in interface view eth type eth x x pm tm queue set service bundle id 1 6 cos 0 7 green bytes passed threshold 0 4294967295 To set thresholds for yel...

Page 920: ...vice bundle id 1 cos 0 7 interval 15min 24hr For example To display PMs for green packets dropped enter the following command in interface view eth type eth x x pm tm queue show counter green_packets_dropped service bundle id 1 cos 0 7 interval 15min 24hr For example To display PMs for yellow bytes passed enter the following command in interface view eth type eth x x pm tm queue show counter yello...

Page 921: ...vice bundle id 1 cos 0 7 interval 15min 24hr For example To display PMs for yellow bytes dropped enter the following command in interface view eth type eth x x pm tm queue show counter yellow_bytes_dropped service bundle id 1 cos 0 7 interval 15min 24hr For example To display PMs for yellow packets dropped enter the following command in interface view eth type eth x x pm tm queue show counter yell...

Page 922: ...smitted Green Bits per Second 32 bits counter Dropped Green Packets 64 bits counter Dropped Green Bytes 64 bits counter Transmitted Yellow Packets 64 bits counter Transmitted Yellow Bytes 64 bits counter Transmitted Yellow Bits per Second 32 bits counter Dropped Yellow Packets 64 bits counter Dropped Yellow Bytes 64 bits counter To display service bundle level PMs enter interface view for the inte...

Page 923: ...isplay PMs clear on read Boolean yes no If you enter yes the statistics are cleared once you display them layer 1 Boolean yes no yes Statistics are represented as Layer 1 statistics including preamble and IFG no Statistics are represented as Layer 2 statistics The following command displays service bundle PMs for Service Bundle 1 on GbE 1 The PMs are cleared after they are displayed eth type eth 1...

Page 924: ...r 20 Ethernet Protocols CLI Displaying Egress Statistics CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 20 1 Chapter 20 Ethernet Protocols CLI This section includes Configuring G 8032 CLI Configuring MSTP CLI Configuring LLDP CLI ...

Page 925: ...t generalcfg g8032 dest mac address show To display the destination MAC address and the node ID enter the following command in root view root ethernet g8032 show node attributes The node ID is the base MAC address for the node Table 256 G 8032 Destination MAC Address CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description MAC address Six groups of two hexadecimal digits 01 19 a7 00 00 x w...

Page 926: ...p east sp level level version version To add a Ring with Sub Ring ERPI enter the following command in root view root ethernet g8032 create erpi erp type ring with sub ring erpi id erpi id erpi service id erpi service id west sp west sp east sp east sp sub ring sp sub ring sp level level version version To assign a name to an ERPI enter the following command in root view root ethernet g8032 set erp...

Page 927: ...with MEG level 4 root ethernet g8032 create erpi erp type sub ring erpi id 10 erpi service id 20 west sp 1 east sp 2 level 4 root ethernet g8032 set erpi name erpi id 1 erpi name Sub_ring The following commands create a Ring with Sub Ring ERPI with ID 20 and name the ERPI RSRi This ERPI is associated with Ethernet Service 30 The end points of the ERPI are Service Point 1 and Service Point 2 and th...

Page 928: ...meters The following timers are available Wait to Restore WTR Timer Defines a minimum time the system waits after signal failure is recovered before reverting to idle state Guard Time Prevents unnecessary state changes and loops Hold Off Time Determines the time period from failure detection to response To configure the WTR timer enter the following command in root view root ethernet g8032 set wtr...

Page 929: ...guard time for ERPI 1 to 20 msecs root ethernet g8032 set guard time erpi id 1 guard time 20 The following command sets the hold off time for ERPI 1 to 1000 msecs root ethernet g8032 set holdoff time erpi id 1 holdoff time 1000 Initiating a Manual or Forced Switch and Clearing the Switch or Initiating Reversion CLI To initiate a forced switch enter the following command in root view root ethernet ...

Page 930: ...SP sub ring The following command initiates convergence in the East service point of ERPI 1 root ethernet g8032 clear erpi erpi id 1 SP east Blocking or Unblocking R APS Messages on a Service Point CLI To enable or disable transmission of R APS messages on a service point enter the following command in root view root ethernet g8032 set erpi sp tx raps cntrl erpi id erpi id SP SP tx raps tx raps Ta...

Page 931: ...oint on a specific group enter the following command in root view root ethernet g8032 show all port erpi group group The following command displays all ERPIs with a service point on port 1 of the TCC in slot 1 root ethernet g8032 show all port erpi interface eth slot 1 port 1 The following command displays all ERPIs with a service point on LAG group 1 root ethernet g8032 show all port erpi group l...

Page 932: ...wing is an example of this command s output To display state information about a specific ERPI enter the following command in root view root ethernet g8032 show erpi dynamic erpi id erpi id The following command displays detailed output for ERPI 1 root ethernet g8032 show erpi dynamic erpi id 1 The following is an example of this command s output Table 262 G 8032 ERPI Display Command Input Paramet...

Page 933: ... radio 1 2 management 1 2 tdm 1 The interface for which you want to display ERPIs erpi id Number 1 64 The ID of the ERPI for which you want to perform or clear the switch initiate convergence or display information Table 263 G 8032 ERPI Display Command Output Parameters Parameter Description ERPI ID A unique ID that identifies the ERPI ERPI Name A descriptive name for the ERPI Service The ID of th...

Page 934: ... Time The minimum time in msec the system waits after recovery from a signal failure before accepting new R APS messages The purpose of this timer is to prevent unnecessary state changes that might be caused by outdated messages Hold Off Time The minimum time in msec the system waits before reacting to a signal failure SD Handling Reserved for future use West SP SD Capacity Threshold Reserved for ...

Page 935: ...wner Indicates whether the service point is in blocked state Defect State Indicates whether the service point is in Signal Fail SF or Signal Defect SD state Note Support for Signal Defect state is planned for future release TX R APS Frames The number of R APS frames that have been transmitted via the service point TX R APS SF The number of R APS Signal Fail SF frames that have been transmitted via...

Page 936: ...n received by the service point RX R APS NR The number of R APS No Request NR frames that have been received by the service point TX R APS RB The number of R APS RPL Blocked RB frames that have been transmitted by the service point TX R APS SD The number of R APS Signal Degrade SD frames that have been transmitted by the service point TX R APS FS The number of R APS Forced Switch FS frames that ha...

Page 937: ...Viewing the MSTP Parameters CLI Enabling and Disabling MSTP CLI Enabling MSTP starts the protocol and sets all port states in all MSTP instances to Blocking Convergence upon enabling the protocol generally takes less than two seconds Note All mapping of Ethernet services to MSTP instances MSTIs should be performed before enabling MSTP For instructions see Mapping Services to MSTIs CLI To enable MS...

Page 938: ... To display the number of MSTIs on the unit enter the following command in root view root ethernet mstp show number of instances Table 265 Defining Number of MSTIs CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description MSTI Number 2 16 The number of MSTIs on the unit This number does not include the Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The following command sets the number of MSTIs to ...

Page 939: ...en To freeze MSTP enter the following command in root view root ethernet mstp mstp freeze To unfreeze MSTP enter the following command in root view root ethernet mstp mstp defreeze To display whether MSTP is or is not currently frozen in the unit enter the following command in root view root ethernet mstp show mstp frozen Resetting the MSTP Stack CLI To reset MSTP on the unit enter the following c...

Page 940: ... To display the configuration ID attributes enter the following command in root view root ethernet mstp show config id Table 268 MSTP Configuration ID CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description configuration name Text String The IEEE 802 1Q Configuration Name The Configuration Name is part of the bridge configuration Identifier revision level Number 0 65535 The IEEE 802 1Q Re...

Page 941: ...ssigns Service 1 to MSTI 2 root ethernet generalcfg instance to service mapping set service sid 1 instance id 2 The following command assigns Services 1 through 10 to MSTI 2 root ethernet generalcfg instance to service mapping set service sid 1 to 10 instance id 2 The following command displays the service to MSTI mapping for services 1 through 1000 root ethernet generalcfg instance to service map...

Page 942: ...age Number 600 4000 Enter a value in cs that all bridges will use when this bridge is the root as the maximum age of MSTP information learned from the network on any port before the information is discarded cist bridge forward delay Number 400 3000 Enter a value in cs that all bridges will use when this bridge is the root as the speed at which ports change their spanning state when moving towards ...

Page 943: ...msti bridge priority Number 0 61440 in steps of 4096 The MSTI writeable portion of the Bridge ID interface Variable eth radio pwe Enter the type of interface eth Ethernet radio Radio pwe TDM slot Number 1 port Number ethernet 1 6 radio 1 2 management 1 2 tdm 1 The interface you want to configure group Variable rp1 rp2 rp3 rp4 lag1 lag2 lag3 lag4 mc abc1 mc abc2 mc abc3 mc abc4 To display bridge pa...

Page 944: ...ge 20 21 The following command displays the bridge parameters of MSTI 10 root ethernet mstp show msti attributes instance 10 Viewing the MSTP Parameters CLI To display the general MSTP parameters enter the following command in root view root ethernet mstp show gen attributes ...

Page 945: ...stp set group group cist port path cost cist port path cost To set a port s administrative edge port parameter for the CIST enter the following command in root view root ethernet mstp set interface interface slot slot port port cist port edge port cist port edge port To set an interface group s administrative edge port parameter for the CIST enter the following command in root view root ethernet m...

Page 946: ...ead of the interface slot and port parameters to identify the group See Configuring HSB Radio Protection CLI Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP CLI Configuring Multi Carrier ABC CLI cist port priority Number 0 240 in multiples of 16 The priority contained in the first octet of the two octet Port ID cist port path cost Number 1 200000000 The configurable assigned value for the contribution o...

Page 947: ...g command sets the CIST port priority for HSB protection group 1 to 192 root ethernet mstp set group rp1 cist port priority 192 The following command sets the CIST path cost for Ethernet port 1 to 20 000 root ethernet mstp set interface eth slot 1 port 1 cist path cost 20000 The following command sets the CIST path cost for LAG 1 to 20 000 root ethernet mstp set group lag1 cist path cost 20000 The...

Page 948: ... the following command in root view root ethernet mstp set instance instance group group msti port path cost msti port path cost To display the MSTI parameters for a specific MSTI and port enter the following command in root view root ethernet mstp show msti port attributes instance instance interface interface slot slot port port To display the MSTI parameters for a specific MSTI and interface gr...

Page 949: ...mand sets the MSTI port priority for MSTI 14 on Ethernet port 2 to 192 root ethernet mstp set instance 14 interface eth slot 1 port 2 msti port priority 192 The following command sets the MSTI port priority for MSTI 14 on LAG 1 to 192 root ethernet mstp set instance 14 group lag1 msti port priority 192 The following command sets the MSTI path cost for MSTI 12 on Ethernet port 3 to 20000 root ether...

Page 950: ...abc3 mc abc4 To display counters for a LAG group or a Multi Carrier ABC group use this parameter instead of the interface slot and port parameters to identify the group See Configuring HSB Radio Protection CLI Configuring Link Aggregation LAG and LACP CLI Configuring Multi Carrier ABC CLI Configuring LLDP CLI Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral layer 2 protocol that can be used ...

Page 951: ...ral LLDP Parameters CLI The Transmit Interval is the interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted The time to live TTL determines the length of time LLDP frames are retained by the receiving device The TTL is determined by multiplying the Transmit Interval by the TTL Multiplier To define the Transmit Interval enter the following command in root view root ethernet lldp tx interval set tx interval ...

Page 952: ...r is multiplied by the Transmit Interval to determine the TTL in seconds of LLDP frames The default value is 4 Reinit Delay The minimum time in seconds the system waits after the LLDP Admin status becomes Disabled until it will process a request to reinitialize LLDP In this release this parameter is set at 2 Notification Interval The interval in seconds between transmission of LLDP notifications d...

Page 953: ...n agent admin To enable or disable LLDP notifications to the NMS on a specific port enter the following command in root view root ethernet lldp agent notif enable interface eth slot slot port port agent notif enable agent notif enable To display the LLDP agent configuration on all ports enter the following command in root view root ethernet lldp agent configuration show The following is a sample o...

Page 954: ...2 to transmit and receive LLDP frames and to send a Topology Change trap to the NMS whenever the system information of its peer changes root ethernet lldp agent admin set interface eth slot 1 port 2 agent admin txAndRx root ethernet lldp agent notif enable interface eth slot 1 port 2 agent notif enable true Displaying the LLDP Local System Parameters CLI To display the local unit s unit parameters...

Page 955: ...arameters o 0 other o 1 repeater o 2 bridge o 3 wlanAccessPoint o 4 router o 5 telephone o 6 docsisCableDevice o 7 stationOnly o 8 cVLANComponent o 9 sVLANComponent o 10 twoPortMACRelay To display the local unit s management information enter the following command in root view root ethernet lldp local mng show The following information is displayed Mng Addr SubType The format of the local unit s I...

Page 956: ...The port s MAC address Description A text string that describes the port In this release this parameter is always set to ethPort To display the local unit s management information per port enter the following command in root view root ethernet lldp mng addr table show The following information is displayed Interface type slot port The port type slot number and port number Dest Mac Address Defines ...

Page 957: ...e peer Rem Dest Mac Address The peer LLDP agent s destination MAC Address Remote Index An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a particular connection instance unique only for the indicated peer Remote Chassis ID subType The type of encoding used to identify the peer s chassis Remote Chassis ID An octet string used to identify the peer s chassis Rem Port ID subType The type...

Page 958: ... time Displaying the LLDP Remote Management Data per Port CLI To display remote LLDP management data from a specific port starting from a specific time enter the following command in root view If no time is specified all data is displayed root ethernet lldp agent remote mng show agent start time agent start time interface eth slot slot port port The following information is displayed Time Mark The...

Page 959: ...ware component or protocol entity associated with the management address advertised by the remote system agent Table 277 LLDP Local System CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description interface Variable eth radio pwe Enter the type of interface eth Ethernet radio Radio pwe TDM slot Number 1 port Number ethernet 1 6 radio 1 2 management 1 2 tdm 1 agent start time Number dd mm yy...

Page 960: ...er is similar to this counter but is for specific ports rather than the entire unit Displaying LLDP Transmission Statistics CLI To display statistics about LLDP transmissions and transmission errors enter the following command in root view root ethernet lldp statistics port tx show The following information is displayed LLDP TX Statistics Ifindex The index value used to identify the port in LLDP t...

Page 961: ... this port while the agent is enabled RX Valid Frames The number of valid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on this port RX Discarded TLVs The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on this port RX Unrecognized TLVs The number of LLDP TLVs received on the given port that are not recognized by LLDP agent RX Ageouts The number of age outs that occurred on the port An age...

Page 962: ...TDM Services and Interfaces CLI This section includes TDM Overview CLI Configuring the Unit to Operate in ANSI Mode CLI Configuring TDM Cards and Interfaces CLI Configuring Native TDM Trails CLI Configuring TDM Pseudowire Services CLI Displaying TDM PMs CLI Related topics Performing TDM Diagnostics CLI ...

Page 963: ...upported using the same hardware Native TDM trails TDM Pseudowire services enabling interoperability with third party packet PW equipment PTP 820G and PTP 820F also offers hybrid Ethernet and TDM services Hybrid services can utilize either Native TDM or pseudowire Hybrid Ethernet and TDM services can also be transported via cascading interfaces This enables the creation of links among multiple uni...

Page 964: ...fault the TDM interfaces in a PTP 820G or PTP 820F unit are set to operate according to the ETSI standard in E1 mode To change the TDM interfaces to operate according to the ANSI FCC standard DS1 enter the following command in root view Note This command results in system reset and restores the default configuration root platform management set tdm interfaces standard ansi ...

Page 965: ...terface use the pwe3 tdm enable slot command See Configuring the E1 DS1 Parameters CLI Table 278 TDM Slot Configuration CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number For TDM cards in an expansion slot 2 3 For the fixed E1 DS1 interface 1 type Variable LIC T16 ACR LIC T155 ACR LIC T16 ACR A 16xE1 DS1 TDM card LIC T155 ACR A 1 x ch STM 1 OC 3 card port Number STM 1 1 6...

Page 966: ...ameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number For TDM cards in an expansion slot 2 3 For the fixed E1 DS1 interface 1 tdm port Number The fixed E1 DS1 interface or an LIC T16 16 x E1 DS1 1 16 If the card is an LIC T155 1x ch STM 1 OC 3 STM 1 1 63 OC 3 1 84 The physical port number of the port line type Variable unframed The line type of this port In this release unframed is the only a...

Page 967: ...ated in an RTP header that can be used to correct frequency offsets The clock information is extracted at the point where the frames are received and reconverted to TDM The extracted clock information is used for the reconversion to TDM If you configure the timing mode as clock recovery you must use the clk src ref port parameter to configure the clock source reference port clk src ref Variable no...

Page 968: ...bsolute this parameter must be set to 0 idle code Number 0 255 The value to be transmitted on this port for unused time slots cable length Variable ffixed or 0 133ft 133 266ft 266 399ft 399 533ft 533 655ft Reserved for future use The following commands configure and enable port 9 in the E1 DS1 interface pwe3 pwe3 tdm config modify port slot 1 tdm port 9 line type unframed line coding hdb3 b8zs cha...

Page 969: ... TDM Trails CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 21 8 Configuring Native TDM Trails CLI To configure native TDM services it is recommended to use the Web EMS s simple step by step workflow which guides you through the configuration process See Configuring Native TDM Trails ...

Page 970: ... Tunnels CLI Each TDM service must include an encapsulation tunnel to determine how traffic over the service passes through the network In this version encapsulation must use the MEF 8 protocol For PTP 820G You can configure up to 32 tunnels per unit To configure a tunnel you will need the MAC address of the TDM interface at the remote side of the tunnel TDM tunnel configuration must be performed ...

Page 971: ...and its output root pwe3 pwe3 pwe3 tunnel status show slot 1 id 1 Slot Number 1 PSN Tunnel Id 1 Operational Status down Source MAC Address 0 a 25 0 28 e8 Actual Remote MAC Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 pwe3 Table 280 Pseudowire Tunnel CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number 1 id Number 1 168 A unique ID that identifies the tunnel remote mac addr Six groups of two hexadec...

Page 972: ...ace on the remote unit are already configured If they are not configured you can still configure the tunnel but the verification commands may produce unexpected results To configure a pseudowire tunnel on which the remote MAC address is dynamically learned the remote mac addr parameters must be configured to 00 00 00 00 00 00 In this case the remote MAC address is learned through CFM protocol You ...

Page 973: ...buffer payload suppression and other parameters A profile can be used by multiple services You can configure up to 64 TDM profiles TDM profile configuration must be performed from pwe3 view root pwe3 pwe3 To create and configure a TDM profile use the following commands pwe3 pwe3 pw profile add id id pwe3 pwe3 pw profile basic params modify id id payload size payload size jitter buffer depth jitter...

Page 974: ...llowing commands add TDM profile 5 with a payload size of 2 jitter buffer depth of 4 milliseconds and payload suppression disabled pwe3 pwe3 pw profile add id 5 pwe3 pwe3 pw profile basic params modify id 5 payload size 2 jitter buffer depth 4 payload suppression disable To verify the details of the profile you just created enter the following command pwe3 pwe3 pw profile show id 5 Configuring Eth...

Page 975: ...etwork Both types of pseudowire path protection requires the use of SOAM CFM at both end points The TDM module sends two data streams to the CPU In 1 1 path protection only the data stream for the active path contains actual traffic Both data streams contain continuity messages CCMs This enables the TDM module to monitor the status of both paths without doubling the amount of data being sent over ...

Page 976: ...ame level level The following command assigns MD 1 to the E1 DS1 interface The name of the MD is test and its MD level is 5 pwe3 pwe3 soam md add slot 1 id 1 name test level 5 Table 282 Pseudowire OEM MD CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number 1 id Number 1 8 An ID that identifies the MD This ID is unique per slot name Text String Assigns a name to the MD for i...

Page 977: ...e TDM tunnel associated with the MA To add an MA enter the following command in pwe3 view pwe3 pwe3 soam ma add slot slot id id name name md id md id local mep local mep remote mep remote mep vlan type vlan type vid vid Table 283 Pseudowire OEM MA CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number 1 id Number 1 168 A unique ID that identifies the MA md id Number Any confi...

Page 978: ...nd in pwe3 view pwe3 pwe3 soam ma status show slot slot id id The following is an example of a pwe3 soam ma status show slot slot id id command and its output root pwe3 pwe3 pwe3 soam ma status show slot 1 id 1 Slot Number 1 Maintenance Association Id 1 Remote MEP MAC Address ff ff ff ff ff ff Defects rmep ccm pwe3 The following command creates MA 1 on the E1 DS1 interface This MA includes a local...

Page 979: ... ma id modify slot slot tunnel tunnel ma id ma id Table 285 Assigning MA to TDM Tunnel CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number 1 tunnel Number Any configured TDM tunnel ID The ID of the TDM tunnel ma id Number Any configured MA ID The MA you want to assign to the tunnel The following command assigns MA 1 to TDM tunnel 1 on the E1 DS1 card pwe3 pwe3 tunnel ma id...

Page 980: ...sions prior to T7 9 are non revertive To set the WTR time for TDM pseudowire services with revertive path protection enter the following command in root view root platform wtr timer set wtr timer To display the WTR time for TDM pseudowire services with revertive path protection enter the following command in root view root platform wtr timer show To create a Pseudowire tunnel group enter the follo...

Page 981: ...this tunnel group tunnel 1 is the primary tunnel and tunnel 2 is the secondary tunnel Revertive mode is disabled for this tunnel group pwe3 pwe3 tunnel group add slot 1 id 1 primary id 1 secondary id 2 revertive admin disable pwe3 pwe3 tunnel group enable slot 1 id 1 The following commands set the revertive timer to 20 seconds and create and enable tunnel group 2 on the E1 DS1 interface This group...

Page 982: ...ers Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number 1 id Number 1 84 An ID that identifies the tunnel group This ID is unique per slot The following is an example of a pwe3 tunnel group status show slot slot id id command and its output root pwe3 pwe3 pwe3 tunnel group status show slot 1 id 1 Slot Number 1 PSN Tunnel Group Id 1 Operational Status up Active PSN Tunnel secondary Protec...

Page 983: ...ettings See Configuring TDM Pseudowire Services For PTP 820F and PTP 820G you can configure up to 16 TDM pseudowire services Pseudowire service configuration must be performed from pwe3 view root pwe3 pwe3 Caution Once a profile tunnel or bundle has been assigned to a service you cannot modify that profile tunnel or bundle until you first disable the service To configure and enable a pseudowire se...

Page 984: ...view pwe3 pwe3 pws status show slot slot id id The following is an example of a pwe3 tunnel status show slot slot id id command and its output root pwe3 pwe3 pwe3 pws status show slot 1 id 1 Slot Number 1 PW Service Id 1 Operational Status down Transmitted Packets 83653910 Received Packets 0 Transitions Normal LOPS 1 Jitter Buffer Overruns 0 Max Jitter Buffer Deviation 900 Current Min Jitter Buffe...

Page 985: ...than a tunnel src ecid Number 1 1048575 The source ECID for the Ethernet tunnel dst ecid Number 1 1048575 The destination ECID for the Ethernet tunnel cr master pws Variable yes no Enter yes to use this service as a reference for clock recovery Otherwise enter no protected Variable yes no Enter yes to create a protected path service Otherwise enter no If this parameter is set to yes the psn tunnel...

Page 986: ...Chapter 21 TDM Services and Interfaces CLI Configuring TDM Pseudowire Services CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 21 25 pwe3 pwe3 pws config show slot 1 id 12 ...

Page 987: ...wire Service PMs To display PMs for the E1 DS1 interface measured at 15 minute intervals enter the following command in root view root pwe3 pws line pm 15 show slot slot id id To display PMs for the E1 DS1 interface measured at daily intervals enter the following command in root view root pwe3 pws line pm 24 show slot slot id id Table 290 E1 DS1 PMs CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Va...

Page 988: ... Clock CLI Configuring SSM Messages CLI Configuring the Revertive Timer CLI Displaying Synchronization Status and Parameters CLI Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock CLI Configuring 1588 Boundary Clock CLI Note By default the unit is set to operate according to the ETSI standard For instructions on configuring the system to operate according to the ANSI FCC standard DS1 see TDM Overview CLI ...

Page 989: ...ith identical quality the interface with the highest priority is selected When configuring a Sync source the Sync mode must be set to its default setting of automatic To display the current Sync mode enter the following CLI command in root view root platform sync mode show If the Sync mode is set to pipe you must set it to automatic by entering the following CLI command in root view root platform ...

Page 990: ... To edit the parameters of an existing Ethernet interface synchronization source enter the following command in root view root platform sync source edit eth interface slot slot port port priority priority quality quality To remove an Ethernet interface as a synchronization source enter the following command in root view root platform sync source remove eth interface slot slot port port ...

Page 991: ...mined by the received SSMs If no valid SSM messages are received or in case of interface failure such as LOS LOC LOF the quality becomes failure SSM must be enabled on the remote interface in order for the interface to receive SSM messages If the quality is configured to a fixed value then the quality status becomes failure upon interface failure such as LOS LOC LOF The following command configure...

Page 992: ... Number 1 port Number 1 2 radio channel Number 0 85 A synchronization channel used for interoperability For interoperability with other PTP 820G or PTP 820F units this parameter must be set to 0 priority Number 1 16 The priority of this synchronization source relative to other synchronization sources configured in the unit quality Variable For ETSI systems automatic prc ssu a ssu b g813 8262 For A...

Page 993: ...ty automatic The following command changes the priority of this synchronization source to 14 root platform sync source edit radio interface slot 1 port 1 radio channel 1 priority 14 The following command removes this synchronization source root platform sync source remove radio interface slot 1 port 1 radio channel 1 Clearing All Sync Sources CLI To clear all synchronization sources that have been...

Page 994: ...e Media Type of an Ethernet interface see Configuring an Interface s Media Type CLI To set the interface clock for an Ethernet interface enter the following command in root view root platform sync interface clock set eth interface slot slot port port source source Table 293 Outgoing Clock CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number 1 port Number ethernet 1 6 radio ...

Page 995: ...Configuring the Outgoing Clock CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 22 8 The following command sets the clock source for Ethernet port 2 to the system clock root platform sync interface clock set eth interface slot 1 port 2 source system clock ...

Page 996: ...lity is transmitted through SSM messages to all relevant radio interfaces In order to prevent loops an SSM with quality Do Not Use is sent from the active source interface both radio and Ethernet In order for an interface to transmit SSM messages SSM must be enabled on the interface By default SSM is disabled on all interfaces On radio interfaces SSM messages with the quality DNU Do not Use are se...

Page 997: ...set to 0 which means that it is disabled Note TDM trails with 1 1 path protection that were configured using software versions prior to T7 9 are non revertive The Revertive timer must be configured before creating a protecting TDM trail so that the configured WTR time will be in effect for this trail To configure the revertive timer enter the following command in root view root platform sync rever...

Page 998: ...s enter the following command in root view root platform sync source status show The following is a sample synchronization source status display output number of configured sources 4 Slot Port Type Instance Active Src Act Quality Received SSM revert time 1 1 ethernet false PRC do not use 0 1 1 radio false do not use do not use 0 1 2 radio false failure do not use 0 To display the current system re...

Page 999: ...em Clock Off 1 2 Ethernet System Clock Off 1 3 Ethernet System Clock Off 1 4 Ethernet System Clock Off 1 5 Ethernet System Clock Off 1 6 Ethernet System Clock On 1 1 Radio System Clock On 1 2 Radio System Clock On To display the current system clock status enter the following command in root view root platform sync clu state show The following is a sample system clock status display output CLU is ...

Page 1000: ... services Unicast PTP packets are supported with both Point to Point and Multipoint services Before configuring Transparent Clock 1 Add the port receiving synchronization from the customer side as a Sync source with Sync Interface Priority 1 See Configuring an Ethernet Interface as a Synchronization Source CLI 2 Add a radio interface as a second Sync source with lower priority than the port receiv...

Page 1001: ...nd configure the radio to send PTP packets downstream root platform sync ptp tc set admin enable root platform sync ptp tc set radio slot 1 port 1 direction downstream The following commands enable Transparent Clock on Multi Carrier ABC group 1 and configure the radio to send PTP packets upstream root platform sync ptp tc set group id mc abc1 direction upstream Table 295 1588 Transparent Clock CLI...

Page 1002: ...Chapter 22 Synchronization CLI Configuring 1588 Transparent Clock CLI phn 3965_006v002 Page 22 15 ...

Page 1003: ...omain and regenerates PTP towards the slave clocks This reduces the processing load from grandmaster clocks and increases the scalability of the synchronization network while rigorously maintaining timing accuracy The PTP 820 Boundary Clock mechanism requires the use of untagged Ethernet multicast PTP packets Note Boundary Clock and Transparent Clock can be used together in the same PTP 820 node N...

Page 1004: ...aken into account when two identical announce messages are received by at least two different ports In such a case the Boundary Clock mechanism selects the slave port based on the best lowest Local Priority The default value is 128 root platform sync ptp bc interfaces set interface type interface type slot slot port port local priority local priority Use the following command to set a MAC address ...

Page 1005: ... or slave the slave role is allocated dynamically according to the interface receiving the best grandmaster announce message according to the BMCA The radio interfaces can only serve in the master role i e they distribute PTP synchronization but do not receive PTP synchronization from an external grandmaster root platform sync ptp set admin enable root platform sync ptp bc interfaces set interface...

Page 1006: ...o interface See Configuring the Sync Source CLI 6 Verify that the Sync Interface Quality Status of the first Sync source is not Failure See Displaying Synchronization Status and Parameters CLI Use the following command to display the current Boundary Clock configuration Configuring the Sync Source CLI root platform sync ptp bc interfaces show config Figure 428 1588 Boundary Clock Current Configura...

Page 1007: ... Boundary Clock node s maximum number of PTP clocks traversed root platform sync ptp bc clock set max steps removed max steps removed Table 297 Boundary Clock Default Settings CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values priority2 Number 0 255 domain number Number 24 43 local priority Number 1 255 max steps removed Number 1 255 Use the following command to display the Boundary Clock node s...

Page 1008: ...ys set to no Max Step Removed The maximum number of PTP clocks traversed from the grandmaster to the slave clock in the local PTP 820 Boundary Clock node If the defined number is exceeded packets from this grandmaster candidate are discarded and the grandmaster will not be eligible for use by the Boundary Clock node The default value is 255 user configurable Reset Port Counters In PTP 820 this is ...

Page 1009: ...ters CLI Parameter Definition Steps Removed The number of PTP clocks traversed from the grandmaster to the slave clock in the local PTP 820 Boundary Clock node You can define a maximum number of steps in the Clock Default Parameters page See Displaying and Setting the Boundary Clock Default Parameters CLI Offset from Master Nanoseconds The time difference between the master clock and the local sla...

Page 1010: ...riority 1 The Priority 1 value of the current grandmaster Grandmaster Priority 2 The Priority 2 value of the current grandmaster Current UTC Offset Seconds The current UTC offset value in seconds Current UTC Offset Valid Indicates whether the current UTC offset value is valid Leap 59 Indicates that the last minute of the current UTC day contains 59 seconds Leap 61 Indicates that the last minute of...

Page 1011: ...from a grandmaster Log Min Delay Req Interval The minimum allowed interval between Delay Request messages Log Sync Interval Interval between sync messages Log Announce Interval The interval between Announce messages Announce Receipt Timeout The maximum allowed number of intervals without receiving any Announce messages Version Number Always displays 2 Delay Mechanism Always displays 1 Displaying t...

Page 1012: ...igure 434 1588 Boundary Clock Statistics CLI Table 302 Boundary Clock Port Statistics CLI Parameter Definition Announce Transmitted The number of Announce messages that have been transmitted from the port Sync Transmitted The number of Sync messages that have been transmitted from the port Follow Up Transmitted The number of Follow Up messages that have been transmitted from the port Delay Respons...

Page 1013: ...sabling Boundary Clock CLI Use the following command to disable each Boundary Clock interface in the node It is important to disable Boundary Clock on the interfaces before disabling 1588 PTP root platform sync ptp bc interfaces set interface type interface type slot slot port port admin disable After disabling the Boundary Clock interfaces enter the following command in root view root platform sy...

Page 1014: ...Configuring the General Access Control Parameters CLI Configuring the Password Security Parameters CLI Configuring Users CLI Configuring RADIUS CLI Configuring X 509 CSR Certificates and HTTPS CLI Configuring HTTPS Cipher Hardening CLI Uploading the Configuration Log CLI Related Topics Changing Your Password Operating in FIPS Mode CLI Configuring AES 256 Payload Encryption CLI ...

Page 1015: ...trol session inactivity timeout set inactivity timeout To display the currently configured session timeout period enter the following command in root view root platform security protocols control session inactivity timeout show Table 303 Inactivity Timeout Period CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description inactivity timeout Number 1 60 The session inactivity timeout period in...

Page 1016: ... from logging into the system after the defined number of failed login attempts The following commands configure a blocking period of 45 minutes for users that perform 5 consecutive failed login attempts root platform security access control block failure login attempt set 5 root platform security access control block failure login period set 45 Configuring Blocking of Unused Accounts CLI You can ...

Page 1017: ...umber 0 30 90 The number of days after which a user is prevented from logging into the system if the user has not logged in for the configured number of days If you enter 0 this feature is disabled user name Text String Any valid user name The user account you want to block or unblock See Configuring User Accounts CLI The following command configures the system to block any user that does not log ...

Page 1018: ...set this parameter to 0 password aging is disabled and passwords remain valid indefinitely To configure password aging enter the following command in root view root platform security access control password aging set password aging Table 306 Password Aging CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description password aging Number 0 20 90 The number of days that user passwords will rema...

Page 1019: ...nforcement root platform security access control password enforce strength set yes Forcing Password Change Upon First Login CLI To determine whether the system requires users to change their password the first time they log into the system enter the following command in root view root platform security access control password first login set first login To require users to change their password th...

Page 1020: ...perform certain operations are assigned to specific roles Users are assigned to particular roles and through those role assignments acquire the permissions to perform particular system functions In the PTP 820 GUI these roles are called user profiles Up to 50 user profiles can be configured Each profile contains a set of privilege levels per functionality group and defines the management protocols...

Page 1021: ... defining access levels write lvl Variable none normal advanced The read level for the functionality group read lvl Variable none normal advanced The read level for the functionality group The following commands create a user profile called operator and give users to whom this profile is assigned normal write privileges for all system functionality and advanced read privileges for all functionalit...

Page 1022: ...ommand for users with this user profile allowed Boolean yes no yes Users with this user profile can access the access channel type defined in the preceding parameter no Users with this user profile cannot access the access channel type defined in the preceding parameter For example the following command prevents users with the user profile operator from accessing the system via NMS root platform s...

Page 1023: ...ofile operator This user s account expires on February 1 2014 root platform security access control user account add user name Tom_Jones profile name operator expired date 2014 02 01 When you create a new user account the system will prompt you to enter a default password If Enforce Password Strength is activated refer to Configuring Password Strength Enforcement CLI the password must meet the fol...

Page 1024: ... a centralized standard RADIUS server which indicates to the PTP 820G or PTP 820F whether the user is known and which privilege is to be given to the user You can define up to two Radius servers If you define two one serves as the primary server and the other as the secondary server Activating RADIUS Authentication CLI To enable or disable Radius access control enter the following command root pla...

Page 1025: ...y radius server communication ipv4 set server id 1 ip address 192 168 1 99 port 1812 retries 5 timeout 10 secret U8glp3KJ6FKGksdgase4IQ9FMm Viewing RADIUS Access Control and Server Attributes CLI To display the Radius access control status enter the following command root platform security radius admin show To display Radius server attributes enter the following command root platform security radi...

Page 1026: ... or Advanced Radio Func Group Write level The Write access level in the Radio functional group None Regular or Advanced TDM Func Group Read level The Read access level in the TDM functional group None Regular or Advanced TDM Func Group Write level The Write access level in the TDM functional group None Regular or Advanced Eth Func Group Read level The Read access level in the Eth functional group ...

Page 1027: ...ote For these operations SFTP must be used This section includes Generating a Certificate Signing Request CSR File CLI Downloading a Certificate CLI Enabling HTTPS CLI Generating a Certificate Signing Request CSR File CLI To set the CSR parameters enter the following command in root view root platform security csr set parameters common name common name country country state state locality locality...

Page 1028: ...s Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description common name String The fully qualified domain name for your web server You must enter the exact domain name country String The two letter ISO abbreviation for your country e g US state String The state province or region in which the organization is located Do not abbreviate locality String The city in which the organization is legally located or...

Page 1029: ...er password password If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6 enter the following command in root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for downloading a certificate root platform security certificate set download parameters server ipv6 server ipv6 server path server path filename filename server username username server password password To display the currently configured SFTP pa...

Page 1030: ...PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server server path Text String The directory path from which you are downloading the CSR Enter the path relative to the SFTP user s home directory not the absolute path To leave the path blank enter filename Text String The certificate s file name in the SFTP server username Text String The user name for the SFTP session password Text String The password for ...

Page 1031: ...m security url protocol set url protocol https Note Make sure you have installed a valid certificate in the PTP 820G or PTP 820F before changing the web interface protocol to HTTPS Failure to do this may prevent users from accessing the Web EMS To change the protocol back to HTTP enter the following command in root view root platform security url protocol set url protocol http To display which pro...

Page 1032: ...t platform security https ciphers hardening level set level normal Note The default HTTP cipher mode is normal To display the current HTTPS cipher mode enter the following command root platform security https ciphers hardening level show Blocking Telnet Access CLI You can block telnet access to the unit By default telnet access is not blocked To block telnet access enter the following command root...

Page 1033: ...in root view root platform security file transfer show configuration To upload the security log to your FTP server enter the following command in root view root platform security file transfer operation set upload security log To display the progress of a current security log upload operation enter the following command in root view root platform security file transfer show operation To display th...

Page 1034: ...it this parameter The following commands configure an FTP channel for security log upload to IP address 192 168 1 80 in the directory current with file name security_log_Oct8 zip user name anonymous and password 12345 and initiate the upload root platform security file transfer set server path current file name security_log_Oct8 zip ip address 192 168 1 80 protocol ftp username anonymous password ...

Page 1035: ...y configuration log upload params show To export the configuration log enter the following command in root view root platform security configuration log upload To display the status of a configuration log export operation enter the following command in root view root platform security configuration log upload status show Table 317 Configuration Log CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Val...

Page 1036: ...be more than If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4 236 characters If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6 220 characters The following commands configure an FTP channel for configuration log export to IP address 192 168 1 99 in the directory current with file name cfg_log user name anonymous and password 12345 root platform security configuration log upload params set path fi...

Page 1037: ...an necessary To activate the Radio Logger enter the following command in root view root logger start logger type radio logger duration 1 1440 slot1 1 port1 1 2 slot2 1 port2 1 2 slot3 1 port3 1 2 slot4 1 port4 1 2 The logger duration parameter is set in minutes You can activate the logger on up to four radios in a single command For example the following command activates the logger for 40 minutes...

Page 1038: ...g command in root view root logger stop logger type radio To delete all data that has been saved by the Radio Logger enter the following command in root view root logger delete logger files logger type Important Note Whenever you activate the Radio Logger any previous Radio Logger results are deleted Performing Diagnostics CLI Working in CW Mode Single or Dual Tone CLI Related Topics Ethernet Pin ...

Page 1039: ... following command in root view root platform status current alarm show most severe alarm module unit For example root platform status current alarm show most severe alarm module slot all Most Severe Alarm Table Slot Severity 1 critical 64 cleared 68 cleared root Modules are identified as follows 1 Fixed Interfaces 64 LAG 66 Multi Carrier ABC 67 XPIC 68 HSB Radio Protection To display the most sev...

Page 1040: ... CLI The Event Log displays a list of current and historical events and information about each event To display the event log enter the following command in root view root platform status event log show module unit To clear the event log enter the following command in root view root platform status event log clear module unit ...

Page 1041: ...rm type s severity level enter the following command in root view root platform status alarm management set alarm id alarm id severity level severity level To add descriptive information to an alarm type enter the following command in root view root platform status alarm management set alarm id alarm id additional text additional text Table 318 Editing Alarm Text and Severity CLI Parameters Parame...

Page 1042: ...m id restore default To restore the severity levels and descriptions of all alarm types to their default values enter the following command in root view root platform status alarm management set all default Table 319 Restoring Alarms to Default CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description alarm id Number All valid alarm type IDs depending on system configuration Enter the uniqu...

Page 1043: ...timeout Note If the unit is upgraded from an earlier version to System release 10 0 or higher the timeout retains its previous value until it is changed That means if it was never configured it retains its previous default value of 0 If the unit is set to its factory default configuration the timeout is set to 10 seconds To configure the timeout in seconds for trap generation enter the following c...

Page 1044: ... To disable an alarm or event enter the following command in root view root platform status alarm management set alarm id alarm ID admin disable To enable an alarm or event enter the following command in root view root platform status alarm management set alarm id alarm ID admin enable To display a list of all disabled alarms and events and their attributes enter the following command in root view...

Page 1045: ...lowing command in root view root platform management undervoltage set clear threshold 0 100 To change the threshold for raising an overvoltage alarm enter the following command in root view root platform management overvoltage set raise threshold 0 100 To change the threshold for clearing an overvoltage alarm enter the following command in root view root platform management overvoltage set clear t...

Page 1046: ...p set ip address family is IPv4 enter the destination IPv4 address If the selected IP protocol is IPv6 enter the destination IPv6 address root platform unit info channel server set ip address server ipv4 directory directory filename filename username username password password root platform unit info channel server ipv6 set ip address server ipv6 directory directory filename filename username user...

Page 1047: ...ix zip to the file name Otherwise the file import may fail You can export the file using any name then add the suffix zip manually username Text String The user name for the FTP or SFTP session password Text String The password for the FTP or SFTP session To configure the FTP or SFTP settings without a password simply omit this parameter protocol Variable ftp sftp The file transfer protocol The fo...

Page 1048: ...for 40 minutes on carrier one of the RFUs connected to RFU1 and RFU2 root logger start logger type radio logger duration 40 slot1 1 port1 1 slot2 1 port2 3 For RFU D and RFU D HP you can activate the logger on one or both radio carriers For example the following command activates the logger for 60 minutes on both carriers on both of the RFUs connected to RFU1 and RFU2 root logger start logger type...

Page 1049: ...out set duration duration To display the radio loopback timeout go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x radio loopbacks timeout show To activate an IF loopback on the modem enter the following command in radio view radio x x modem loopback if set admin towards system To deactivate an IF loopback on the modem enter the following command in radio view radio x x modem loopback if s...

Page 1050: ...addresses prevents Ethernet loops from occurring It is recommended to enable MAC address swapping if LLDP is enabled To configure MAC address swapping go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth x x loopback swap mac address admin MAC_swap admin state To view loopback status go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command eth type eth ...

Page 1051: ...ming Loopback on E1 DS1s CLI Performing Loopback on E1 DS1s CLI To configure a loopback on an E1 DS1 interface enter the following command in pwe3 view pwe3 pwe3 tdm loopback set slot slot tdm port tdm port type type Table 323 E1 DS1 Loopback CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description slot Number 1 tdm port Number 1 16 The E1 DS1 port on which to run the loopback type Variabl...

Page 1052: ...ent Continuity check Link trace Loopback Note Link trace is planned for future release PTP 820 utilizes these protocols to maintain smooth system operation and non stop data flow The following are the basic building blocks of FM MD Maintenance Domain An MD defines the management space on a network typically owned and operated by a single entity for which connectivity faults are managed via SOAM MA...

Page 1053: ...d name TR 988 md level 5 To delete an MD enter the following command in root view Before deleting an MD you must delete any MA MEG associated with the MD root ethernet soam md delete md id md id To display a list of MDs and their attributes enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam md show Table 324 Maintenance Domain CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Descripti...

Page 1054: ...e sent within the MEG enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam meg ccm interval set meg id meg id ccm ccm The following command sets an interval of one second between CCM messages for MEG 1 root ethernet soam meg ccm interval set meg id 1 ccm interval1s To determine whether MIPs are created on the MEG enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam meg mip set meg id...

Page 1055: ... to accommodate different network deployment scenarios When customer provider and operator data path flows are not distinguishable based on means of the Ethernet layer encapsulations the eight MEG levels can be shared among them to distinguish between OAM frames belonging to nested MEGs of customers providers and operators The default MEG level assignment among customer provider and operator roles...

Page 1056: ...a lower level MEP exists on the service point This option is usually used when the operator s domain is encompassed by another domain defMHFdefer No MIPs are created Configuring MEPs CLI Each MEP is attached to a service point in an Ethernet service The service and service point must be configured before you configure the MEP See Configuring Ethernet Services CLI Each MEP inherits the same VLAN C ...

Page 1057: ... local and remote MEPs you must configure the MEPs and determine which are the local MEPs To make a defined MEP a local MEP you must assign the MEP to a service point on the Ethernet service on which the MEG resides To assign a MEP to a service point enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam mep create meg id meg id mep id mep id sp id sp id mep dir mep dir The following command ...

Page 1058: ...iew root ethernet soam mep ccm enable set meg id meg id mep id mep id enabled ccm enabled The following command assigns enables CCM messages for MEP 35 on MEG 2 root ethernet soam mep ccm enable set meg id 2 mep id 35 enabled true To set a MEP s CCM LTM priority enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam mep ccm ltm prio set meg id meg id mep id mep id ccm ltm priority ccm ltm pri...

Page 1059: ...ent by this MEP mep active Variable true false true The MEP is Active false The MEP is Inactive Displaying MEP and Remote MEP Attributes CLI To display the attributes of a specific MEP enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam mep configuration general show meg id meg id meg id mep id mep id For example To display a list of remote MEPs RMEPs and their parameters per MEG and local...

Page 1060: ...d their parameters per MEG and local MEP enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam mep rmep show meg id meg id meg id meg id mep id mep id rmep id rmep id For example Table 327 MEP and Remote MEP Status Parameters CLI Parameter Definition MD Parameters MD ID The MD ID MD Name The MD name 44 characters MD Format The MD format None ...

Page 1061: ...P is located MEP Direction Up or Down MEP Active Indicates whether the MEP is enabled true or disabled false MEP CCM TX Enable Indicates whether the MEP is configured to send CCMs true or false CCM and LTM Priority The p bit included in CCMs sent by the MEP 0 7 MEP MAC Address The MAC address of the service point associated with the MEP MEP Lowest priority fault alarm The lowest defect priority th...

Page 1062: ...Remote Defect Indicator bit in the most recent CCM received by the remote MEP True RDI was received in the last CCM False No RDI was received in the last CCM Port Status The Port Status TLV in the most recent CCM received from the remote MEP Reserved for future use Interface Status The Interface Status TLV in the most recent CCM received from the remote MEP Indicates the operational status of the ...

Page 1063: ...e information without the last RX error CCM and fault messages enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam mep status general show meg id meg id mep id mep id detailed no The Last RX error CCM message field displays the frame of the last CCM that contains an error received by the MEP The Last RX Xcon fault message field displays the frame of the last CCM that contains a cross conne...

Page 1064: ... initiate the loopback enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam loopback send meg id meg id mep id mep id dest mac addr dest mac addr tx num tx num tx interval interval For example the following command initiates a loopback session with the interface having MAC address 00 0A 25 38 09 4B The session is configured to send 100 loopback messages at six second intervals root ethernet...

Page 1065: ... not in multiples of 100 the value will be rounded off to the next higher multiple of 100 Also the lowest interval is 1000 ms 1 second If you enter a smaller value it will be rounded up to 1000 ms size Number 64 1518 The frame size for the loopback messages Note that for tagged frames the frame size will be slightly larger than the selected frame size pattern Variable zeroPattern onesPatter The ty...

Page 1066: ...he MEP ID of the interface to which you want to send the loopback tx num Number 0 1024 The number of loopback messages to transmit If you enter 0 loopback will not be performed To display loopback results enter the following command in root view root ethernet soam loopback status show meg id meg id mep id mep id The following is a sample output for this command on MEG ID 127 MEP ID 1 ...

Page 1067: ...ift freq shift To transmit two tones enter the following command in radio view radio x x modem tx source set mode two tone freq shift freq shift freq shift2 freq shift To exit CW mode go to radio view and enter the following command radio x x modem tx source set admin disable Table 329 CW Mode CLI Parameters Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description freq shift Number 0 7000 Enter the frequ...

Page 1068: ...ce procedures which include visual inspection of the equipment and verification of operational parameters It is recommended to perform the procedures as often as local environmental conditions require It is recommended to notify the end customer prior to performing any preventive maintenance procedures that could affect service on the circuit Table 330 Fault Finding Checklist What to Check Check f...

Page 1069: ...t RFU RF cable between the RFU and IDU Exposure of equipment to severe conditions high temperature etc System configuration Temperature Ranges The following are the permissible IDU temperature ranges 5 C to 55 Temperature range for continuous operating temperature with high reliability 25 C to 65 C Temperature range for exceptional temperatures tested successfully with limited margins An extreme t...

Page 1070: ...RFU RJ 45 or SFP displays Orange it means this alarm is raised without Loss of Carrier This probably means the cable is not connected well Otherwise problem is probably with the IDU For PTP 820F there is an automatic software upgrade process to ensure that the RFU is always aligned to the IDU Sometimes usually due to excessive switching of the physical RFU unit by the user this process fails When ...

Page 1071: ...ard Cover so re using the existing SM Card Cover is necessary to ensure that the unit s software and configuration is maintained In some cases you may need to replace the SM Card itself in order to upgrade the unit s configuration Replacing an IDU or SM Card on an PTP 820F IDU To remove the SM Card Cover of an PTP 8210F IDU 1 Switch the unit power off 2 Loosen the screws of the SM Card Cover and r...

Page 1072: ...g an IDU or SM card Troubleshooting Tips phn 3965_006v002 Page 26 2 Figure 436 Checking the Sockets for Foreign Matter 4 Gently place the SM Card module in its place and tighten the captive screws using a flat screwdriver ...

Page 1073: ...o remove the SM Card Cover of an PTP 820G IDU 1 Switch the unit power off 2 Loosen the screws of the SM Card Cover and remove it from the IDU Figure 437 Removing the PTP 820G SM Card Cover 3 In the new IDU or if you are upgrading the SM Card the old IDU make sure that there is no foreign matter blocking the sockets in the opening where the SM Card is installed ...

Page 1074: ...M card Replacing an IDU or SM Card on an PTP 820G IDU phn 3965_006v002 Page 26 4 Figure 438 Checking the Sockets for Foreign Matter 4 Gently place the SM Card module in its place and tighten the captive screws using a flat screwdriver ...

Page 1075: ...27 1 Chapter 27 Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820G This section describes the pin outs and LEDs on each PTP 820G interface Ethernet Pin Outs and LEDs E1 DS1 Pin Outs and LEDs Radio Interface LEDs Synchronization Interface Pin Outs and LEDs Power Interface LEDs Terminal Interface Pin Outs External Alarms Unit ACT LED ...

Page 1076: ...pair A 2 BI_DA Bi directional pair A 3 BI_DB Bi directional pair B 4 BI_DC Bi directional pair C 5 BI_DC Bi directional pair C 6 BI_DB Bi directional pair B 7 BI_DD Bi directional pair D 8 BI_DD Bi directional pair D Ethernet Traffic Interface LEDs Each electrical interface has the following LEDs Port Status LED Located on the upper left of each interface Indicates the link status of the interface...

Page 1077: ...ng LED Port Status LED A Port Status LED is located on the lower left of SFP5 and the lower right of SFP6 Each LED indicates the link status of the interface o Off The interface is shut down or the signal is lost o Green The interface is enabled and the link is operational o Blinking Green The interface is transmitting and or receiving traffic Figure 440 Optical GE Interface LED ...

Page 1078: ...thernet Management Interface LEDs The MGMT interface has the following LEDs Port Status LED The LED for management interface 1 is located on the upper left of the MGMT interface The LED for management interface 2 is located on the upper right of the MGMT interface Each LED indicates the link status of the interface o Off The cable is not connected or the signal is lost o Green The interface is ena...

Page 1079: ...Chapter 27 Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820G Ethernet Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820G phn 3965_006v002 Page 27 5 Figure 441 Management FE Interface LEDs ...

Page 1080: ...IP1 Ch1 Tx TWISTED PAIR 35 OUT RING1 2 OUT TIP2 Ch2 Tx TWISTED PAIR 36 OUT RING2 3 OUT TIP3 Ch3 Tx TWISTED PAIR 37 OUT RING3 4 OUT TIP4 Ch4 Tx TWISTED PAIR 38 OUT RING4 5 OUT TIP5 Ch5 Tx TWISTED PAIR 39 OUT RING5 6 OUT TIP6 Ch6 Tx TWISTED PAIR 40 OUT RING6 7 OUT TIP7 Ch7 Tx TWISTED PAIR 41 OUT RING7 8 OUT TIP8 Ch8 Tx TWISTED PAIR 42 OUT RING8 9 OUT TIP9 Ch9 Tx TWISTED PAIR 43 OUT RING9 10 OUT TIP1...

Page 1081: ...T TIP15 Ch15 Tx TWISTED PAIR 49 16 Ch16 Tx TWISTED PAIR 50 19 Ch1 Rx TWISTED PAIR 53 20 Ch2 Rx TWISTED PAIR 54 21 IN TIP3 Ch3 Rx TWISTED PAIR 55 IN RING3 22 IN TIP4 Ch4 Rx TWISTED PAIR 56 IN RING4 23 IN TIP5 Ch5 Rx TWISTED PAIR 57 IN RING5 24 IN TIP6 Ch6 Rx TWISTED PAIR 58 IN RING6 25 IN TIP7 Ch7 Rx TWISTED PAIR 59 IN RING7 26 IN TIP8 Ch8 Rx TWISTED PAIR 60 IN RING8 27 IN TIP9 Ch9 Rx TWISTED PAIR ...

Page 1082: ...D PAIR 65 IN RING13 32 IN TIP14 Ch14 Rx TWISTED PAIR 66 IN RING14 33 IN TIP15 Ch15 Rx TWISTED PAIR 67 IN RING15 34 IN TIP16 Ch16 Rx TWISTED PAIR 68 IN RING16 17 SHELL SHIELD 18 SHELL SHIELD 51 SHELL SHIELD 52 SHELL SHIELD E1 DS1 Interface LEDs The E1 DS1 interface has the following LEDs ACT LED Remains grey E1 DS1 LED Indicates whether the interfaces are enabled with no alarms Green with alarms Re...

Page 1083: ...y LINK Indicates the status of the radio link o Off The radio is disabled o Green The radio link is operational o Red There is an LOF or Excessive BER alarm on the radio o Blinking Green An IF loopback is activated and the result is OK o Blinking Red An IF loopback is activated and the result is Failed RFU Indicates the status of the RFU o Off The radio is disabled o Green The RFU is functioning n...

Page 1084: ...he upper left of the interface and one on the upper right of the interface T3 Status LED Located on the upper left of the interface Indicates the status of T3 input clock o Off There is no T3 input clock or the input is illegal o Green There is legal T3 input clock and a sync source for this interface is configured T4 Status LED Located on the upper right of the interface Indicates the status of T...

Page 1085: ...Chapter 27 Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820G Synchronization Interface Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820G phn 3965_006v002 Page 27 11 Table 335 Sync Interface LEDs ...

Page 1086: ...PTP 820G Power Interface LEDs PTP 820G phn 3965_006v002 Page 27 12 Power Interface LEDs PTP 820G There is an ACT LED for each power interface The LED is Green when power is being fed to thatinterface Figure 444 Power Interface LEDs ...

Page 1087: ... Pin Outs PTP 820G PTP 820G includes an RJ 45 terminal interface RS 232 A local craft terminal can be connected to the terminal interface for local CLI management of the unit Table 336 Terminal Interface Pin Out Diagram RJ45 Pin no Description 1 NC 2 NC 3 NC 4 GND 5 Terminal RX System TX 6 Terminal TX System RX 7 NC 8 NC ...

Page 1088: ...nput alarms are configurable according to 1 Intermediate 2 Critical 3 Major 4 Minor 5 Warning The output alarm is configured according to predefined categories External Alarm Pin Outs Table 337 External Alarm Interface Pin Out Diagram RJ45 Pin no Description 1 External input alarm 1 2 External input alarm 2 3 External input alarm 3 4 External input alarm 4 5 External input alarm 5 6 Relay 1 normal...

Page 1089: ...3965_006v002 Page 27 15 Unit ACT LED PTP 820G A general ACT LED for the unit is located on the lower left of the PTP 820G front panel This LED is labeled UNIT ACT and indicates the general status of the unit Off Power is off Green Power is on Figure 445 Unit ACT LED ...

Page 1090: ... Outs and LEDs PTP 820F This section describes the pin outs and LEDs on each PTP 820F interface Ethernet LEDs and Pin Outs E1 DS1 LEDs and Pin Outs Radio Interface LEDs and Pin Outs Power Interface LEDs Synchronization Interface LEDs and Pin Outs Terminal Interface Pin Outs External Alarms Unit ACT LED ...

Page 1091: ...C 6 BI_DB Bi directional pair B 7 BI_DD Bi directional pair D 8 BI_DD Bi directional pair D Ethernet Traffic Interface LEDs Each electrical interface has the following LEDs Port Status LED Located on the upper left of each interface Indicates the link status of the interface o Off The interface is shut down or the signal is lost o Green The interface is enabled and the link is operational o Blinki...

Page 1092: ...terface LEDs SFP1 through SFP4 For optical interfaces SFP5 and SFP6 the LEDs are located between RFU and RFU2 on the left and RFU3 SFP5 and SFP6 on the right Each optical interface has the following LED Port Status LED A Port Status LED is located on the lower left of SFP5 and the lower right of SFP6 Each LED indicates the link status of the interface o Off The interface is shut down or the signal...

Page 1093: ...LEDs The MGMT interface has the following LEDs Port Status LED The LED for management interface 1 is located on the upper left of the MGMT interface The LED for management interface 2 is located on the upper right of the MGMT interface Each LED indicates the link status of the interface o Off The cable is not connected or the signal is lost o Green The interface is enabled and the link is operatio...

Page 1094: ...n Out Diagram E1 DS1 1 16 Pin Signal Label on the Twisted Pair Type 1 OUT TIP1 Ch1 Tx TWISTED PAIR 35 OUT RING1 2 OUT TIP2 Ch2 Tx TWISTED PAIR 36 OUT RING2 3 OUT TIP3 Ch3 Tx TWISTED PAIR 37 OUT RING3 4 OUT TIP4 Ch4 Tx TWISTED PAIR 38 OUT RING4 5 OUT TIP5 Ch5 Tx TWISTED PAIR 39 OUT RING5 6 OUT TIP6 Ch6 Tx TWISTED PAIR 40 OUT RING6 7 OUT TIP7 Ch7 Tx TWISTED PAIR 41 OUT RING7 8 OUT TIP8 Ch8 Tx TWISTE...

Page 1095: ...P15 Ch15 Tx TWISTED PAIR 49 OUT RING15 16 OUT TIP16 Ch16 Tx TWISTED PAIR 50 OUT RING16 19 IN TIP1 Ch1 Rx TWISTED PAIR 53 IN RING1 20 IN TIP2 Ch2 Rx TWISTED PAIR 54 IN RING2 21 IN TIP3 Ch3 Rx TWISTED PAIR 55 IN RING3 22 IN TIP4 Ch4 Rx TWISTED PAIR 56 IN RING4 23 IN TIP5 Ch5 Rx TWISTED PAIR 57 IN RING5 24 IN TIP6 Ch6 Rx TWISTED PAIR 58 IN RING6 25 IN TIP7 Ch7 Rx TWISTED PAIR 59 IN RING7 26 IN TIP8 C...

Page 1096: ...4 Ch14 Rx TWISTED PAIR 66 IN RING14 33 IN TIP15 Ch15 Rx TWISTED PAIR 67 IN RING15 34 IN TIP16 Ch16 Rx TWISTED PAIR 68 IN RING16 17 SHELL SHIELD 18 SHELL SHIELD 51 SHELL SHIELD 52 SHELL SHIELD E1 DS1 Interface LEDs The E1 DS1 interface has the following LEDs ACT LED Indicates whether the TDM card is working properly Green or if there is an error or a problem with the card s functionality Red E1 DS1...

Page 1097: ...Chapter 28 Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820F E1 DS1 Interface LEDs and Pin Outs PTP 820F phn 3965_006v002 Page 28 23 Figure 449 E1 DS1 Interface LEDs ...

Page 1098: ...al pair B 7 BI_DD Bi directional pair D 8 BI_DD Bi directional pair D Radio Interface LEDs The radio interfaces have the following LEDs Optical Interfaces Four LEDs are located between the SFP connectors These LEDs indicate the status of the radio interfaces and the SFP5 and SFP6 Ethernet interfaces For the radio interfaces the LEDs indicate Figure 450 Optical Interface LEDs o Off The Admin status...

Page 1099: ...ed between the interface and the RFU and the Operational status of the radio unit is Up This LED does not however show the status of the radio link o Orange A cable is connected between the interface and the RFU but communication has not been established between the IDU and the RFU This can be a temporary state while IDU RFU communication is being established o Red The Admin status of the radio un...

Page 1100: ...02 Page 28 26 Power Interface LEDs PTP 820 F There is an ACT LED for each power interface The LED is Green when the voltage being fed to the power interface is within range and Red if the voltage is not within range or if a power cable is not connected Figure 452 Power Interface LEDs ...

Page 1101: ...2 T3_IN_P 3 1PPS_P 4 T4_OUT_N 5 T4_OUT_P 6 1PPS_N 7 ToD_P or PPS_IN_P 8 ToD_N or PPS_IN_N Synchronization Interface LEDs The synchronization interface contains two LEDs one on the upper left of the interface and one on the upper right of the interface T3 Status LED Located on the upper left of the interface Indicates the status of T3 input clock o Off There is no T3 input clock or the input is ill...

Page 1102: ...Chapter 28 Pin Outs and LEDs PTP 820F Synchronization Interface LEDs and Pin Outs PTP 820F phn 3965_006v002 Page 28 28 Figure 453 Sync Interface LEDs ...

Page 1103: ...rminal Interface Pin Outs PTP 820F phn 3965_006v002 Page 28 29 Terminal Interface Pin Outs PTP 820F Table 343 Terminal Interface Pin Out Diagram RJ 45 Pin no Description Pin no DB 9 4 GND 5 5 Terminal RX System TX 2 6 Terminal TX System RX 3 ...

Page 1104: ... Alarm Pin Outs PTP 820F Table 344 External Alarm Interface Pin Out Diagram DB 9 Pin no Description 1 External input alarm 1 2 External input alarm 2 3 External input alarm 3 4 External input alarm 4 5 External input alarm 5 6 Relay 1 normally closed pin 7 Relay 1 common pin 8 Relay 1 normally open pin 9 GND ...

Page 1105: ...3965_006v002 Page 28 31 Unit ACT LED PTP 820F A general ACT LED for the unit is located on the lower left of the PTP 820F front panel This LED is labeled UNIT ACT and indicates the general status of the unit Off Power is off Green Power is on Figure 454 Unit ACT LED ...

Page 1106: ...ital loopback 25 main board extreme temperature alarm Alarm Unit Temperature is out of system specified limits Warning 26 main board low voltage alarm Alarm Unit input voltage is too low Warning 27 main board high voltage alarm Alarm Unit input voltage is too high Warning 28 main board warm reset Event Unit warm reset Indeterminat e 29 main board cold reset Event Unit reset Warning 30 main board p...

Page 1107: ...rroring 120 port speed mismatch alarm Alarm Port speed mismatch Major System reset is required after the port speed was changed Change the port speed to its previous value OR Reset the system 150 auto state propagation interface down alarm Alarm Interface is down due to automatic state propagation Major Failure of the radio interface which is monitored for automatic state propagation causes automa...

Page 1108: ... Event TDM interface is down Warning 401 TrafficPhyLocAlarm Alarm Loss of Carrier Major Cable disconnected Defective cable Check connection of cable Replace cable 407 ethernet link up Event Ethernet interface is up Warning 408 ethernet link down Event Ethernet interface is down Warning 601 radio excessive ber Alarm Radio excessive BER Major Fade in the link Defective IF cable Fault in RFU Fault in...

Page 1109: ...o link up Event Radio interface is up Warning 606 radio link down Event Radio interface is down Warning 607 rfu frequency scanner in process Alarm Frequency scanner in progress Warning The frequency scanner activated Stop the frequency scanner process 801 corrupted file Alarm Corrupted inventory file Warning The inventory file is corrupted Reset the system Reinstall the software 802 file not found...

Page 1110: ...larms except the activation key violation alarm are cleared and no new alarms are raised Get the list of features configurations that are violated via the activation key information report Install a new activation key that allows the use of all required features 908 demo license about to expire alarm Alarm Demo mode is about to expire Major Demo mode allowed period is about to end within 10 days D...

Page 1111: ...tiated switchover due to local failure or user command Check the system for local failures 1007 radio protection no mate Alarm Radio protection no mate Major Radio protection function is missing radio module module defected or disabled Add radio module Replace a defective existing radio module Make sure all radio interfaces are enabled 1008 radio protection remote switch request Event Remote switc...

Page 1112: ...llation status Warning 1105 software new version installed Event New version installed Warning A software version has been installed but system has not been reset 1111 software user confirmation for version Event User approved download of software version file Warning 1112 software download status Event Software download status Warning 1113 software download missing components Event Missing SW com...

Page 1113: ...g Restore operation cancelled because of user command or execution of another configuration management operation Try again 1156 file transfer issued Event User issued command for transfer of configuration file Warning User command 1157 file transfer succeeded Event Configuration file transfer successful Warning Configuration file transfer successful 1158 file transfer failure Event Configuration f...

Page 1114: ...ed Warning Restore operation started because of user command 1201 file missed Alarm Modem firmware file not found Critical Modem file is missing Download software package Reset the system 1202 load failed Alarm Modem firmware was not loaded successfully Critical Modem firmware file is corrupted System failure Download software package Reset the system 1203 modem wd reset Event Modem watch dog rese...

Page 1115: ...ownload the specific radio MRMC RFU file 1312 script loading failed Alarm Radio errrror MRMC script loading failed Major Damaged hardware module Replace the radio hardware module 1401 incompatible rfu tx calibration Alarm Incompatible RFU TX calibration Major RFU calibration tables require SW upgrade Upgrade IDU SW 1501 remote communication failure Alarm Remote communication failure Critical Fade ...

Page 1116: ...ignal level has been at its maximum value for longer than allowed This is probably caused by a configuration error or link planning error Correct the transmission levels The alarm will be cleared only upon manual clearing 1697 radio unit extreme temperature Alarm Radio unit extreme temperature Warning Installation conditions Defective RFU Check installation conditions Verify operation as per produ...

Page 1117: ...ors Verify that the N Type connector inner pin is not spliced Replace RMC Radio Modem Card Replace RFU 1702 cable short Alarm Cable short Major Physical short at the IF cable Check IF cable and connectors Verify that the N Type connector inner pin is not spliced Replace RMC Radio Modem Card Replace RFU 1703 communication failure Alarm RFU communication failure Warning Defective IF cable IF cable n...

Page 1118: ...tallation conditions Verify operation as per product s specs Replace RFU 1707 radio unit abc incompatible rfu Alarm RFU is incompatible with ABC configuration Warning The RFU type does not support the type of Multi Carrier ABC the user has configured Replace the RFU with an RFU type that supports the configured Multi Carrier ABC type 1708 freq set automatically Event RFU frequency was set automati...

Page 1119: ...ed Replace RMC Radio Modem Card Replace RFU 1713 pa extreme temp cond Alarm RFU PA extreme temperature Warning Installation conditions Defective RFU Check installation conditions Replace RFU 1721 reset occurred Event RFU reset Major 1722 rfu loopback active Alarm RFU loopback is active Major User has activated RFU loopback Disable RFU loopback 1723 rfu mode changed to combined Event RFU mode chang...

Page 1120: ...ns Replace local remote RFU 1728 rx level path1 out of range Alarm RFU RX level path1 out of range Warning Improper installation Fading event Defective RFU Check that the fault is not due to rain multi path fading or lack of LOS Check link settings TX power TX frequency Check antenna alignment Check antenna connections Replace local remote RFU 1729 rx level path2 out of range Alarm RFU RX level pa...

Page 1121: ...connectors Replace RIC Radio Interface Card Replace RFU 1731 power supply radio unit cable open Alarm Power supply cable open Major Power is enabled but consumption is lower than threshold Check ETH cable and connectors Verify RFU is connected If RFU connected with optical cable disable power interface 1732 power supply radio unit cable short Alarm Power supply cable short Major Power is enabled b...

Page 1122: ... card extracted from slot Event Card was extracted from slot Warning Card was extracted from slot NA 1738 card failure Alarm Card is in Failure state Major Card is down as a result of card failure Reset Card Check if slot was disabled 1739 card fpga fw not found Alarm FPGA Firmware file not found Critical There is no FPGA file found on the Main Board for the card on the slot NA 1740 card fw load f...

Page 1123: ...o Up state NA 1747 card state is up with alarms Event Card operational state is Up with Alarms Indeterminat e Card state was change to Up state but with Alarms indication NA 1748 card unexpected Alarm Unexpected Card Type in slot Minor Expected card type is different than the actual card type Insert Expected Card Change Expected Card Type 1749 slot disabled Event Slot was Disabled Indeterminat e T...

Page 1124: ...ard insertion event Event Power Supply was inserted to slot Warning Power Supply was inserted to slot 1760 pdc card missing Alarm Power Supply is missing in slot Major Power Supply is missing Slot enabled when empty Insert Power Supply Disable slot 1761 pdc over voltage Alarm Over voltage Major System Power Voltage higher than allowed NA 1762 pdc under voltage Alarm Under voltage Major System Powe...

Page 1125: ...rm Power up Warning 1770 cable lof rfu Event Unit performing power up Major 1771 cable error rfu Alarm RFU cable error Major Errors in signal from IDU to XCVR Check the IF cable and connectors Verify that the N Type TNC connector inner pin is not spliced Replace RMC Replace XCVR 1772 xpic data los Alarm Radio XPIC sync loss Major Signalling between RMCs Radio Modem Cards for XPIC functionality has...

Page 1126: ...mrmc running script deleted Event MRMC running script is deleted Warning New installed software package does not include the running MRMC radio script Make sure the required software package include the running MRMC radio script Download and install the correct software package 1781 mrmc running script updated Event MRMC running script is updated Warning New installed software package does has an ...

Page 1127: ... reset of TDM LIC System malfunction Power cycle the TDM LIC 2003 pwe3 pwc s front panel clock los Alarm Loss of Signal LOS on TDM LIC s front panel clock port Major Line is not properly connected External equipment is faulty Reconnect line Check line cables Check external equipment Power cycle the TDM LIC 2004 pwe3 pwc s host pw lic comm disrupt Alarm Communication with TDM LIC is disrupted in Ho...

Page 1128: ...s s misconnection Alarm Misconnection alarm on TDM service Major Stray packets with wrong RTP configurations are received and dropped Check TDM service configuration 2012 pwe3 tdm port s ais Alarm Alarm Indication Signal AIS on TDM LIC TDM port Major Line is not properly connected External equipment is faulty Reconnect line Check line cables Check external equipment 2013 pwe3 tdm port s lof Alarm ...

Page 1129: ...m port s unexpected signal alarm Alarm E1 DS1 Unexpected signal on TDM LIC TDM port Warning Port is disabled Line is connected to a disabled port Enable relevant port Disconnect cable from relevant port 2021 pwe3 pwc s ssm rx changed Event SSM received pattern change was discovered Warning No action is required 2022 pwe3 stm1oc3 s excessive ber alarm Alarm Excessive BER on TDM LIC STM1 OC3 port Ma...

Page 1130: ...3 port Warning 2027 pwe3 stm1oc3 s sfp absent alarm Alarm SFP absent in TDM LIC STM1 OC3 port Critical SFP is not properly installed SFP is faulty Install SFP properly Replace the card 2028 pwe3 stm1oc3 s sfp failure alarm Alarm SFP failure on TDM LIC STM1 OC3 port Critical SFP is not properly installed SFP is faulty Install SFP properly Replace the card 2029 pwe3 stm1oc3 s sfp tx fail alarm Alarm...

Page 1131: ...ived on TDM LIC STM1 OC3 port changed Warning 2033 pwe3 vc12vt15 s ais alarm Alarm Alarm Indication Signal AIS on TDM LIC VC12 VT1 5 Minor Line is not properly connected External equipment is faulty Reconnect line Check line cables Check external equipment Power cycle the TDM LIC 2034 pwe3 vc12vt15 s excessive ber alarm Alarm Excessive BER on TDM LIC VC12 VT1 5 Minor Line is not properly connected...

Page 1132: ...nt Power cycle the TDM LIC 2038 pwe3 vc12vt15 s rcv slm alarm Alarm Signal Label Mismatch SLM received on TDM LIC VC12 VT1 5 Minor J2 misconfiguration Line is not properly connected External equipment is faulty Make sure expected and receive J2 match Reconnect line Check line cables Check external equipment Power cycle the TDM LIC 2039 pwe3 vc12vt15 s signal degrade alarm Alarm Signal Degrade on T...

Page 1133: ...nor TDM LIC card is not installed in the shelf Install the missing TDM LIC card 2044 pwe3 card group s protection switch evt Event TDM LIC card protection switch over priority Warning LOS alarm on a STM1 interface of the TDM LIC card protection group member A TDM LIC card protection group member was disabled or pulled out of the shelf Check line cables Check external equipment 2045 pwe3 vc12vt15 s...

Page 1134: ... group 2201 MC ABC local cap below Alarm Multi Carrier ABC bandwidth is below the threshold Major One of the radio channels in the Multi Carrier ABC group has a lower capacity than expected Minimum bandwidth threshold configuration is wrong Check link performance on all radio channels in Multi Carrier ABC group Check radio alarms for channels in Multi Carrier ABC group Check configuration of Multi...

Page 1135: ... ABC Lvds Error Sl7 Alarm LVDS RX Error Slot 7 Major Hardware failure between RMC and TCC cards Replace RMC Replace TCC Replace chassis 2209 MC ABC Lvds Error Sl8 Alarm LVDS RX Error Slot 8 Major Hardware failure between RMC and TCC cards Replace RMC Replace TCC Replace chassis 2210 MC ABC Lvds Error Sl9 Alarm LVDS RX Error Slot 9 Major Hardware failure between RMC and TCC cards Replace RMC Replac...

Page 1136: ...ismatch Ch5 Alarm Multi Carrier ABC Channel Id Mismatch Ch5 Warning Configuration failure Compare Channel ID configuration with remote side 2224 MC ABC Ch Id Mismatch Ch6 Alarm Multi Carrier ABC Channel Id Mismatch Ch6 Warning Configuration failure Compare Channel ID configuration with remote side 2225 MC ABC Ch Id Mismatch Ch7 Alarm Multi Carrier ABC Channel Id Mismatch Ch7 Warning Configuration ...

Page 1137: ...BC Channel Id Manual Disabled Ch7 Warning Admin state for channel is down Enable admin state for channel 2242 MC ABC Ch Id Disabled Ch8 Alarm Multi Carrier ABC Channel Id Manual Disabled Ch8 Warning Admin state for channel is down Enable admin state for channel 2300 protection configuration mismatc Alarm Protection configuration mismatch Major The configuration between the protected devices is not...

Page 1138: ...ure the relevant capacity mode to 1 Gbps mode 3004 abc mode not functional until reset Alarm Multi Carrier ABC group is not functional in current configured capacity mode until chassis is reset Warning Multi Carrier ABC group capacity mode is different than the configured capacity mode Reset chassis 4000 hw failure Alarm Card has one or more HW failures Critical One or more HW faults Replace card ...

Page 1139: ...nt Event Security log upload failed Indeterminat e Security log upload failed 5006 security log upload succeeded event Event Security log upload succeeded Indeterminat e Security log upload succeeded 5010 force mode alarm Alarm System is in sync force mode state Warning User command 5011 sync quality change event Event The sync source quality level was changed Major 5012 system clock in holdover m...

Page 1140: ...larm T4 interface at loopback mode Warning 5030 soam connectivity failure Alarm A connectivity failure in MA MEG Minor Wrong link configurations Check the link in the traffic path 5031 soam def error failure Alarm Error CCM received Major Invalid CCMs has been received Check the link in the traffic path 5032 soam def mac failure Alarm Remote mep MAC status not up Minor Remote MEP s associated MAC ...

Page 1141: ...e of the leap seconds flags have changed Warning 5042 ptp message interval change Event 1588 BC message interval change detected Warning 5043 ptp message rate announce Alarm 1588 BC announce message rate is below expected Major Misconfiguration of the peer system Check the configuration of the peer system 5044 ptp message rate sync Alarm 1588 BC sync message rate is below expected Major Misconfigu...

Page 1142: ...ey Exchange Protocol in progress Traffic has been blocked Indeterminat e 5105 kep remote initiated Event Key Exchange Protocol initiated by remote side Indeterminat e 5107 bypass self test alarm Alarm FIPS Bypass Self Test failed Critical Disk failure 5108 post fail alarm Alarm Power On Self Test Failed Critical System failure Reboot the unit 5109 main board non fips alarm Alarm Main Board is not ...

Page 1143: ...ave are connected MIMO 4x4 only Replace faulty units and check that cables are plugged 31003 Unsuitable hardware for MIMO alarm Alarm Unsuitable hardware for MIMO Critical Unsuitable hardware for MIMO operation requirements Dual carrier RFUs MIMO 2x2 and 4x4 RFUs with MIMO bus interface MIMO 4x4 Clock source sharing capability MIMO 4x4 Make sure both RFUs are compatible for MIMO operation 31004 Un...

Page 1144: ...in both Agg1 Agg2 carriers 31101 AMCC Inconsistent MRMC Script alarm Alarm Inconsistent MRMC script between members Critical All members of a group must be configured to the same MRMC Script Set the members to the appropriate MRMC script 31102 AMCC Inconsistent radio frequency alarm Alarm Inconsistent radio frequency Critical Radio TX RX frequency is not identical on all AMCC carriers Set same rad...

Page 1145: ...t Power Control BBS Baseband Switching BER Bit Error Rate BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units CBS Committed Burst Size CCDP Co Channel Dual Polarization CCITT Comité Consultatif International de Télégraph et des Télécommunications ITU CET Carrier Ethernet Transport CFM Connectivity Fault Management CIR Committed Information Rate CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree CLI Command Line Interface CoS Cla...

Page 1146: ...abit Ethernet GND Ground HSB Hot Standby HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS Secured Hypertext Transfer Protocol IDC Indoor Controller IDU Indoor Unit IF Intermediate Frequency ISO International Organization for Standardization ITU International Telecom Union ITU R International Telecom Union former CCIR ITU T International Telecom Union former CCITT LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LAG L...

Page 1147: ...TP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MUX Multiplexer NE Network Element NMS Network Management System NTP Network Time Protocol OAM Operation Administration Maintenance Protocols OCB Outdoor Circulator Box PBS Peak Burst Rate PC Personal Computer PCB Printed Circuit Board PDV Packed Delay Variation PIR Peak Information Rate PM Performance Monitoring PSN Packet Switched Network PTP Precision Timing P...

Page 1148: ...NP Service Network Point SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SOAM Service Operations Administration and Maintenance SONET Synchronous Optical NETwork SP Service Point SSH Secured Shell Protocol SSM Synchronization Status Message STP Spanning Tree Protocol SyncE Synchronous Ethernet SVCE Service Channel Equipment TC Traffic Class TCN Topology Change Notification TDM Time Division Multiplexing TIM Tra...

Page 1149: ...phn 3965_006v002 Page V Term Definition WRED Weighted Random Early Detection XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Cancellation ...

Reviews:

No comments